JP2017056304A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of alternately and easily switching between a first state and a second state.SOLUTION: In a seesaw member 840, a reception surface 844 for receiving game balls guided from a guide means is positioned at one end side of a rotating shaft, thus allowing the one end side to go down because of weight of the game balls received by the reception surface 844, even in a second state, where the other end side is lowered and at the same time the one end is raised. More specifically, a first state, where the one end side is lowered and at the same time the other end side is raised, can be formed. As a result, even if a plurality of game balls continuously drop, the first state and the second state can be switched alternately and easily.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 52

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a seesaw member that is rotatably supported by a rotation shaft between one end side and the other end side. Then, there exists a game machine which forms a 2nd state, respectively (patent document 1).

JP 2007-283136 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that when a plurality of game balls are continuous, the first state and the second state cannot be switched alternately.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can easily switch between a first state and a second state.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a seesaw member rotatably supported by a rotating shaft between one end side and the other end side, and the seesaw member is in an unloaded state. Then, one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised, and the game ball is placed on the other end side with respect to the rotating shaft, so that the one end side is raised and the other end side is The second state is lowered, and includes guide means for guiding a game ball to the seesaw member, and the seesaw member includes a receiving surface for receiving the game ball guided from the guide means. A surface is located on the one end side with respect to the rotation shaft.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein when the receiving surface receives a gaming ball guided from the guiding means in the first state, the receiving ball is moved to the other end. It is formed so that it can be sent to the side.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising a decorative member that is rotatably supported, and one end of the seesaw member is connected to the decorative member, The decorative member is displaced along with the rotation about the rotation axis.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first state and the second state can be easily switched alternately.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the first aspect, switching from the first state to the second state can be performed reliably.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, it is possible to enhance the production effect.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a rotary body raising / lowering unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotary body raising / lowering unit. It is a decomposition | disassembly back surface perspective view of a rotary body raising / lowering unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a center unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a right unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a container. (A) is a side view of the container in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and (b) is a front view of the container in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st rotary body. It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of a 1st rotary body and a 2nd rotary body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body rotating. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body rotating. It is a front view of a light emission decoration unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a light emission decoration unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a light emitting decoration unit. (A) is a front view of the central rotary unit in the state arranged in the retracted position, and (b) is a front view of the central rotary unit in the state arranged in the extended position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center rotation unit. It is a decomposition | disassembly back surface perspective view of a center rotation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. (A) is a front view of a connection displacement member, (b) is a side view of the connection displacement member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIIb in FIG. 32 (a), and (c) is a side view of FIG. 32 (a). It is sectional drawing of the connection displacement member in a XXXIIa-XXXIIa line. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. (A) is a front schematic diagram for demonstrating the positional relationship of a front base and a connection displacement member, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the front base and connection displacement member in the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line | wire of Fig.39 (a). FIG. (A) is a front schematic diagram for demonstrating the positional relationship of a front base and a 1st displacement member, (b) is a front base and the 1st displacement member in the arrow XLb direction view of Fig.40 (a). It is a side surface schematic diagram, (c) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the front base and the 1st displacement member in the XLc-XLc line | wire of Fig.40 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is a partial exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a rear view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an overhang position. It is sectional drawing of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engagement effect | action by a base side engaging member and a displacement side engaging member. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the 1st displacement member in the XLVIII part of Drawing 47 (c), and the 2nd displacement member, (b) is the 1st displacement member in the arrow XLVIIIb direction view of Drawing 48 (a). And it is a side view of the 2nd displacement member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a winning device. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a winning device. (A) is a front view of the winning device, (b) is a rear view of the winning device, and (c) is a top view of the winning device. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the prize-winning apparatus in the LIIa-LIIa line | wire of FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the winning device along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 52 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning device along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 52 (b). FIG. 53 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the winning device taken along line LIV-LIV in FIG. It is a back surface schematic diagram of a winning device. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board which expanded the LVI part of FIG. 2 partially. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board which expanded the LVI part of FIG. 2 partially. It is a front perspective view of a center frame. It is a front view of an area | region formation part. FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of a region formation portion taken along line LX-LX in FIG. 59. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the right rotation unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the right rotation unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the right rotation unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a top view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a top view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the right rotation unit in 6th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. (A) to (c) is a schematic front view of a right rotation unit in the fourth embodiment, and (d) to (g) are schematic front views of the right rotation unit in the sixth embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the right rotation unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the left rotation unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is a front view of a guide part. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the forward path from the retracted position toward the extended position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the forward path from the retracted position toward the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating an outward path from a retracted position to an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating an outward path from a retracted position to an extended position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the left rotation unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the forward path from the retracted position toward the extended position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the forward path from the retracted position toward the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating an outward path from a retracted position to an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating an outward path from a retracted position to an extended position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in 10th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the cage, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the cage along CXVIIb-CXVII line b in (a), and (c) is along CXVIIc-CXVIIc line in (a). It is sectional drawing of a holder | retainer. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating an outward path from a retracted position to an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating an outward path from a retracted position to an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the left rotation unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the forward path from the retracted position toward the extended position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the forward path from the retracted position toward the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating an outward path from a retracted position to an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating an outward path from a retracted position to an extended position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a partial exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit in 12th Embodiment. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base taken along line CXXXIIb-CXXXIIb in (a). It is a partial cross section schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for explaining the engagement operation by the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member. It is a partial exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit in 13th Embodiment. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base taken along line CXXXVb-CXXXVb in (a). It is a partial cross-section schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engaging action by a front base and a displacement side engaging member. It is a partial exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit in 14th Embodiment. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the left rotation unit in the state where the 2nd displacement member has been arranged in the retreat position, and (b) is the elements on the CXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb line of (a) partial expansion section of the left rotation unit It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the left rotation unit in the state where the 2nd displacement member has been arranged in the overhang position, (b) is the elements on the CXXXIXb-CXXXIXb line of (a) partial expansion of the left rotation unit It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. It is a partial exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit in 15th Embodiment. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the front base, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base along the CXLIb-CXLIb line in (a). It is a partial cross section schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for explaining the engagement operation by the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member. It is a partial exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit in 16th Embodiment. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the front base, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base along the CXLIVb-CXLIVb line in (a). It is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engaging action by a front base (opening) and a displacement side engaging member. It is a partial exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit in 17th Embodiment. It is an upper surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engaging action by a back surface base and a displacement side engaging member. It is a disassembled perspective view of the right rotation unit in 18th Embodiment. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position. It is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section at the time of operating toward the retracted position from the extended position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the right rotation unit in the nineteenth embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position. It is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section at the time of operating toward the retracted position from the extended position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the winning device in 20th Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing of the winning device in the state in which the seesaw member formed the 1st state, (b) is sectional drawing of the winning device in the state in which the seesaw member formed the 2nd state. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of the winning device in 21st Embodiment. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of the winning device in 22nd Embodiment. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a prize-winning apparatus. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a winning device in a 23rd embodiment. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a prize-winning apparatus. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a prize-winning apparatus. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the winning device in 24th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a winning device. (A) is a front view of a rotating shaft, (b) is a side view of the rotating shaft in the arrow CLXXXb direction view of (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the winning device in the state in which the seesaw member formed the 1st state, (b) is sectional drawing of the winning device in the state in which the seesaw member formed the 2nd state. (A) is sectional drawing of the winning apparatus in the CLXXIIIa-CLXXIIIa line in FIG. 172 (a), (b) is sectional drawing of the winning apparatus in the CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb line in FIG. 172 (b). It is a disassembled front perspective view of the winning device in 25th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a winning device. (A) is sectional drawing of the winning device in the state in which the seesaw member formed the 1st state, (b) is sectional drawing of the winning device in the state in which the seesaw member formed the 2nd state. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device along the line CLXXVIIa-CLXXVIIa in FIG. 176 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. ) Is a cross-sectional view of the winning device taken along the line CLXXVIIc-CLXXVIIc in FIG. 176 (b), and (d) is a sectional view of the winning device taken along the line CLXXVIId-CLXXVIId in FIG. 176 (b).

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 60, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 16 a is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general prize. It is configured by assembling a mouth 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a third winning port 82, a variable winning device 65, a first through gate 66, a second through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. The peripheral edge is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood on which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side cannot be seen by the player. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the third winning port 82, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640 and the third prize opening 82. It is configured. Specifically, when the ball has won the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while the ball has won the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. In this case, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the winning of any of the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the third winning port 82. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the big hit type if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means a game state in which a ball is likely to win the third winning opening 82. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. The time to be changed is also changed, and a longer time is set as compared with the normal time. When the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are in an opened state (open state), the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are closed (closed state). Compared to the case where the ball is in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, it becomes easier to win the ball. Therefore, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  Note that the opening time of the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 is not changed or changed during the probability change or in the short time. In addition to changing the time, it is also possible to make a change to increase the number of times the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are opened per one time as compared with normal time. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. It is also possible to change at least one of the opening time and the number of times the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are opened per one time. In addition, during the probability change or in a short time, the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened for the first time or per time. The number of times of opening the electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82 may not be changed, and only the probability of winning the second symbol may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal case.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B triggered by any one of the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the third winning port 82 (starting winning). While synchronizing, the third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that displays the variation of the third symbol, and the spheres of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 There is provided a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variably display the second symbol with the passage as a trigger.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, when the rotating body lifting unit 300, the central idler unit 400, and the left and right rotating unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 protrudes into the opening of the center frame 86 and opens. It can be visually recognized through the section.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the second symbol display device displays a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)). Are displayed so that they are alternately lit for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  When the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the pachinko machine 10 is connected to the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82. The first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Accordingly, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, the player is given many opportunities to open the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a of the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 during the probability change and the time reduction.

  It is to be noted that the probability of hitting is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a per hit, When the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening during the short time, the time required to display the variation of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the left area of the variable display device unit 80, and the second through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the right area of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are configured such that, of the balls launched onto the game board, a part of the balls flowing down the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the second symbol winning lottery is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of passages of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 of the sphere is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained spheres is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above and the second symbol. A hold lamp (not shown) is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls to be retained for the passage of the spheres of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). It may be set to. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. A third winning opening 82 is disposed on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in front view. When a ball enters the second prize opening 640 and the third prize opening 82, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second prize opening switch is turned on. Accordingly, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) makes a big win lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, each of the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the third winning port 82 is also one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 The number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first winning slot 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second winning slot 640 and the third winning slot 82 are as follows. Different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 and the third prize opening 82 May be configured as five.

  The first winning combination 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The first electric combination 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the first electric combination 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and the ball is unlikely to win the second winning opening 640. Yes. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640 a is The open state (enlarged state) is entered, and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  Further, the second winning combination 82a is attached to the third winning opening 82. The second electric accessory 82a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the second electric accessory 82a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the third winning opening 82. ing. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the second through gate 67, the second electric accessory 82 a The open state (enlarged state) is entered, and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the third winning opening 82.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are opened (enlarged) is increased. Furthermore, during the time when the probability is changing or when the time is short, the time during which the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are opened also becomes longer than normal. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 during the probability change or the shorter time than in the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit between the case where the ball is won at the first winning port 64 and the case where the ball is won at the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 is a high probability even in a low probability state. The situation is the same. However, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is that the ball hits the first prize slot 64 when the ball wins the second prize slot 640 and the third prize slot 82. It is set higher than when winning. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a as in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, and the ball can always win. It is in a state.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 are often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82. A ball is fired so as to pass the left of the variable display device unit 80 toward the first winning port 64 without an electric accessory (so-called “left-handed”), and by winning the first winning port 64 It is advantageous for a player to obtain a lot of jackpot lottery opportunities and aim to win a jackpot.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the second through gate 67 makes it easy for the second electric accessory 82a attached to the third winning opening 82 to be in an open state, and wins the third winning opening 82. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is fired toward the third prize opening 82 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and the second through gate 67 is passed. It is advantageous for the player to place the second electric accessory 82a in an open state and aim for a 15R probability variation big hit by winning the third winning opening 82.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  In addition to the above-described form, either the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67 may be selected by a lottery for a symbol different from the second symbol when a ball passes. By the lottery of the symbol, the second electric combination 82a associated with the third winning opening 82 or the first electric combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 may be displaced to the open state. In this case, since the symbols drawn by the balls passing through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are different, the electric combination that the balls pass through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 and opened. Will be selected one by one.

  Thus, for example, if the second electric combination 82a is opened when a winning is selected for the second symbol, when the ball is hit right and passed through the second through gate 67, the second symbol is drawn, When winning is selected for the two symbols, the second electric accessory 82a is opened. When the ball is left-handed and passed through the first through gate 66, a symbol different from the second symbol is selected and the second symbol When winning is selected for a symbol different from the symbol, a gaming state in which the first electric accessory 640a is opened can be obtained.

  Therefore, if the gaming state is easy to win the lottery of the second symbol during the probability change, and the gaming state is easy to hit a symbol different from the second symbol during the short time, the second through gate 67 is hit right during the probability changing. The game state is such that the second electric combination 82a is opened by allowing the ball to pass and the ball is easy to win, and during the time, the left electric strike is passed through the first through gate 66 and the first electric combination is released to win the ball. It is possible to make it easy to play. For this reason, the game state during normal, short time, and probability change can be changed to different game states, so that the player can entertain each game state.

  In addition, when the second electric combination 82a is opened when the winning is selected for the second symbol, when the ball is hit right and passed through the second through gate 67, the second symbol is different from the second symbol. When a symbol is selected and a winning symbol is selected for a symbol different from the second symbol, the first electric accessory 640a is released, and when the ball is left-handed and passed through the first through gate 66, the second symbol is displayed. Is selected, and when the second symbol is selected, a game state in which the second electric accessory 82a is opened can be made.

  In this case, regardless of whether the probability is changing or when the time is short, when the player hits right and the ball passes through the second through gate 67, the first electric combination is released, and the gaming state is such that the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640. When the ball is left-handed and the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the second electric accessory 82a is opened, and a gaming state in which the ball can easily enter the third winning port 82 can be achieved. Therefore, the player needs to change how to strike from right-handed to left-handed or left-handed to right-handed. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the game because the player can change the way to hit at any time.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the big win lottery performed due to the winning of any of the first winning port 64, the second winning port 64, and the third winning port 82 becomes a big win, a predetermined time (variation time) is obtained. After the elapse, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, Occurrence is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which a ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64. The variable display device unit 80 may be on the left side.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to the unillustrated ball discharge path through the first outlet 71. The The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, main processing of pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on second symbol display device are performed by MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, and 630.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  7 illustrates a state in which the rotating body lifting unit 300 is disposed at the lowered position, and the central rotating unit 500, the right rotating unit 600, and the left rotating unit 700 are disposed at the extended position. In FIG. The state where the body lifting / lowering unit 300 is disposed at the raised position and the central rotation unit 500, the right rotation unit 600, and the left rotation unit 700 are disposed at the retracted position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 8, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 210 formed in a box shape, and a rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 emits light upward in the internal space of the back case 210. The decoration unit 400 and the central rotation unit 500 are arranged on the left and right, and the right rotation unit 600 and the left rotation unit 700 are arranged on the left and right, respectively.

  The back case 210 includes a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211, and a box whose one surface side (left front side in FIG. 6) is opened by each of the wall portions 211 and 212. It is formed in a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed at the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210, and the back case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The rotary body lifting / lowering unit 300 includes a plurality of (three in this embodiment) box-shaped housings 330 arranged in the width direction, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) each housed in each of the housings 330. ) Rotating bodies (first rotating body 340a and second rotating body 340b).

  The plurality of containers 330 are formed so as to be movable up and down independently in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIGS. 7 and 8). In this case, in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are disposed on the back side of the game board 13 and are not visible to the player. On the other hand, in the raised position (see FIG. 8), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are raised to the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and the player can see through the opening. Is done.

  The first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotatably supported by the housing 330, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface by the rotation are visually recognized by the player in order. Let In addition, the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b are formed as a columnar body of a cross-sectional triangle, and a different figure is each drawn on three surfaces of an outer periphery.

  In the present embodiment, the drive source of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b is shared by the single drive motor 350, and the component cost can be reduced, while the first rotator 340a and the second rotator are reduced. The combination of figures of 340b can be changed, and a total of nine types of combinations can be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 20). Details will be described later.

  The light emitting decoration unit 400 mainly includes a base body 410 and a light emitting device 420 disposed in a central portion of the base body 410, and emits light emitted from a plurality of LEDs 421 disposed inside the light emitting device 420. By changing the mode (for example, the number of LEDs 421 to be irradiated), an effect by light emission is performed. Details will be described later.

  The central rotation unit 500 includes a back surface base 510 and a pair of displacement members 530 that are pivotally supported on the back surface base 510 so that the base end side is rotatable, and is disposed on the back surface side of the light emitting decoration unit 400. The pair of displacement members 530 are retracted to the overhanging position (see FIG. 7) projecting into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) and the back side of the light emitting decoration unit 400 and cannot be seen by the player. It is rotated between the retracted position (see FIG. 8). Details will be described later.

  The right rotation unit 600 includes a base body (a rear base 610 and a front base 620) disposed on the front surface of the front base 315 of the rotary body lifting / lowering unit 300, and a displacement whose base end side is rotatably supported by the base body. Members (first displacement member 630 and second displacement member 640). On the other hand, the left rotation unit 700 includes a base body (a rear base 610 and a front base 620) disposed on the front surface of the front base 317 of the rotary body lifting / lowering unit 300, and a base end is rotatably supported by the base body. Displacement members (first displacement member 630 and second displacement member 640). Each displacement member has an overhang position (see FIG. 7) that projects into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and a retreat position (see FIG. 7) that retreats to the back side of the game board 13 and is invisible to the player. (See FIG. 8). Details will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9 to FIG. 60, detailed configurations of the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300, the light emitting decoration unit 400, the central rotation unit 500, the right rotation unit 600, and the left rotation unit 700 will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 22, a detailed configuration of the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 will be described.

  FIG. 9 is a front view of the rotating body lifting unit 300. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body lifting unit 300, and FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body lifting unit 300.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the rotary body elevating unit 300 includes a central unit 300 </ b> C for elevating and lowering the central container 330, and a left unit 300 </ b> L and a right unit 300 </ b> R for elevating the left and right containers 330, respectively. And 3 units. The left unit 300L is overlaid on the front side of the central unit 300C, and the right unit 300R is connected to the right end of the central unit 300C, whereby three containers 330 are arranged in parallel in the width direction.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 12 to FIG. 19, the detailed configuration of the central unit 300C, the left unit 300L, and the right unit 300R will be described. First, the central unit 300C will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit 300C, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit 300C.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the central unit 300 </ b> C includes an L-shaped rear base 311 in front view, a front base 312 superimposed on the front side of the rear base 311, and a front side of the front base 312. The disposed drive motor 320, the housing 330 that is raised and lowered with respect to the back base 311 and the front base 312 by the driving force of the drive motor 320, the first rotating body 340 a and the first rotating body 340 housed in the housing 330. The two-rotary body 340b and a transmission mechanism that is housed between opposed surfaces of the back base 311 and the front base 312 and that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing 330 are mainly provided.

  The transmission mechanism in the central unit 300 </ b> C includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a transmission gear 322 meshed with the drive gear 321, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the transmission gear 322, A rack gear 324 formed as a rack meshed with the pinion gear 323 and geared on the side surface of the flat plate member, the rack gear 324 is disposed on one side, and the housing 330 is disposed on the other side. And a connecting member 325 provided.

  A pair of shafts project from the front surface of the rear base 311, and a transmission gear 322 and a pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported by these shafts. In addition, slide guides 351 and 352 are arranged in parallel on the front surface of the rear base 311 so that the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 12), and the connecting member 325 (rack gear 324) is arranged by these slide guides 351 and 352. ) And the container 330 are guided in the vertical direction. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 325 and the container 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gear 322, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational motion of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324. As the rack gear 324 moves linearly, the housing 330 is displaced (moved up and down) together with the connecting member 325 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the connecting member 325 connects the vertically long portion where the rack gear 324 is disposed and the vertically long portion where the container 330 is disposed with the horizontally long portion between the lower ends thereof. Thus, it is formed in a U shape when viewed from the front. Accordingly, even when the central container 330 is disposed at the raised position with the left container 330 disposed at the lowered position, the horizontally long portion of the connecting member 325 is positioned on the back surface of the front base 312. It is possible to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

  The slide guide 351 is a linear guide comprising a guide groove formed on the front surface of the back base 311 and a slide body formed so as to be slidable along the guide groove and fixed to the back surface of the connecting member 325. Formed as a mechanism. The same applies to the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R described later. The slide guide 352 is interposed between the first rail and the second rail, the first rail fixed to the back surface base 311, the second rail fixed to the connecting member 325 or the housing 330, and both of them. It is formed as a telescopic linear guide mechanism comprising an intermediate rail for allowing relative displacement in the longitudinal direction.

  Here, since the left container 330 is arranged in parallel to the side of the central container 330 (left side in FIG. 12) (see FIG. 9), the lateral width of the connecting member 325 (the horizontal direction in FIG. 12). ) Longer dimensions. Furthermore, as described above, in order to avoid visual recognition from the player, a horizontally long portion is interposed, so that the connecting member 325 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and its rigidity is reduced. Therefore, the posture of the central container 330 is likely to be unstable (swaying in the left-right direction is likely to occur).

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) is disposed on the back side of the central container 330, so that the central container 330 is disposed at the raised position. However, the horizontal slide can be regulated by the extended slide guide 352, and the posture of the central container 330 can be stabilized. On the other hand, in a state where the central container 330 is disposed at the lowered position (see FIG. 9), the slide guide 352 can be shortened to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

  Next, the left unit 300L will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit 300L, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit 300L.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the left unit 300 </ b> L includes a rear base 313 that is formed in a vertically long front view and is disposed in front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300 </ b> C. The intermediate base 314 superimposed on the front side, the front base 315 superimposed on the front side of the intermediate base 314, the drive motor 320 disposed on the back side of the intermediate base 314, and the driving force of the drive motor 320 Is accommodated between the opposing surfaces of the bases 313 to 315, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b accommodated in the accommodating body 330. And a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing 330.

  The transmission mechanism in the left unit 300L includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, transmission gears 322a and 322b meshed with the drive gear 321 and a pinion gear 323 fixed coaxially to the transmission gear 322b. And a rack gear 324 that is meshed with the pinion gear 323 and formed as a rack that is geared on the side surface of a flat plate member, and a connecting member 326 that connects the rack gear 324 to the housing 330.

  A shaft protrudes from the front surface of the intermediate base 314, and a transmission gear 322a is rotatably supported on the shaft. Further, the intermediate base 314 is provided with a shaft support hole, and the transmission gear 322b and the pinion gear 323 are coaxially fixed to the shaft support hole so as to be rotatable.

  A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front surface of the rear base 313 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14), and the connecting member 326 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by the slide guide 351. . A guide plate 353 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300. The guide plate 353 is provided with a guide groove 353a, which is an elongated hole-like opening, extending in the vertical direction. In this guide groove 353a, a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the container 330 is interposed via a collar C. Interpolated. Therefore, the container 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 353 a of the guide plate 353. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 326 and the container 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gears 322a and 322b, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational motion of the pinion gear 323 becomes the linear motion of the rack gear 324. As a result of the linear movement of the rack gear 324, the container 330 is displaced (lifted / lowered) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 326 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  Next, the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit 300R.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the right unit 300L includes a rear base 316 that is formed in a substantially L-shape on the front and is connected to the right end of the rear base 311 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C. A front base 317 superimposed on the front side of the back base 313, a drive motor 320 disposed on the front side of the front base 317, and the back and forth base 316 and the front base 317 are raised and lowered by the driving force of the drive motor 320. Housing 330, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing 330, and the driving force of the drive motor 320 housed between the opposing surfaces of the back base 316 and the front base 317. A transmission mechanism for transmitting to the body 330.

  The transmission mechanism in the right unit 300R includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the drive gear 321 and a plate-like member meshed with the pinion gear 323. A rack gear 324 is formed as a rack whose side surfaces are chopped, and a connecting member 327 that connects the rack gear 324 to the housing 330.

  A shaft protrudes from the front surface of the back base 316, and a pinion gear 323 is rotatably supported on the shaft. A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front surface of the rear base 316 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 16), and the connecting member 327 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by the slide guide 351. . The front base 316 is provided with a guide groove 316a, which is an elongated hole-shaped opening, extending in the vertical direction, and a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the container 330 is colored in the guide groove 316a (see FIG. (Not shown). Therefore, the container 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 316 a of the back surface base 316. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 327 and the container 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, z of the pinion gear 323 is converted into a linear motion of the rack gear 324, and Accompanying the linear motion, the container 330 is displaced (lifted) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 327 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  As described above, in the central unit 300C, the width of the connecting member 325 becomes long (see FIG. 12), and the posture of the central container 330 tends to become unstable (swaying in the left-right direction is likely to occur). On the other hand, in the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, the rack gears 323 are provided at positions close to the side surfaces of the left housing 330 and the right housing 330, so that the lateral widths of the connecting members 326 and 327 (FIGS. 14 and 16). The horizontal dimension) can be shortened to increase its rigidity. Therefore, the postures of the left and right containers 330 can be stabilized (hard to shake in the left-right direction).

  Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide an extendable linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) on the back side of the left and right containers 330, and guidance by the guide grooves 353a and 316a of the guide plate 353 or the back base 316 is provided. Can sufficiently stabilize the posture. As a result, the part cost can be reduced.

  Next, the housing 330 and the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing 330 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the container 330. 18A is a side view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 18B is a front view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. It is. 18A and 18B show a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decoration body 335 are removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the container 330 is disposed on the inner surface side of the base body 331, the left and right side wall bodies 332 and 333 disposed on the left and right sides of the base body 331, and the left side wall body 332. The partition body 334 and the decorative body 335 disposed on the front surface of the base body 331 are formed, and these portions 331 to 335 are integrated by fastening and fixing to form a box shape.

  The base 331 is a member that forms the back surface (FIG. 18B, the back side of the paper), the top surface, and the bottom surface (FIG. 18B, the upper side and the lower side) of the container 330. Are integrally formed. A reflective portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed on the front surface of a portion forming the back surface of the container 330.

  The reflection part RF is formed in a rectangular shape in front view, and has a size that protrudes at least in the vertical direction from both of the rotary bodies 340a and 340b when the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are viewed from the front. (See FIG. 18B).

  The side wall bodies 332 and 333 are rectangular plate-like members that form the left and right side surfaces of the container 330, and holding holes 332a and 333a are formed at two locations, respectively. The holding holes 332a and 333a are holes through which fixed shafts 341 (described later) of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are inserted, and hold the fixed shafts 341 in a non-rotatable manner. The holding holes 332a and 333a have a shape in which the axial cross-sectional shape of the inner peripheral surface thereof is a shape obtained by removing one of the circles by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line.

  The partition body 334 is a rectangular plate-like member having substantially the same outer shape as the side wall body 332, and rotatably supports the transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 between surfaces facing the side wall body 332. The partition wall 334 is provided with two insertion holes 334a through which the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are inserted.

  The decorative body 335 is a member that decorates the front surface of the container 330, and is formed in a front-view frame shape by forming a rectangular opening 335a in the center. The player can visually recognize the mode of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of both the rotating bodies 340a and 340b through the opening 335 (see FIG. 9). ).

  The container 330 formed in this way includes a drive motor 350 disposed on the partition wall 334, a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b that are rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 350, and a drive. A transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 350 to the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b and a detection mechanism that detects the rotational position of the first rotator 340a are mainly housed.

  The transmission mechanism in the housing 330 includes a drive gear 351 that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, a transmission gear 352 that is meshed with the drive gear 351, a first gear 353, an intermediate gear 354, and a second gear 355. The gear train which consists of. The transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 are rotatably held between the opposing surfaces of the side wall body 332 and the partition wall body 334, and the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are connected to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Each is fixed to the axial end face.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the detailed structure of the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b is demonstrated. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the first rotating body 340a.

  In addition, since the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b are substantially the same structures except the point from which the figure drawn on an outer peripheral surface differs, below, the 1st rotary body 340a is a typical example. The description of the second rotating body 340b will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the first rotating body 340a includes a fixed shaft 341, a pair of end face plates 342 that are rotatably supported at both axial ends (shaft portions 341a) of the fixed shaft 341, and the pair of end face plates 342a. Three display boards (first display board 343A, second display board 343B, and third display board 343C) provided between the end face plates 342 are mainly provided.

  The fixed shaft 341 includes a body portion 341b and shaft portions 341a that are connected to both ends of the body portion 341b in the axial direction. The fixed shaft 341 is a portion that is non-rotatably held by the side walls 332 and 333 (see FIG. 17) of the housing 330, and connects the pair of shaft portions 341a located at both ends in the axial direction and the pair of shaft portions 341a. And a body portion 341b.

  Shaft portion 341a has a shape obtained by removing one of its circular cross-sectional shape from a circular shape by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line (shape obtained by chamfering a part of the outer peripheral surface of a cylinder with a plane) The shape is slightly similar to the holding holes 332a and 333a (see FIG. 17) of the side walls 332 and 333. Therefore, the shaft 341a is inserted into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side walls 332 and 333, so that the fixed shaft 341 can be held in the container 330 (side walls 332 and 333) in a non-rotatable manner.

  A plurality (four in this embodiment) of LEDs 344 are attached to the body 341b, and the light emitted from the LEDs 344 can be irradiated to the inner surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C.

  In this case, in the state where the shaft portion 341a is inserted into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333 and held unrotatable, the trunk portion 341b changes the irradiation direction of the LED 344 to the front surface of the housing 330 (decorative body 335). Are disposed in a posture (rotational position) toward the opening 335a of FIG. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 344 can be applied to the inner surface of the display plate disposed on the front surface (a “visual position” described later) of the container 330 among the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C. it can.

  The fixed shaft 341 (the shaft portion 341a and the body portion 341b) is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape having both ends opened in the axial direction. Therefore, the wiring of the LED 344 is routed using such an internal space, and the wiring is pivoted. It can be pulled out of the container 330 through the opening at the end in the direction. In addition, as described above, the fixed shaft 341 cannot be rotated with respect to the housing 330, so that even if the first rotating body 340a is rotated, an external force such as twisting or pulling acts on the wiring of the LED 344. Can be avoided.

  The end face plate 342 is a member formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a shaft support hole 342a having a circular axial cross section is formed in the center. The inner diameter dimension of the shaft support hole 342a is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the shaft portion 341a of the fixed shaft 341. Therefore, the end face plate 342 is rotatably supported with respect to the fixed shaft 341 by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the shaft support hole 342a. Thereby, the end surface plate 342 is rotatably held inside the housing 330 via the fixed shaft 341.

  Here, the fixed shaft 341 has a body 341b having a larger diameter than the shaft 341a. Therefore, the end plate 342 is disposed between the side walls 332 and 333 of the housing 330 and the body 341b of the fixed shaft 341. The axial position can be defined, and the fixed shaft 341 can be held between the pair of side wall bodies 332 and 333 via the end face plate 342.

  A first gear 353 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342, and a base gear 361 to be described later in the detection mechanism is fixed to the other. Note that the second gear 355 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342 to the second rotating body 340b, but mounting of the base gear 361 to the other is omitted (FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

  Each of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is a plate-like member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and by connecting the outer edges at both ends in the longitudinal direction to the outer edges (three sides) of the end face plate 342, respectively. It spans between the end face plates 342 and forms a triangular prism with the end face plates 342.

  Each of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C has a figure drawn on the outer surface thereof. Therefore, when the triangular prismatic body is rotated, the figures respectively drawn on the outer surfaces of the display boards 343A to 343C are made visible to the player in order through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335.

  At least a part of the outer surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is formed to be curved in an arc shape protruding outward in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. As a result, as described later, each display board 343A can be used even when there is a shift of a predetermined rotational angle (for example, 12 degrees) of the rotational position between the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. It is possible to make it difficult for the player who visually recognizes the graphic drawn on the outer surface of ˜343C to recognize the deviation of the predetermined rotation angle.

  In the present embodiment, when the fixed shaft 341 is viewed in the axial direction, the end portions in the width direction of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are curved in an arc shape protruding outward, A central portion in the width direction is formed in a substantially flat surface shape. Thereby, it is possible to achieve both of ensuring the visibility of the figure and making it difficult to recognize the deviation between the rotating bodies 340a and 340b. Further, the radius of the arc of the arc-shaped portion formed by bending is larger than the maximum distance from the axis of the fixed shaft 341 to the outer surface of each of the display plates 343A to 343C (for example, 2 times or more and 4 times). Is set to:

  Here, in the following, as the arrangement positions of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C when the triangular prism-shaped body is rotated, the front surface of the container 330 (the surface on the front side in FIG. 18B). The position at which the figure drawn on the outer surface is visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a “viewing position”, and the outer surface is directed to the inner surface of the container 330 (base 331). A position at which a graphic drawn on the outer surface becomes invisible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a “shielding position”.

  Therefore, for example, when the first display panel 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second display board 343B and the third display board 343C are arranged at the shielding position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B). . When the triangular prism is rotated in the forward or reverse direction by 120 degrees from this state, one of the second display board 343B and the third display board 343C is disposed at the viewing position, and the second display board 343B or the third display is displayed. The other of the plates 343C and the first display plate 343A are disposed at the shielding position.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the first display plate 343A is formed so as not to transmit light as a whole, while the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C are transmissive portions PN capable of transmitting light. Is formed in part. In addition, a reflective portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed on the inner surface of the first display panel 343A.

  As described above, the LED 344 is disposed at a position where the inner surface of the display panel disposed at the visual recognition position among the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C can be irradiated. Therefore, in the state where the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C is arranged at the viewing position, the light emitted from the LED 344 is directly visible to the player through the transmission part PN of each of the display boards 343B and 343C. Can be made.

  On the other hand, in the state where the first display plate 343A is disposed at the viewing position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B), the light emitted from the LED 344 is reflected on the reflection portion RF on the inner surface of the first display plate 343A. And reflected by the reflecting portion RF of the base body 331 of the container 330, and reflected light from the reflecting portion RF of the base body 331 is reflected by the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C. Can be visually recognized by the player.

  For example, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at the rotation position where the first display panel 343A is arranged at the viewing position, and the LED 344 emits light, so that the reflected light reflected by the reflecting portion RF in the base body 331 of the container 330 is visually recognized. The figure of the 2nd display board 343B or the 3rd display board 343C arrange | positioned at the position (shielding position) which cannot be visually recognized from the player can be made to associate. Thereby, a player can be expected or suggested that the 1st rotary body 340a rotates to the position where the figure of the 2nd display board 343B or the 3rd display board 343C becomes visible.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are formed in a triangular shape in cross section. Therefore, when each of the rotators 340a and 340b is rotated, the reflecting plate is accompanied with the rotation. The distance between the RF and the outer surface of each rotating body 340a, 340b (display panels 343A to 343C), the distance between the outer surfaces of each rotating body 340a, 340b (FIG. 18 (b) vertical distance), or The apparent diameter (the vertical dimension in FIG. 18 (b)) of each rotator 340a, 340b can be increased or decreased, and the outer surface (each display plate 343A to 343C) of each rotator 340a, 340b is opposed to the reflector RF. The angle can be changed. That is, with the rotation of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b, the light emitted from the LED 344 and irradiated from the transmission part PN is reflected on the player who visually recognizes the reflected light from the reflection part RF of the base body 331. The mode (for example, the size of the region where light is visually recognized) can be periodically changed.

  Returning to FIG. 17 and FIG. The detection mechanism includes a base gear 361 fixed to the end face plate 342 of the first rotating body 340a, an intermediate gear 362 meshed with the base gear 361, and a gear meshed with the intermediate gear 362 and having a diameter. A terminal gear 363 including a detection plate 363a that projects outward in the direction is provided, and a sensor device 364 that detects the detection plate 363a of the terminal gear 363.

  The intermediate gear 362 and the end gear 363 are rotatably held by the side wall body 333, and the sensor device 364 is disposed on the base body 331 in a state where a detection region is disposed on the movement locus of the detection plate 363a. Therefore, the sensor device 364 can detect the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a based on the detection state of the detection plate 363a. That is, based on the detection result of the sensor device 364, the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be controlled (for example, stopped at an arbitrary position).

  Next, the rotation operation of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b will be described. When the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b through the transmission mechanism, and both the rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated.

  Specifically, when the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first gear 353 via the drive gear 351 and the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353 is rotated. Thereby, the first rotating body 340a is rotated. When the first gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 355 via the intermediate gear 354, and the second gear 355 is rotated. Thereby, the 2nd rotary body 340b rotates in the same direction as the 1st rotary body 340a. Further, when the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in the opposite direction to the case described above.

  As a result, the combination of the graphic of the first rotator 340a and the graphic of the second rotator 340b visually recognized by the player is sequentially changed. In this case, the number of combinations of the figures of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b is limited to three in the conventional product.

  That is, since the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotationally driven in synchronization by one drive motor, the possible combinations are, for example, the first display board 343A of the first rotator 340a and the first display plate 343A. A first combination in which the first display plate 343A of the two-rotary body 340b is arranged at the display position, and the second display plate 343B of the first rotary body 340a and the second display plate 343B of the second rotary body 340b are at the display position. There were only the second combination to be arranged, that is, the third combination in which the third display board 343C of the first rotating body 340a and the third display board 343C of the second rotating body 340b were arranged at the display position.

  On the other hand, by adopting a structure in which the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are independently rotated by different drive motors, up to nine combinations can be formed, and the combinations Can appear arbitrarily. However, in this case, the cost of parts is increased by the amount of two drive motors required.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed while suppressing the number of drive motors 350 to one, and the combinations are Can appear arbitrarily. Further, in the present embodiment, nine sets of combinations can be quickly displayed by not requiring a perfect match between the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and allowing a predetermined amount of deviation of the rotating positions. Can be issued. A combination of the figures of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 20 is a table showing combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 21 and 22 are schematic side views of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b showing a transition state when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated. FIG. 21 (e) to FIG. 1 to 5, FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (e) are shown in FIG. It corresponds to the states shown as 6 to 10, respectively.

  In FIG. 20, as a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, the state in which the first display board 343A is arranged at the viewing position is indicated by the sign “A” or “A ′”. The state in which the second display board 343B is disposed on the display position is indicated by a symbol “B” or “B ′”, and the state in which the third display board 343C is disposed at the viewing position is indicated by a reference symbol “C” or “C ′”. Is done.

  For example, in FIG. 10 "A, C '" indicates that the first display plate 343A of the first rotator 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotator 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions, respectively. The figure drawn on the first display board 343A from 340a and the figure drawn on the third display board 343C from the second rotating body 340b correspond to the state visually recognized by the player.

  In FIG. 21, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the first display plate 343 </ b> A to the third display plate 343 </ b> C of the first rotating body 340 a are denoted by reference numerals “A to C”, and the second display plate 343 </ b> A is used. The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the rotator 340b are respectively illustrated using reference numerals “A ′ to C ′”.

  Here, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are set to different values for the number of teeth of the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 that are fixed to each other. In this embodiment, when the number of teeth of the first gear 353 is 14 and the number of teeth of the second gear 355 is 20, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees, the second rotating body 340b rotates 108 degrees. To be formed.

  No. in FIG. As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 21A, the first display board 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display board 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the viewing positions (No. in FIG. 20). 1 “A ′, A”, the first combination), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is arranged at the visual recognition position, No. 1 in FIG. 2 and FIG. 21B, the second rotating body 340b places the second display panel 343B at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the second combination (No. 2 “B ′, B” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

  In this case, since the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is 108 degrees with respect to the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a, a difference (shift) of 12 degrees occurs between the rotational positions of the two rotating bodies 340a. , 340b from the direction perpendicular to the axis is difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the rotation angle of 12 degrees, and as a result, the second display boards of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. It can be recognized that the graphics drawn on the outer surface of 343B are arranged at the visual recognition positions (the second combination is formed).

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as described above, the outer surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are formed to be curved in an arc shape that protrudes outward in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. (I.e., the surface on which the graphic is drawn is curved along the rotational direction of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b), so that a player who views the graphic drawn on the outer surface of each of the display boards 343A to 343C in front view It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the difference (shift) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  No. in FIG. 2 and the state shown in FIG. 21B, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display panel 343C is arranged at the visual recognition position, No. 2 in FIG. 3 and FIG. 21 (c), the second rotating body 340b is disposed at a position shifted from the first rotating body 340a. That is, in this state, a difference in rotational angle of 24 degrees is formed between the two, so that the player recognizes a graphic shift (combination failure, No. 3 “−, C” in FIG. 20). be able to.

  Similarly, in FIG. 4 and the state shown in FIG. 9 and the rotation of the section up to the state shown in FIG. 22 (d), the first rotating body 340a arranges the display plates 343A to 343C at the visual recognition position for each rotation of 120 degrees, while the second rotating body The rotation position 340b is arranged at a position shifted from the first rotation body 340a. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to recognize a graphic shift (no combination is established, No. 4 “−, A” to No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20).

  No. in FIG. 9 and FIG. 22 (d) (No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20), the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the first display plate 343A is placed at the viewing position. No. 20 No. As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 22 (e), the second rotating body 340b places the third display panel 343C at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the third combination (No. 10 “C ′, A” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

  Note that, according to the present embodiment, the second rotation is also performed in the section in which the figure shift (combination failure, No. 3 “−, C” to No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20) is formed. Since the rotation of the body 340b can be continued and the figure visually recognized by the player can be continuously switched, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which figure is combined in the third combination.

  Thereafter, substantially the same as the above-described mode (the rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 and FIG. 21A of FIG. 20 to the state shown in No. 9 and FIG. 22E of FIG. 20). By repeating the mode twice more, one cycle is completed (the table is cycled from the start point to the end point).

  In this case, no. 11-No. 20 may be replaced with a state in which the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 is different by 120 degrees, and the fourth combination (No. 11 “A ′, B "), the fifth combination (No. 12" B ', C "in Fig. 20) and the sixth combination (No. 20" C', B "in Fig. 20).

  In addition, in FIG. 21-No. 30 may be replaced with a state in which the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 is changed by 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No. 21 “A ′, FIG. C ”), the eighth combination (No. 22“ B ′, A ”in FIG. 20) and the ninth combination (No. 30“ C ′, C ”in FIG. 20).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b includes a plurality of gears (drive gear 351 to second gear 355). The rotation of the drive motor 350 can be transmitted to the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b at different rotation ratios.

  Thereby, the rotation period of the 1st rotary body 340a and the rotation period of the 2nd rotary body 340b can be varied. As a result, even if only one drive motor 350 is used, nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed, and the combinations can be arbitrarily changed (desired Any combination can appear).

  In addition, since the transmission mechanism is formed as a gear train, not only can the structure be simplified, the cost of parts can be reduced and the durability and reliability can be improved, but the gears are always meshed. Therefore, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 20 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 between forward and reverse.

  Therefore, for example, the table in FIG. 20 proceeds in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20), and sections (for example, No. 3 to No. 9 in FIG. 20) in which a graphic shift (combination of combinations) is formed. Then, after the third combination (No. 10 “C ′, A” in FIG. 20) appears or just before it appears, the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed and the table of FIG. 20 is reversed. A series of operations of returning to the direction (upward direction in FIG. 20) can be repeated, thereby producing an effect of causing the player to expect the appearance of the third combination.

  Alternatively, for example, the ninth combination (No. 30 “C ′, C” in FIG. 20) appears from the state in which the first combination (No. 1 “A ′, A” in FIG. 20) is formed. 20 is advanced in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20) and the ninth combination appears in addition to the table in FIG. 20 in the reverse direction (upward in FIG. 20). To the 9th combination. That is, in the former case, the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a needs to be repeated 30 times, whereas in the latter case, the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a is performed once. Therefore, a desired combination of figures can be quickly displayed.

  Here, when the second rotating body 340b is rotated by 60 degrees with respect to the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a (that is, the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is the rotation of the first rotating body 340a). On the other hand, in the case of setting to “1 / integer” times), a plurality of combinations of figures are formed without causing a difference (shift) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Can do. However, in this case, the maximum number of figures that can be combined is three.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first, fourth and seventh combinations (No. 1 “A ′, A”, No. 11 “A ′, B” and No. 11 in FIG. 21 “A ′, C”), and the remaining six combinations (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth combinations), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body A difference (shift) in the predetermined rotation angle is allowed to occur at the rotation position of 340b. As a result, the number of figures that can be combined can be set to nine.

  That is, in the structure in which the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated by one drive motor 350, the number of figures that can be combined is nine. This means that the drive motor 350 is rotated by the first rotator 340a. And the transmission mechanism for transmitting to each of the second rotator 340b cannot be achieved simply by forming it as a gear train, and as in the present embodiment, it is at the rotational position of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b. This is possible for the first time by allowing the difference (shift) in the predetermined rotation angle to occur. Thereby, while aiming at the improvement of the presentation effect by the increase in the number of figures which can be combined, the required number of the drive motor 350 can be suppressed and the product cost can be reduced.

  In this case, combinations of figures (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth) that cause a difference (shift) in a predetermined rotation angle at the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. In the combination), the stop position at which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are stopped may be corrected.

  For example, in the second, fifth and eighth combinations (No. 2 “B ′, B”, No. 12 “B ′, C” and No. 22 “B ′, A” in FIG. 20), FIG. As shown in (b), since the phase of the second rotator 340b is delayed, the first rotator 340a is stopped at the rotational position where the phase is advanced by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotator 340b, the first rotator 340a is not stopped at the rotation position rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. For example, the rotation is stopped at a rotation position rotated by 126 degrees. Thereby, the position shift from the reference plane can be distributed to the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b so as to be inconspicuous.

  Similarly, for example, in the third, sixth and ninth combinations (No. 10 “C ′, A”, No. 20 “C ′, B” and No. 30 “C ′, C” in FIG. 20), As shown in FIG. 22E, since the phase of the second rotating body 340b is preceded, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at the rotational position where the phase is delayed by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotator 340b, the first rotator 340a is not stopped at the rotation position rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. For example, it is stopped at the rotation position rotated 114 degrees. Thereby, the position shift from the reference plane can be distributed to the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b so as to be inconspicuous.

  As described above, the rotary body lifting / lowering unit 300 is formed such that each of the storage bodies 300 can be moved up and down, and in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are moved to the game board 13. It can be made invisible to the player by being positioned on the back of the player. Therefore, a desired combination of the combination of the graphic of the first rotator 340a and the graphic of the second rotator 340b can be quickly displayed at a necessary timing.

  That is, in this embodiment, since nine combinations of figures can be formed, the table becomes long (the number of stages of the table in FIG. 20 increases). It is necessary to rotate the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b comparatively much, and time increases accordingly.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, by disposing each container 300 in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are retracted to positions that cannot be seen from the player. Can do. Accordingly, the rotation position of the first rotation body 340a and the second rotation body 340b can be rotated in advance to a predetermined rotation position without being recognized by the player, as a result. When the timing arrives, each container 300 is placed in the raised position (see FIG. 8), and the remaining rotations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are executed, so that the desired combination can be quickly achieved. Can appear.

  In addition, you may make it arrange | position to the descending position of each container 300 only when rotating the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b with a specific fluctuation pattern. For example, in a variation pattern in which the time from the start of rotation of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively short, each container 300 is not disposed at the lowered position, While the rotation of the rotators 340a and 340b is started and stopped at a position visible to the player, the time from the start of rotation of each of the rotators 340a and 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively long. In the variation pattern, the rotary bodies 340a and 340b may be rotated in advance at positions that are not visible to the player.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the advance rotation at the lowered position of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is performed when a predetermined operation means is operated. Thereby, it can suppress that the player recognizes the advance rotation of the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b.

  That is, when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated, a relatively loud sound is generated. Therefore, even if the rotator is moved to the lowered position and cannot be seen by the player, There is a possibility that the player may recognize that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in advance by the generated sound.

  On the other hand, when the rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is performed during the operation of the predetermined operating means, the operation can be mixed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  In addition, as an operation | movement means, the payout apparatus 133, the audio | voice output apparatus 226, or the ball | bowl launching unit 112a (all refer FIG. 3 or FIG. 4) is illustrated, for example. In a state in which these operating means are operated, for example, a relatively loud sound is generated with the ball payout, the sound output, or the ball launch. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  Instead of or in addition to this, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is a predetermined effect, the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b. You may make it perform prior rotation. When the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a predetermined effect, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the predetermined effect, and accordingly, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotation It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the advance rotation of the body 340b.

  Next, the light emitting decoration unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23 is a front view of the light emitting decoration unit 400. FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 400, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the light emitting decoration unit 400 includes a base body 410 that is horizontally long when viewed from the bottom wall 211 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 210, and the width of the base body 410. A light emitting device 420 disposed on the front surface in the direction, a light shielding member 430 covering the front surface of the light emitting device 420, and a cover member 440 covering the front surface of the light shielding member 430 and made of a light transmissive material. The light emitting device 420, the light shielding member 430, and the cover member 440 are mainly provided with outer peripheral decorative bodies 450 and 460 having an annular shape when viewed from the front.

  On the front side of the light emitting device 420, a plurality of (in this embodiment, 15) light emitters (LEDs 421) are arranged in a dispersed state over the entire surface, and are formed so that light can be emitted to the back surface of the light shielding member 430. . Here, the light shielding member 430 includes a main body portion 431 formed of a light shielding material (light non-transmissive material), and a partition wall 432 erected from the front surface and the back surface of the main body portion 431.

  In the main body 431 of the light shielding member 430, openings 431a having a circular shape in front view are formed at a plurality of locations (15 locations in the present embodiment). The plurality of openings 431a are disposed at positions corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 421 of the light emitting device 420 in a front view. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 421 can reach the back surface of the cover 440 through the opening 431a of the light shielding member 430.

  The partition wall 432 is formed in an annular shape in a front view having a smaller diameter than the main body portion 431, and is disposed at a position eccentric from the center of the main body portion 431. As a result, the space between the light emitting device 420 and the cover body 440 is a first space that is circular in front view surrounded by the partition wall 432, and a substantially crescent-shaped first space that is located on the outer peripheral side of the partition wall 431. It is divided into two spaces.

  In this way, by forming the partition by the partition wall 431, it is possible to clarify the outline of the light visually recognized from the cover member 440. That is, it is possible to visually recognize a circular shape when only the LED 421 in the first space emits light and a crescent shape when only the LED 421 in the second space emits light.

  Next, the central rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 26A is a front view of the central rotary unit 500 in a state where it is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 26B is a front view of the central rotary unit 500 in a state where it is arranged at the extended position. . 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the central rotary unit 500, and FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central rotary unit 500.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 to 28, the central rotating unit 500 includes a back surface base 510 disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the back surface case 210 and a front surface superimposed on the front surface of the back surface base 510. A base 520, a pair of displacement members 530 whose base ends are rotatably supported by the rear base 510 and the front base 520, a drive motor 540 that generates a drive force for rotationally driving the displacement member 530, and And a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 540 to the displacement member 530.

  Shaft support holes 511 and 521 for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotating shaft 531) of the displacement member 530 are respectively provided in the front surface of the back surface base 510 and the back surface of the front surface base 520. Further, a support shaft 512 for rotatably supporting the crank gear 542 in the transmission mechanism is provided on the front surface of the rear base 510.

  The displacement member 530 is a member that is decorated on the front surface on the front end side, and mainly includes a rotating shaft 531, a connecting gear 532, and a crank groove 533. As described above, the rotation shaft 531 is a shaft that is supported by the shaft support holes 511 and 521 of the rear base 510 and the front base 520, and protrudes from the front and rear surfaces on the proximal end side of the displacement member 530.

  The connection gear 532 is a gear that is engraved on the outer peripheral surface on the proximal end side of the displacement member 530 with the rotation shaft 531 as the rotation center. When one displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531, the connection gear 532 transmits the rotation to the other connection gear 532 to rotate. As a result, the other displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531.

  The crank groove 533 is a linear groove in front view through which a connecting pin 542a of a crank gear 542, which will be described later of the transmission mechanism, is slidably inserted, and is one of a pair of displacement members 530 (FIG. 27 left side, FIG. 28). The right side of the displacement member 530 is recessed. As will be described later, the rotation of the crank gear 542 is transmitted to the crank groove 533 via the connecting pin 542a, so that one displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531.

  As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 540 to the displacement member 530, and is engaged with the pinion 541 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 540 and the pinion 541. And a crank gear 542. The crank gear 542 includes a connecting pin 542 a that protrudes from a center of rotation (support shaft 512) and is inserted into the crank groove 533 of the displacement member 530.

  According to the central rotation unit 500 configured as described above, the rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 540 is transmitted to the crank gear 542 via the pinion 541, and when the crank gear 542 is rotated, the crank gear 542 With the rotation, the connecting pin 542a is displaced while drawing an arcuate locus, and the displacement of the connecting pin 542a acts on the inner wall surface of the crank groove 533, whereby one side (the left side in FIG. 27, the right side in FIG. 28) is displaced. The member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531 as a rotation center. In this case, the other displacement member 530 is also rotated in synchronization with the connecting gear 532. As a result, the pair of displacement members 530 are retracted to the projecting position (see FIGS. 7 and 26A) projecting into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) and the back of the light emitting decoration unit 400. It can be rotated between the retracted position (see FIGS. 8 and 26B).

  Next, the right rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 40. FIG. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 600, and FIGS. 30 and 31 are exploded rear perspective views of the right rotation unit 600. FIG. 31 illustrates a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 600 is assembled.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the right rotation unit 600 includes a base body composed of a back base 610 and a front base 620 and a first displacement displaceably disposed on the front side of the front base 620 of the base body. The member 630 and the second displacement member 640, a driving motor 650 that generates a driving force for displacing the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 and is disposed on the back surface of the back surface base 610, and the driving thereof And a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 650.

  A part of the transmission mechanism (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652, and the second pinion 653) is housed between the opposing surfaces of the back base 610 and the front base 620. A bearing recess 621 for rotatably supporting the first pinion 651 is provided on the rear surface of the front base 620, and a sliding groove of the rack member 652 is provided to define the moving direction of the rack member 652. A pair of insertion pins 622 that are inserted through 652a project.

  Further, the front base 620 has circular shaft support holes 624 and 625 that are formed to penetrate the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 and the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 so as to be rotatable. The front bases 620 are arranged in parallel in the width direction (short direction) with a predetermined interval.

  It should be noted that the shaft support hole 624 that supports the first displacement member 630 is located closer to the opening side of the game board 13 than the shaft support hole 625 that supports the transmission member 654 (the projecting position side of the first displacement member 630, FIG. 29). As described later, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can secure a projecting area projecting to the opening side of the game board 13 in the projecting position. In addition, the transmission member 654 can be easily hidden on the back surface of the first displacement member 630 between the overhang positions.

  On the front surface of the front base 620, a protrusion 626 and a bearing portion 627 are projected. The ridges 626 are horizontally long protrusions extending along the width direction of the front base 620 and have a substantially triangular cross section. The ridges 626 are formed such that the tops thereof are curved in an arc shape centered on the shaft support hole 624 when viewed from the front. When the second displacement member 640 (connecting displacement member 642) is displaced, the top of the ridge 626 can be brought into contact with the front surface of the front base 620 as compared with a case where the front surface of the front base 620 comes into contact with the entire surface, as will be described later. Thus, the contact area can be reduced and the sliding resistance can be suppressed, and the formation of fogging due to rubbing on the connecting displacement member 642 made of a light transmitting material can be suppressed.

  On the left side of the front base 620 when viewed from the front (left side in FIG. 29, ie, the opening side of the game board 13), an inclined surface 620a formed by chamfering the side surface and the ridge portion of the front surface is disposed. . Therefore, as described later, it is possible to prevent the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) from being locked by the side surface of the front base 620 and being unable to be displaced when retracted to the retracted position (see FIG. 33).

  The bearing portion 627 is formed as a cylindrical body concentric with the shaft support hole 624, and rotatably supports the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 together with the shaft support hole 624 on the inner peripheral surface thereof. From the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627, a protruding portion 628 is formed so as to protrude outward in the radial direction and below the front base 620. The protrusion 628 can restrict the rotation of the first displacement member 630 within a predetermined range and suppress the forward tilt of the first displacement member 630. Details thereof will be described later (see FIG. 40).

  In the present embodiment, since the bearing recess 621 is formed in the back surface of the front base 620, the first pinion 651 is placed between the opposing surfaces of the back base 610 and the front base 620 by using the bearing recess 621. It can be held rotatably. Therefore, since it is not necessary to fasten and fix the first pinion 651 to the drive shaft of the drive motor 650, the number of parts can be reduced, and the parts cost and assembly cost can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the bearing recess 621 is formed in the rear surface of the front base 620, the protruding portion 623 protrudes from the front surface of the front base 620 along with the recess. In the present embodiment, since a part of the second displacement member 640 is pivotally supported on the distal end side of the first displacement member 630, when the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced, the front-rear direction Therefore, the second displacement member 640 may interfere with the projecting portion 623, but the interference is formed by the protrusions 626. Details thereof will be described later (see FIG. 39).

  The transmission mechanism includes a first pinion 651 mounted on the drive shaft of the drive motor 650, a second pinion 653 fastened and fixed to the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654, and the first pinion 651 and the second pinion 653 are teeth. And a rack member 652 formed as a rack in which the rack gear to be combined is cut into the side surface of the flat plate-like member.

  The rack member 652 includes two sliding grooves 652a each having a long hole shape in front view extending along the longitudinal direction, and a pair of insertion pins 622 of the front base 620 are respectively inserted into the sliding grooves 652a. Thus, the moving direction is held in a prescribed state. That is, the rack member 652 is held between the opposed surfaces of the back base 610 and the front base 620 so as to be linearly movable.

  The transmission member 654 includes a rotating shaft 654a that protrudes from the back surface on one end side, a drive pin 654b that protrudes from the front surface on the other end side opposite to the rotating shaft 654a, the rotating shaft 654a and the driving pin. A recess 654c formed by recessing in a circular arc shape when viewed from the front, and the rotation shaft 654a is inserted into the shaft support hole 625 so that the shaft can be rotated to the front side of the front base 620. Be supported.

  The drive pin 654b is an axial body having a circular cross section, and is inserted into a first groove 635 and a second groove 641b, which will be described later, of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640. The arc shape of the recessed portion 654c in the front view is formed into a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 (that is, a shape that can receive the bearing portion 627 on the inner peripheral side).

  Accordingly, the transmission member 654 is prevented from interfering with the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 while the position where the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 is disposed is close to the position where the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 is disposed. The rotatable range of 654 can be increased. Therefore, as will be described later, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be displaced more greatly while downsizing the entire right rotation unit 600 (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

  According to the transmission mechanism, when the first pinion 651 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650, the rotation of the first pinion 651 is transmitted to the second pinion 653 via the linear motion of the rack member 652. By rotating the second pinion 653, the transmission member 654 is rotated about the shaft support hole 625 of the front base 620 as the rotation center. As will be described later, by rotating the transmission member 654 and causing the drive pin 654b to act on the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b, the displacement corresponding to the shape of the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b is changed to the first. Each of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be performed independently (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

  On the back surface of the first displacement member 630, a rotation shaft 631, support shafts 632 and 633, and a contact portion 634 are respectively projected and a first groove 635 is recessed. As described above, the rotation shaft 631 is a shaft-like body that is inserted into the shaft support hole 624 of the front base 620, and the first displacement member 630 is connected to the front base 620 via the rotation shaft 631 and the shaft support hole 624. It is pivotally supported by the shaft. Note that a holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 624 is fastened and fixed to the end surface in the axial direction of the rotation shaft 631, thereby restricting the rotation shaft 631 from coming out of the shaft support hole 624.

  The support shafts 632 and 633 are shaft-shaped bodies having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640, respectively. That is, the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 are rotatably held on the back surface of the first displacement member 630 via the support shafts 632 and 633, respectively.

  A pair of abutting portions 634 are disposed with a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction around the rotation shaft 631. A protrusion 628 of the front base 620 is disposed between the pair of contact portions 634 in a state where the first displacement member 630 is assembled to the front base 620. Therefore, as will be described later, when the first displacement member 630 is rotated about the rotation shaft 631 with respect to the front base 620, the contact portion 634 contacts the side surface of the protrusion 628 of the front base 620. Thus, the rotation of the first displacement member 630 relative to the front base 620 can be restricted within a predetermined range.

  The first groove 635 is a concave groove through which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is slidably inserted, and is formed to be bent in a generally U shape when viewed from the front. Specifically, the first groove 635 has a working section 635a that extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 630, and a first displacement while being curved in an arc shape having a concave on the rotating shaft 631 side. A non-interference section 635b extending along the width direction of the member 630 (that is, formed in a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape concentric with the rotation shaft 631). As will be described later, the action section 635a is a section that receives an action from the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, and the non-interference section 635b is a section in which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 does not interfere.

  The second displacement member 640 is formed by being divided into two members, a driven member 641 and a connecting displacement member 642. A shaft support hole 641a is formed through the driven member 641 at the center in the longitudinal direction, and a second groove 641b and a connection groove 641c are formed at one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction, respectively. The connecting displacement member 642 is made of a light transmissive resin material.

  As described above, the shaft support hole 641 a is a hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 630 is rotatably inserted, and the driven member 641 is displaced by the first displacement via the support shaft 632. The member 630 is rotatably supported on the back surface. Note that a screw having a head having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 641a is fastened to the end surface in the axial direction of the support shaft 632, thereby restricting the support shaft 632 from coming out of the shaft support hole 641a. .

  The second groove 641 b is a groove-like opening through which the drive pin 654 b of the transmission member 654 is slidably inserted, and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 641. In a state where the driven member 641 is pivotally supported on the back surface of the first displacement member 630, the second groove 641 b is overlapped with the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Therefore, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 can be inserted into the first groove 635 through the second groove 641b. In addition, the 2nd groove | channel 641b is formed as an action area which receives an effect | action from the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 so that it may mention later.

  The connection groove 641c is a groove-like opening that extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 641, and a connection pin 643 of a connection displacement member 642, which will be described later, is slidably inserted therethrough. That is, the second displacement member 640 is formed so that the rotation of the driven member 641 can be transmitted to the connection displacement member 642 via the connection groove 641 c and the connection pin 643.

  A shaft support hole 642a is formed through the connection displacement member 642, and a decorative portion 642b and an overhang portion 642c are formed outwardly across the shaft support hole 642a. The connection displacement member 642 is provided with a connection pin 643 that protrudes toward the front side.

  As described above, the shaft support hole 642a is a hole having a circular section through which the support shaft 633 of the first displacement member 630 is rotatably inserted, and the connection displacement member 642 is displaced through the support shaft 633 by the first displacement. The member 630 is rotatably supported on the back surface. Note that a holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 642a is fastened and fixed to the end surface in the axial direction of the support shaft 633, thereby restricting the rotation shaft 633 from coming out of the shaft support hole 642a.

  As described above, the connecting pin 643 is inserted into the connecting groove 641 c of the driven member 641, whereby the rotation of the driven member 641 can be transmitted to the connecting displacement member 642. In other words, by rotating the driven member 641 around the support shaft 632 as a rotation center, rotation about the support shaft 633 of the connection displacement member 642 can be formed.

  As described above, the second displacement member 640 is divided into the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642, and the drive member 641 and the connection displacement member 642 are connected to each other by the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643. Since the link mechanism is configured by being rotatably supported by the displacement member 640, the first displacement of the connection displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b) is utilized by using the amplification effect of the link mechanism, as will be described later. The amount of relative displacement with respect to the member 630 can be increased (see FIG. 37). As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Here, a detailed configuration of the connecting displacement member 642 will be described with reference to FIG. 32A is a front view of the connection displacement member 642, and FIG. 32B is a side view of the connection displacement member 642 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXIIb in FIG. 32A, and FIG. These are sectional drawings of the connection displacement member 642 in the XXXIIa-XXXIIa line | wire of Fig.32 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 32, the connecting displacement member 642 is formed with an overhanging portion 642c protruding on the opposite side of the decoration portion 642b across the shaft support hole 642a. The overhanging portion 642c can play a role as a weight for balancing after lifting up or after lifting.

  In this case, the overhanging portion 642c is formed so as to protrude from the front side (lower side in FIG. 32 (b)) of the decorative portion 642b, and is formed so as to be able to contact the back surface of the first displacement member 630. Thus, when the 2nd displacement member 640 displaces (rotates), the shakiness with respect to the 1st displacement member 630 of the connection displacement member 642 can be suppressed. Further, since the overhanging portion 642c serves both as a weight and as a contact portion with the first displacement member 630, the structure can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, the overhanging portion 642c has four side walls erected on the back side from the four sides of the bottom wall that forms the front side of the connecting displacement member 642 (the side facing the back surface of the first displacement member 630). It is formed in a box shape with the back side opened. Therefore, weight and rigidity can be secured while reducing the outer shape. Therefore, as will be described later, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (rotated), a state in which the protruding portion 642c is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, a state in which the second displacement member 640 is not visible from the front) is secured. However, the function as the weight and the function of suppressing the rattling by contacting the first displacement member 630 can be surely exhibited.

  The protruding portion 642c is formed with a protruding line 642c1 protruding from the bottom wall thereof and extending along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 642a, and the top of the protruding line 642c1 is the first displacement member. It is formed so as to be able to contact the back surface of 630. Therefore, sliding resistance can be suppressed as compared with the case where the entire bottom wall of the overhang portion 642c hits the back surface of the first displacement member 630.

  The connection pin 643 is made of a metal material (brass material in the present embodiment), has a higher hardness than the resin material, and its rear end surface (the upper surface in FIG. 32 (c)) is the back surface of the connection displacement member 642 (ie, In the form exposed from the surface facing the front base 620, the connection displacement member 642 is embedded (insert molding).

  In this case, since the top of the protrusion 626 of the front base 620 extends along the displacement locus of the connecting pin 643 when the connecting displacement member 642 is displaced, the top of the protrusion 626 of the front base 620 In this case, the rear end face of the connecting pin 643 can be mainly brought into contact. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fogging from being formed on the connecting displacement member 642 made of a light-transmitting resin material due to rubbing between the front base 620 and the projection 626. Therefore, it is possible to continuously exhibit the effect of transmitting light through the connecting displacement member 642.

  Next, the operation of the right rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34 are front views of the right rotation unit 600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 35 and 36 operate between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear view of the right rotation unit 600 in each state when doing. 37 and 38 are schematic back views of the right rotation unit 600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

  FIG. 33 (a) is a diagram of FIGS. 35 (a) and 37 (a), FIG. 33 (b) is a diagram of FIGS. 35 (b) and 37 (b), and FIG. 33 (c) is a diagram of FIG. 35 (c) and FIG. 37 (c) are in the same state. FIG. 34 (a) is the same as FIG. 36 (a), FIG. 38 (a), and FIG. ), FIG. 38 (b), and FIG. 34 (c) are the same as FIG. 36 (c) and FIG. 38 (c), respectively. In this case, FIG. 33 (c) is the same as FIG. 34 (a), FIG. 35 (c) is the same as FIG. 36 (a), and FIG. 37 (c) is the same as FIG. is there.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 (a), 35 (a) and 37 (a), in the retracted position, the first displacement member 630 is in an upright state, and the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are in front. It is disposed in front of the base 620.

  From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 37 (a)), the first groove 635 (operation section 635a) of the first displacement member 630 and the second of the second displacement member 640 are driven. The inner wall surface of the groove 641b is pushed in the protruding direction (right side in FIG. 37 (a)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, so that FIG. 33 (b), FIG. 35 (b) and FIG. As shown, the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the overhang direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, since the second groove 641b has the same outer shape as the action section 635b of the first groove 635, the second displacement member 640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630, and the first displacement It is displaced together with the member 630.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 37 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b), the same as described above. In addition, the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 635 (operation section 635a) of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 are extended in the protruding direction (FIG. 37B) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654. As a result, the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the extending direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis, and the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630.

  After the states shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b), the states shown in FIGS. 33 (c), 35 (c) and 37 (c) (ie, FIG. 34 (a)). 36 (a) and FIG. 38 (a)), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is moved between the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Reach the connected part.

  In addition, in the state shown to FIG.33 (c), FIG.35 (c), and FIG.37 (c) (namely, FIG.34 (a), FIG.36 (a), and FIG.38 (a)), the 1st displacement member 630 is shown. One abutment portion 634 of the pair of abutment portions 634 abuts on one side surface of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620, so that the first displacement member 630 rotates in the protruding direction. Be regulated.

  Therefore, when the transmission member 654 is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 38 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 34 (a), 36 (a) and 38 (a), the transmission member 654 The drive pin 654b moves along the non-interference section 635b without interfering with the inner wall surface of the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Thereby, the 1st displacement member 630 is maintained in the state (position) shown to Fig.38 (a).

  In contrast, in the second displacement member 640, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b is pushed downward (downward in FIG. 38A) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, so that FIG. 36 (b) and 38 (b), the driven member 641 is rotated about the support shaft 632 in the direction of raising the connecting groove 641c (counterclockwise in FIG. 38 (b)). The rotation of the driven member 641 is transmitted to the connection displacement member 642 via the connection of the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643, and the connection displacement member 642 lifts the decoration portion 642b with the support shaft 633 as the rotation center ( It is rotated in FIG. 38 (b) clockwise. That is, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 38 (b)) from the state shown in FIG. 34 (b), FIG. 36 (b) and FIG. 38 (b), the same as described above. In addition, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (the connected displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630. After that, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the end of the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640, so that FIG. 36 (c) and 38 (c), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are disposed at the extended position.

  Contrary to the case described above, the transmission member 654 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38 (c)) from the overhang position shown in FIGS. 34 (c), 36 (c) and 38 (c). When driven, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves along the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, so that the first displacement member 630 is shown in FIG. The state (position) shown is maintained.

  In contrast, in the second displacement member 640, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b is pushed upward (upper side in FIG. 38C) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, so that FIG. As shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and 38 (b), the driven member 641 is rotated about the support shaft 632 in the direction of lowering the connecting groove 641c (clockwise in FIG. 38 (b)), and the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated in the direction of swinging down the decorative portion 642b with the support shaft 633 as the center of rotation (FIG. 38 (b) counterclockwise). That is, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38 (b)) from the state shown in FIG. 34 (b), FIG. 36 (b), and FIG. 38 (b), Similarly, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630 in the direction of swinging down the decorative portion 642b.

  After the states shown in FIGS. 34B, 36B, and 38B, the states shown in FIGS. 34A, 36A, and 38A (ie, FIG. 33C). ), The state shown in FIG. 35C and FIG. 37C), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is moved between the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Reach the connected part.

  Therefore, when the transmission member 654 is driven to rotate in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 37 (c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 33 (c), 35 (c), and 37 (c), the first displacement The inner wall surfaces of the first groove 635 (operation section 635a) of the member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 are pushed in the standing direction (left side in FIG. 37C) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654. Thus, as shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b), and 37 (b), the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the standing direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, since the second groove 641b has the same outer shape as the action section 635b of the first groove 635, the second displacement member 640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630, and the first displacement It is displaced together with the member 630.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the reverse direction (FIG. 37 (b) clockwise) from the state shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b), the same as described above. Further, the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the standing direction about the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis, and the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630. After that, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the working section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 and the start end of the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640, so that FIG. As shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 37 (a), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are disposed at the retracted position.

  33A, FIG. 35A, and FIG. 37A, the other contact portion 634 of the pair of contact portions 634 of the first displacement member 630 is the front base. By abutting against the other side surface of the protruding portion 628 of 620, the rotation of the first displacement member 630 in the standing direction is restricted.

  As described above, the right rotation unit 600 includes the first displacement member 630 in a posture in which the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped (superposed) in the thickness direction (for example, the vertical direction in FIG. 33 and FIG. 34). And since the 2nd displacement member 640 is arrange | positioned in the front side of the front base 620, compared with the case of the conventional product with which the 1st groove | channel and the 2nd groove | channel are arranged in the same plane, these 1st groove | channels 635 are compared. And the planar space required for arrangement | positioning of the 2nd groove | channel 641b (namely, the 1st displacement member 630 and the 2nd displacement member 640) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape (planar space) in front view.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an increase in the size of the display device (the third symbol display device 81) is required. However, even in this case, the space in the thickness direction (the front-rear direction, for example, the vertical direction in FIGS. 10 and 11) has a relatively large margin. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, if the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped and a space having a relatively sufficient thickness direction is used, the outer shape of the right rotation unit 600 in a front view is small. This is particularly effective for increasing the size of the display device.

  If the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped, the rotational driving force of the transmission member 654 is transmitted to each of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 by one drive pin 654b. In addition, unlike the conventional product, it is not necessary to provide a drive pin (transmission member) for each of the first groove and the second groove. That is, parts can be shared, and the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

  As described above, the second displacement member 640 is divided into the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642, and the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642 are connected by the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643. Since the link mechanism is configured by being rotatably supported by the support shafts 632 and 633 of the first displacement member 630, the amplification effect of the link mechanism can be used. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36, and 38, the relative displacement amount of the connecting displacement member 642 (decoration portion 642b) with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be increased. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the second displacement member 640 is divided into a driven member 641 and a connecting displacement member 642 to form a link mechanism, and a support shaft that supports the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642. By disposing 632 and 633 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 630, as shown in FIGS. 33 (a), 35 (a) and 37 (a), the driven member is driven at the retracted position. A posture in which the member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are superposed can be formed.

  Thereby, the 2nd displacement member 640 can be made easy to conceal on the back side of the 1st displacement member 630 (it is easy to make it invisible to a player). Therefore, not only can the size of the outer shape of the right rotation unit 600 in a front view be reduced in the retracted position (see FIG. 33A), but also when the first displacement member 630 is tilted from the standing posture to the protruding posture. (See FIG. 33 (a) to FIG. 33 (c)), while the presence of the second displacement member 640 (decoration portion 642b) is hidden from the player, the first displacement member 630 is tilted to the overhanging posture, The second displacement member 640 can be protruded from the back surface of the first displacement member 630 (see FIG. 34 (a) to FIG. 34 (c)), and an effect that gives an impact to the player can be easily performed.

  As described above, the operation of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 from the retracted position shown in FIG. 33 (a) to the extended position shown in FIG. 34 (c) starts from FIG. 33 (a). As shown in FIG. 33 (c), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced (rotated) in the overhanging direction (that is, the falling direction, referred to as the “first direction”) while being integrated. After the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 630 is stopped as shown in FIGS. 33 (c) and 34 (a), the second displacement is performed as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c). The connecting displacement member 642 of the member 640 is displaced (rotated) in the direction in which the decorative portion 642b is lifted (referred to as “second direction”). That is, the first direction and the second direction are opposite.

  Thereby, the inertial force accompanying the stop of the first displacement member 630 that has been displaced in the first direction can be canceled out by the inertial force when the second displacement member 640 starts displacement in the second direction. As a result, a series of operations from the retracted position to the extended position can be smoothly performed, not only can the production effect be enhanced, but also the durability of the parts can be reduced by reducing the load on the parts due to the action of inertial force. Can be achieved.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the weight of the first displacement member 630 is heavier than the weight of the second displacement member 640, so that the extended position shown in FIG. 34 (c) from the retracted position shown in FIG. In the operation of displacing the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, the first displacement member 630 having a heavy weight can be stopped first, and the second displacement member 640 having a light weight can be stopped last. Thereby, the load which the drive motor 650 and the gears (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652 and the second pinion 653, see FIGS. 29 and 30) in the transmission mechanism receive can be reduced.

  That is, from the state in which the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced in the protruding direction (first direction) while being integrated (see FIG. 33A to FIG. 33C), The displacement of the first displacement member 630 is stopped (see FIGS. 33 (c) and 34 (a)), and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 lifts the decorative portion 642b (second direction). The transition from the displaced state (see FIG. 34 (a) to FIG. 34 (c)) is caused by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moving from the action section 635a of the first groove 635 to the non-interference section 635b. Thus, the rotation of the drive motor 650 and the gears (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652, and the second pinion 653) in the transmission mechanism can be continued. Therefore, even if the first displacement member 630 is stopped during the transition of the state, it is possible to avoid a burden on the gear of the drive motor 650 transmission mechanism due to the stop.

  On the other hand, the displacement of the first displacement member 630 is stopped (see FIGS. 33 (c) and 34 (a)), and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 lifts the decorative portion 642b (first direction). The transition from the state displaced in two directions (see FIG. 34 (a) to FIG. 34 (c)) to the state in which the second displacement member 640 is stopped (see FIG. 34 (c)) is a drive motor 650. In addition, it is necessary to stop the rotation of the gears (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652, and the second pinion 653) of the transmission mechanism, and an inertial force when the second displacement member 640 is stopped is applied to the gear. However, since the only member that is stopped in this case is the second displacement member 640 that is light in weight, the burden on the gear can be reduced accordingly.

  Here, as described above, the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 is outward on the opposite side of the decorative portion 642b across the portion (the shaft support hole 642a) that is pivotally supported by the first displacement member 630. An overhang portion 642c formed by overhanging is provided (see FIG. 32), and the overhang portion 642c can be made to play a role of a weight.

  Thus, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36, and 38, when the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated to lift the decorative portion 642b upward, an overhang portion 642c is formed on the opposite side of the decorative portion 642b. Therefore, the decorative portion 642b can be easily lifted upward using the weight of the overhang portion 642c. Therefore, the decoration portion 642b can be quickly lifted, and the effect can be enhanced, and the driving force of the driving motor 650 required for the lifting operation can be suppressed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c), 36 (c) and 38 (c), after the decorative portion 642b is lifted, the weight of the decorative portion 642b and the weight of the overhang portion 642c are suspended. Therefore, as compared with the cantilever state in which only the decorative portion 642b is formed, the posture in which the decorative portion 642b is lifted can be stabilized and is required to maintain the posture. The driving force of the driving motor 650 can be suppressed.

  In this case, as described above, the overhanging portion 642c of the connecting displacement member 642 is formed so that its bottom wall (projection 642c1, see FIG. 32) can come into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630. As shown in FIGS. 34, 36, and 38, when the connection displacement member 642 is displaced (rotated), the projecting portion 642 c is brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630, thereby causing the connection displacement. Shaking of the member 642 (decoration portion 642b) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the posture at the time of displacement of the decorative portion 642b and enhance the production effect, and it is possible to suppress wear and breakage of the shaft support portion due to rattling.

  In addition, since the overhanging portion 642c also serves as a weight and suppresses rattling by abutting against the first displacement member 630, it is necessary to provide separate portions for both roles. The structure of the connecting displacement member 642 can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the part cost can be reduced.

  Furthermore, the overhanging portion 642c of the connecting displacement member 642 is formed in a substantially box shape as described above (see FIG. 32). Thereby, weight and rigidity can be secured while reducing the outer shape of the overhang portion 642c. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34, FIG. 36 and FIG. 38, in the state where the overhanging portion 642c is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, in a state where it cannot be seen by the player at the front), the connected displacement While ensuring that the member 642 (decoration portion 642b) is displaced, the overhanging portion 642c reliably exerts a function as a weight and a function of abutting against the back surface of the first displacement member 630 and suppressing rattling. Can be made.

  Here, in the front base 620, as described above, the shaft support hole 624 that supports the first displacement member 630 is more open than the shaft support hole 625 that supports the transmission member 654. Since the first displacement member 630 is disposed on the projecting position side (see FIGS. 29 to 31), as shown in FIGS. 33 to 38, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member are disposed at the projecting position. While it is possible to secure an overhang area that 640 projects to the opening side of the game board 13, the transmission member 654 can be easily hidden on the back surface of the first displacement member 630 while being displaced from the retracted position to the overhang position.

  In this case, as described above, the front base 620 includes the bearing portion 627 that supports the rotating shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 (see FIG. 29), and the transmission member 654 is shown in FIGS. As shown in (c), when the second displacement member 640 is displaced to the extended position, it is formed so as to be able to abut against the bearing portion 627. Therefore, the second displacement member 640 can be made relatively to the first displacement member 630. The rotation can be restricted within a predetermined range. That is, the transmission member 654 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 650 can also serve as a stopper that restricts relative rotation of the second displacement member 640 with respect to the first displacement member 630 within a predetermined range. Therefore, the structure can be simplified, and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, the bearing portion 627 is a part for raising the first displacement member 630 from the front base 620 and arranging the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 in a superposed posture (FIG. 29), the rigidity is relatively high, and a dead space is formed on the outer peripheral side thereof. As shown in FIG. 38C, the transmission member 654 is brought into contact with the bearing portion 627. Thus, the rigidity of the portion that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member 640 with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be secured, and the durability can be improved, and the dead space can be used effectively, and the size is reduced accordingly. Can be achieved.

  Further, as described above, the transmission member 654 is provided with a recessed portion 654c corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion 627 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), and as shown in FIG. When the displacement member 640 is extended to the extended position, the bearing portion 627 is formed so as to be able to be received in the recessed portion 654c, so that the movable range of the transmission member 654 can be increased accordingly. Accordingly, the amount of displacement of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be ensured accordingly. In other words, since the position of the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 can be brought close to the bearing portion 627 while securing the movable range of the transmission member 654, the outer shape of the first displacement member 630 is suppressed, and FIG. 38 and FIG. 38, the transmission member 654 is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 while the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the extended position (that is, , A state in which the player is not visible from the front player).

  As described above, the front base 620 is formed so as to be inclined by chamfering the side and front ridges on the left side of the front view (the opening side of the game board 13, for example, the left side of FIG. 33C). An inclined surface 620a is provided. Accordingly, the connection displacement member 642 is displaced (rotated) from the state shown in FIG. 34C in the direction of lowering the decorative portion 642b, and after the state shown in FIG. 34B, the state shown in FIG. In the case of forming, the inclined surface 620a can suppress the connection displacement member 642 from being locked by the side surface of the front base 620 and being unable to be displaced. Similarly, from the state shown in FIG. 33C, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) is displaced (rotated) toward the retracted position integrally with the first displacement member 630, and FIG. Even when the state shown in FIG. 33A is formed through the state shown in FIG. 33, the inclined surface 620a can suppress the connection displacement member 642 from being locked by the side surface of the front base 620 and being unable to be displaced.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the first displacement member 630 is disposed in a cantilevered manner with the rotation shaft 631 as a fulcrum, and the second displacement member 640 is disposed on the first displacement member 630, and the weight Therefore, the first displacement member 630 is likely to sway in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 33) (that is, the sway in the direction in which the connection displacement member 642 approaches and separates from the front base 620). It is easy to be locked to the side surface of the front base 620. Therefore, the configuration in which the inclined surface 620a is provided on the front base 620 is particularly effective.

  Further, as described above, the front base 620 includes the ridges 626 that protrude from the front surface and extend along the displacement direction (rotation direction) of the first displacement member 630. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 33, 35, and 37, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630, only the top portion of the ridge 626 is moved to the second displacement member 640. Can be contacted. Therefore, compared with the case where the entire front surface of the front base 620 contacts the second displacement member 640, the contact area can be reduced and the sliding resistance can be suppressed. As a result, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be smoothly displaced, and the driving force required for the drive motor 650 can be suppressed.

  Here, the relationship between the ridge 626 of the front base 620 and the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39A is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base 620 and the connecting displacement member 642, and FIG. 39B is a front base 620 along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a connecting displacement member 642. FIG.

  As described above, the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 is formed from a light transmissive resin material. Therefore, the decoration effect can be enhanced by transmitting light emitted from the light emitter and the display device. On the other hand, since the connecting displacement member 642 is a member that is disposed to face the front base 620 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), the occurrence of shaking and rattling when the second displacement member 640 is displaced is generated. Accordingly, the front surface of the front base 620 is brought into contact with the front surface. In this case, when the front surface of the front base 620 comes into contact with the connection displacement member 642, the connection displacement member 642 is fogged by rubbing between the front base 620 and the front surface of the front base 620, and the light transmittance is impaired.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the protrusion 626 is formed on the front surface of the front base 620, and only the top of the protrusion 626 can be brought into contact with the connection displacement member 642. Clouding due to rubbing formed on the connecting displacement member 642 (part where light transmission is impaired) can be partially suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the second displacement member 640 is provided with a metal connection pin 643 for connecting the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642 to the connection displacement member 642. The protrusion 626 of the front base 620 is integrated with the first displacement member 630 along the locus of the connecting pin 643 when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (see FIGS. 33, 35 and 37). Extended.

  Thus, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630, the rear end surface of the connecting pin 642 (the surface on the right side in FIG. 39 (b)) is brought into contact with the top of the ridge 626. Can be touched. Therefore, the surface pressure acting on the connecting displacement member 642 from the top of the ridge 626 is received by the rear end surface of the connecting pin 642, and the surface pressure acting on the other part of the connecting displacement member 642 is reduced accordingly. it can. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of fogging due to rubbing with the protrusions 626 in other portions of the connecting displacement member 642 and to suppress the loss of the function of transmitting the light.

  Next, the function of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 will be described with reference to FIG. 40A is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base 620 and the first displacement member 630, and FIG. 40B is a front base in the direction of arrow XLb in FIG. 40A. FIG. 40C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base 620 and the first displacement member 630 taken along line XLc-XLc in FIG. 40A.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the front base 620 includes a bearing portion 627 that rotatably supports the first displacement member 630, and the first displacement member 630 is disposed in front of the front base 620 by the height of the bearing portion 627. Therefore, a space for disposing the second displacement member 640 can be formed between the front surface of the front base 620 and the back surface of the first displacement member 630. That is, as described above, the second displacement member 640 can be disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 29 to 31).

  As described above, the front base 620 includes the overhanging portion 628 formed so as to protrude radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627, and the first displacement member 630 protrudes from the back surface thereof. The contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 is brought into contact with the protrusion 628 of the front base 620 so that the relative rotation of the first displacement member 630 with respect to the front base 620 is within a predetermined range. Can be regulated within.

  In this case, the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 is erected from the front of the front base 620 as a large-diameter cylindrical body, the rigidity thereof is increased, and a dead space is formed on the outer peripheral side. A projecting portion 628 protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627, and the contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 is brought into contact with the projecting portion 628, whereby the first displacement The rigidity of the portion that restricts the relative rotation of the member 630 with respect to the front base 620 can be secured to improve the durability, and the dead space can be used effectively, and the size can be reduced accordingly.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the outer shape of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 40A) portion of the first displacement member 630 is set to a size including the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 in front view. That is, the front surface of the protrusion 628 of the front base 620 (the front side surface in FIG. 40A) can be brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the rattling when the first displacement member 630 is displaced and the tilting of the first displacement member 630 forward (in the direction of the arrow Fr in FIG. 40C).

  In addition, the protrusion 628 of the front base 620 receives a contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 on its side surface and serves as a stopper for restricting relative displacement, and the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 on the front surface thereof. Since it can be used as a role for suppressing rattling and tilting, it is not necessary to provide separate parts for these roles, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the part cost can be reduced.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the first displacement member 630 is disposed in a cantilever state with the rotation shaft 631 (the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620) as a fulcrum, and the first displacement member 630 includes a second displacement member 630. Since the displacement member 640 is disposed and increases in weight, the first displacement member 630 is likely to swing in the front-rear direction (FIG. 40A, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface). Shaking in the direction in which the first displacement member 630 approaches the front base 620 (the direction opposite to the arrow X in FIG. 40C) is caused by the front base 620 (projection 626) of the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642). Can be controlled by abutting on the top of the first base), but swinging in the direction in which the first displacement member 630 is separated from the front base 620 (in the direction of the arrow Fr in FIG. 40C) cannot be controlled, and the weight is as described above. Since it is bulky, it tends to cause damage near the fulcrum. Therefore, a configuration in which the front surface of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 is brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630 so that the forward displacement (tilt) of the first displacement member 630 can be suppressed is particularly effective.

  In this case, since the protrusion 628 of the front base 620 protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing 627 and is connected to the front of the front base 620, the rigidity of the protrusion 628 can be increased. In particular, when the first displacement member 630 is tilted forward (in the direction of arrow Fr in FIG. 40C), the direction in which the tilt is supported (that is, the protruding portion 628 is formed between the back surface of the first displacement member 630 and the front base 620. Since the rigidity in the direction between the front surface and the front surface can be increased, the first displacement member 630 can be effectively prevented from tilting forward.

  Next, the left rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 48. 41 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 700, and FIG. 42 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 700. FIG. 43 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 700.

  As shown in FIG. 41 to FIG. 43, the left rotation unit 700 is disposed on the front side of the front base 720 of the base body including the back base 710 and the front base 720 so that the base end side can be displaced. The first displacement member 730, the second displacement member 740 displaceably disposed on the distal end side of the first displacement member 730, and the driving force for displacing the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 A drive motor 750 disposed on the back surface of the back surface base 710, a transmission mechanism for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 750, and a connecting member (which connects the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740). The connection 1st member 760 and the connection 2nd member 770), and the cover body 780 covered by the lower end side front of the front base 720 are mainly provided.

  A part of the transmission mechanism (the first pinion 751, the rack member 752, and the second pinion 753) is accommodated between the opposing surfaces of the back base 710 and the front base 720. On the back surface of the front base 720, a pair of insertion pins 722 that protrude through the sliding groove 752 a of the rack member 752 are provided in a protruding manner in order to define the moving direction of the rack member 752.

  The front base 720 is formed with shaft support holes 723, 724, and 725 that are circular in front view. The shaft support holes 723, 724, and 725 have a rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 and a transmission member 754. The rotating shaft 754a and the rotating shaft 761 of the connecting first member 760 are rotatably supported. Similarly, a shaft support hole 781 having a circular shape when viewed from the front is formed through the cover body 780, and the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 781.

  In addition, a base-side engagement member 726 is protruded from the front surface of the front base 720, and a receiving recess 727 is provided. The base side engaging member 726 includes a base portion 726a standing from the front surface of the front base 720, and a bent portion 726b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 726a and having an inner surface as an engaging surface. , The second displacement member 740 is formed so that the engagement surfaces can be engaged with a later-described displacement-side engagement member 742. Thereby, as described later, it is possible to suppress the forward tilt of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 with respect to the front base 720 (see FIG. 47).

  The receiving concave portion 727 is a concave portion that is substantially rectangular in a front view and is provided at a position facing the bent portion 726 b of the base side engaging member 726, and the receiving concave portion 727 includes a bent portion 742 b of the displacement side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740. By being formed with an opening area larger than the outer shape, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 742 is formed to be receivable. As a result, as will be described later, relative displacement in the proximity direction of the second displacement member 730 relative to the front base 720 is allowed at the retracted position, and damage due to collision can be suppressed (see FIG. 47C).

  The transmission mechanism includes a first pinion 751 attached to the drive shaft of the drive motor 750, a second pinion 753 fastened and fixed to the rotation shaft 754a of the transmission member 754, and the first pinion 751 and the second pinion 753 are teeth. And a rack member 752 formed as a rack in which the rack gear to be combined is cut into the side surface of the flat plate-like member.

  The rack member 752 includes two sliding grooves 752a each having a long hole shape in a front view extending along the longitudinal direction, and a pair of insertion pins 722 of the front base 720 are inserted into the respective sliding grooves 752a. Thus, the moving direction is held in a prescribed state. That is, the rack member 752 is held between the opposed surfaces of the back base 710 and the front base 720 so as to be linearly movable.

  The transmission member 754 includes a rotation shaft 754a that protrudes from the back surface on one end side, and a drive pin 754b that protrudes from the front surface on the other end side opposite to the rotation shaft 754a. By being inserted into the shaft support hole 724, it is rotatably supported on the front side of the front base 720. The drive pin 754 b is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section, and is inserted into a drive groove 762 described later of the connection first member 760.

  According to the transmission mechanism, when the first pinion 751 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 750, the rotation of the first pinion 751 is transmitted to the second pinion 753 through the linear motion of the rack member 752. When the second pinion 753 is rotated, the transmission member 754 is rotated about the shaft support hole 724 of the front base 720 as the rotation center.

  When the transmission member 754 is rotated, as described later, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 acts on the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760, and the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770 are driven. . As a result, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced relative to the first displacement member 730 via the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770 while the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced. Can be displaced relative to the front base 720 (see FIG. 46).

  The first displacement member 730 has a rotating shaft 731 protruding on one end in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 42) and a shaft on the other end in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 42) opposite to the rotating shaft 731. A support hole 732 is formed in a penetrating manner, and a sliding groove 733 having an oval shape in front view is recessed on the back surface of the first displacement member 730, and a connecting pin 734 is protruded. An engaged portion 735 is formed on the outer edge of the first displacement member 730 on the other end side in the longitudinal direction and on the side of the shaft support hole 732.

  As described above, the rotation shaft 731 is a shaft-like body that is inserted into the shaft support hole 723 of the front base 720 and the shaft support hole 781 of the cover body 780. The first displacement member 730 has the rotation shaft 731 as a shaft. By being inserted into the support holes 723 and 781, the front base 720 is rotatably supported on the front side. That is, the first displacement member 730 is pivotally supported between the opposed surfaces of the front base 720 and the cover body 780 so that the base end side can rotate.

  The shaft support hole 732 is a circular hole when viewed from the front, and rotatably supports the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740. The sliding groove 733 is a concave groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, and the end portion of the connecting shaft 790 is slidably inserted therethrough. The connection shaft 790 supports the other ends of the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770 so as to be relatively rotatable. As will be described later, when the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770 are driven, the connection shaft 790 acts on the sliding groove 733 with respect to the first displacement member 730 so that the first displacement member 730 is in front. It is displaced (rotated) with respect to the base 720 (see FIG. 45).

  The connection pin 734 is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section that is inserted into a slide groove 772 described later of the connection second member 770, and is on an extension line that extends the slide groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 in the extending direction. Placed in. Therefore, the direction in which the connecting shaft 790 slides along the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 and the direction in which the connecting pin 734 slides along the sliding groove 772 of the connecting second member 770 are matched. Can do. That is, as will be described later, when the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770 are driven, the relative displacement of the connection second member 770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is a linear motion (slide displacement). (See FIG. 45).

  The engaged portion 735 is a part formed on the outer edge of the first displacement member 730 that protrudes to a position overlapping the second displacement member 740 in the rear view, and the displacement of the second displacement member 740 to be described later is at the extension position. The side engaging member 742 (the engaging surface of the bent portion 742b) is formed to be engageable (see FIG. 48). Thereby, as described later, rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed at the overhang position (see FIG. 48).

  The second displacement member 740 includes a rotation shaft 741 and a displacement-side engagement portion 742 that protrude from the back surface thereof, a receiving recess portion 743 that is recessed at the back surface, and a flange member that is fastened and fixed to the end surface of the rotation shaft 741. 744.

  As described above, the rotation shaft 741 is a shaft-like body that is inserted through the shaft support hole 732 of the first displacement member 730, and the rotation shaft 741 is inserted through the shaft support hole 732, thereby the first displacement member. A second displacement member 740 is rotatably supported on the distal end side in the longitudinal direction of 730. The flange member 744 is formed such that the base end side fastened and fixed to the rotation shaft 741 is larger in diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 732, thereby restricting the rotation shaft 741 from coming out of the shaft support hole 732.

  On the back surface of the flange member 744, a connecting pin 744 a is provided so as to protrude from the center of the rotation shaft 741. The connection pin 744a is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section, and is inserted into a connection groove 772 described later of the connection second member 770. As will be described later, when the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770 are driven, the connection pin 744a of the flange member 744 receives an action from the connection groove 772 of the connection second member 770, thereby causing the second displacement. The member 740 is relatively displaced (relatively rotated) with respect to the first displacement member 730 (see FIG. 46).

  The displacement side engaging member 742 includes a base portion 742a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 742a and having an inner surface as an engaging surface. As described above, the engagement surfaces are formed to be engageable with the displacement-side engagement member 726 of the front base 720 in the retracted position, and the first displacement member 730 is engaged in the extended position. An engaging surface can be engaged with the mating portion 735.

  The receiving concave portion 743 is a concave portion that is substantially rectangular in a front view and is recessed at a position facing the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 742. From the outer shape of the bent portion 726b in the base side engaging member 726 of the front base 720. Is formed with a large opening area so that the bent portion 726b of the base side engaging member 726 can be received. As a result, as will be described later, relative displacement in the proximity direction of the second displacement member 730 relative to the front base 720 is allowed at the retracted position, and damage due to collision can be suppressed (see FIG. 47C).

  The connecting first member 760 is provided with a rotating shaft 761 projecting from the back surface on one end side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 42), and a sliding groove 762 is opened at a substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction. Are respectively provided with a connecting groove 771 and a sliding groove 772 at one end in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 42) and a central portion in the longitudinal direction.

  The rotation shaft 761 of the connection first member 760 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 725 of the front base 720, and the connection groove 771 of the connection second member 770 is connected to the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740. The pin 744a is inserted. Further, the other longitudinal ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are pivotally supported by a connecting shaft 790 inserted through the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 so as to be relatively rotatable.

  That is, one end of the connecting first member 760 in the longitudinal direction is connected to the front base 720 and one end of the connecting second member 770 in the longitudinal direction is connected to the second displacement member 740 so as to be displaceable. A connection portion (connection pin 790) between the other longitudinal ends of the connection second member 770 is connected to the first displacement member 730 so as to be displaceable.

  As a result, as described later, the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are connected to the first displaceable member 760 and the second displaceable member 740 while the relative displacement between the first displaceable member 730 and the second displaceable member 740 and the relative displacement relative to the front base 720 are possible. It can be hidden behind the displacement member 730 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 from being exposed and the appearance from being damaged in the overhang position (see FIGS. 44C and 45C).

  As described above, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is inserted into the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760, and the first displacement member 730 is inserted into the slide groove 772 of the connection second member 770. The connecting pin 734 is inserted.

  Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 44 is a front view of the left rotation unit 700 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. 6 is a rear view of the left rotation unit 700. FIG. FIG. 46 is a schematic back view of the left rotation unit 700 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

  FIG. 44 shows a state where the cover body 780 is omitted. 44 (a) is a diagram of FIGS. 45 (a) and 46 (a), FIG. 44 (b) is a diagram of FIGS. 45 (b) and 46 (b), and FIG. 44 (c) is a diagram of FIG. 45 (c) and FIG. 46 (c), respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 (a), 45 (a) and 46 (a), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and are arranged on the front surface of the front base 720. Established.

  From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (FIG. 46 (a) clockwise), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 is projected by the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754. By pushing in the direction (left side in FIG. 46 (a)), the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the protruding direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (a)) with the rotation shaft 761 as the rotation center.

  When the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the protruding direction, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 connects the other ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 to each other. By being pushed in the projecting direction (left side in FIG. 46 (a)) by 790, as shown in FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and 6 (b), the first displacement member 730 has its rotational axis. It is rotated in the projecting direction (FIG. 46 (a) counterclockwise) around 731 as the rotation center.

  Further, when the connection first member 760 is rotated in the protruding direction, the connection second member 770 in which the connection first member 760 and the other end are connected by the connection shaft 790 moves downward (lower side in FIG. 46A). ), And the inner wall surface of the connection groove 771 of the connection second member 770 pushes down the connection pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, whereby FIG. 44 (b), FIG. 45 (b) and As shown in FIG. 46B, relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (FIG. 46A clockwise) with the rotation shaft 741 as the rotation center. )

  In this case, the connecting second member 770 includes the connecting shaft 790 and the first displacement member 730 along the extending direction of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 and the sliding groove 772 of the connection second member 770. When the connecting pins 734 are slid, the first displacement member 730 is linearly moved (slided) along the longitudinal direction.

  44 (b), 45 (b) and 46 (b), the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the forward direction (FIG. 46 (b) clockwise), and the connection first member 760 is When the rotating shaft 761 is rotated in the projecting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (b)) as the rotation center, the first displacement member 730 projects in the projecting direction with the rotation shaft 731 as the rotation center, as described above. (FIG. 46 (b) counterclockwise) and the second displacement member 740 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction with the rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation (FIG. 46 (b) clockwise). Relative displacement (relative rotation).

  Thereafter, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is tilted as shown in FIGS. 44 (c), 45 (c) and 46 (c), and the first displacement member 730 is tilted. The first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the extended position, and the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (relatively rotated) relative to the first displacement member 730.

  Contrary to the case described above, the transmission member 754 rotates in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (c)) from the overhang position shown in FIGS. 44 (c), 45 (c) and 46 (c). When driven, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 is pushed in the retracting direction (right side in FIG. 46C) by the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754, so that the connection first member 760 is moved. The rotating shaft 761 is rotated in the retracting direction (FIG. 46 (c) clockwise) with the rotation center as the rotation center.

  When the connection first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 connects the other ends of the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770 to each other. As shown in FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and 6 (b), the first displacing member 730 causes the rotation shaft 731 to move. It is rotated in the retracting direction (FIG. 46 (c) clockwise) as the center of rotation.

  When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 770 in which the first connecting member 760 and the other end are connected by the connecting shaft 790 is moved upward (upper side in FIG. 46C). The inner wall surface of the sliding groove 772 of the second connecting member 770 is pushed up and pushes up the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, whereby FIG. 44 (b), FIG. 45 (b) and FIG. As shown in FIG. 6B, the second displacement member 740 is displaced relative to the first displacement member 730 in the second direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46B) with the rotation shaft 741 as the rotation center. )

  44 (b), 45 (b) and 46 (b), the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (b)), and the connection first member 760 is moved. When the rotating shaft 761 is rotated in the retracting direction (FIG. 46B clockwise) as in the case described above, the first displacement member 730 is retracted about the rotating shaft 731 in the retracting direction (see FIG. 46). 46 (b) clockwise) and the second displacement member 740 is relative to the first displacement member 730 in the second direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (b)) with the rotation shaft 741 as the rotation center. It is displaced (relative rotation).

  Thereafter, when the transmission member 754 reaches the start end of the movable range, the first displacement member 730 is erected as shown in FIGS. 44 (a), 45 (a) and 46 (a). The first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted position, and a state in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is minimized.

  As described above, according to the left rotation unit 700, the connection member (the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770) that connects the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740 is provided. By acting between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the second displacement member 730 is relatively displaced (relative rotation) with respect to the first displacement member 730 as the first displacement member 730 is displaced (rotated). ).

  In this case, in the conventional product in which the connecting member is installed between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the first displacement member 730 is displaced in the direction of protruding from the front base 720 and being separated (the protruding direction). Then, since a connection member is exposed between the front base 720 and the 2nd displacement member 740, and it becomes visible from a player, an external appearance is impaired.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the connecting member is divided into two members, a first connecting member 760 and a second connecting member 770, and one end in the longitudinal direction of the connecting first member 760 is connected to the front base 720, and The other end in the longitudinal direction of the connection second member 770 is connected to the second displacement member 740, the other ends in the longitudinal direction of the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770 are connected so as to be relatively displaceable, and the connection Since the portion (the connecting shaft 790) is connected to the first displacement member 730 so as to be displaceable, even when the first displacement member 730 protrudes from the front base 720 and is displaced in the direction away from the front base 720 (the extension direction), the connection member. The (connection first member 760 and connection second member 770) can be hidden behind the first displacement member, making it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it can suppress that a connection member is exposed and an external appearance is impaired.

  In this case, as described above, the second connecting member 770 is held by the first displacing member 730 in a form of linear movement (sliding displacement) along the longitudinal direction of the first displacing member 730. The displacement (rotation angle) by which 730 is displaced (rotated) in a direction (projection direction) in which the 730 projects from the front base 720 is large (that is, the displacement amount of the coupling first member 760 and the coupling second member 770 is increased). Even if it is necessary to keep the connecting second member 770 hidden behind the first displacement member 730, it is possible to avoid being visually recognized by the player. As a result, it can suppress that a connection member is exposed and an external appearance is impaired.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the second displacement member 740 includes a light emitter (not shown), and an electrical connection line W that supplies power to the light emitter is wired on the back surface of the first displacement member 730. (See FIG. 45). In this case, the connection line W is introduced from an opening formed in the back surface of the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740 and connected to the light emitter. Therefore, the connection line W is wired on the back surface of the first displacement member 730 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730. Therefore, when the connecting member is displaced on the back surface of the first displacement member 730, the connecting member may interfere and damage the connection line W.

  In this case, the connecting member (the connected second member 770) is disposed on the first displacement member 730 in a form of linear movement (sliding displacement) along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, as described above. It is possible to suppress the coupling second member 770 from interfering with the connection line W. Therefore, since it is possible to avoid interference with the connected second member 770 without securing a large space for wiring the connection line W (that is, the dimension in the width direction of the first displacement member 730), such a connection can be avoided. The space for disposing the line W can be reduced, and the size of the first displacement member 730 in front view (particularly, the dimension in the width direction) can be reduced accordingly.

  Here, if the above-described connecting members (the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770) are provided, the driving force of the driving motor 750 is applied to the first displacement member 730 (that is, the first displacement member 730). Even if the drive groove is provided and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove), the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can perform the same operation as described above. it can.

  However, in the case of this configuration, the size of the first displacement member 730 in the front view is increased. That is, the connecting member needs to displace the connecting portion between the other ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 to the sliding groove 733 of the first displacing member 730, so that the first It is disposed between the opposing surfaces of the displacement member 730 and the front base 720. Therefore, when a driving groove is provided in the first displacement member 730 and the driving pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the driving groove, the transmission member 754 and the connection member (the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770) In order to avoid the interference, it is necessary to provide a drive groove in the first displacement member 730 at a position that does not overlap the displacement locus of the connecting member. Therefore, the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 needs to be a size (area) including both the displacement trajectory of the connecting member and the drive groove, and accordingly, the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 is the same. Increase in size.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the driving groove 762 is provided in the connecting first member 760, and the driving pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the driving groove 762 of the connecting first member 760, so that the driving force of the driving motor 750 is obtained. Therefore, the size of the first displacement member 730 can be reduced.

  That is, it is not necessary to avoid interference between the transmission member 754 and the connecting member (the connected first member 760 and the connected second member 770), and the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 corresponds only to the displacement locus of the connecting member. The size (area) may be used, and it is not necessary to set the size (area) including the drive groove. Therefore, the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 can be reduced accordingly.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47 and FIG. 48, the engaging action by the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 will be described.

  FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 700 for explaining the engaging action by the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XLVIIa-XLVIIa in FIG. To do.

  47A shows a state immediately before the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 47B shows the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740. A state in which the displacement member 740 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated. FIG. 47 (c) shows a state in which the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced in the direction approaching the front base 720 in FIG. 47 (b).

  As described above, the base side engaging member 726 protrudes from the front surface of the front base 720, and the displacement side engaging member 742 protrudes from the back surface of the second displacement member 740. The engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 are arranged in such a posture that their open sides (the tip side of the bent portion 726b) face each other (see FIGS. 41 to 43).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced in the retracting direction (upper side in FIG. 47) with respect to the front base 720, the bent portions 726b of each other. , 742b can be made to enter the inner side of the counterpart bent portions 726b, 742b, and the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted position as shown in FIG. 47 (b). Then, the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b can be engaged with each other.

  Here, in the conventional product in which the connecting member is installed between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the front base 720 and the second displacement are positioned at a position relatively distant from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. The member 740 is connected by a connecting member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member 730 tilts the tip portion (that is, the second displacement member 740) opposite to the rotation shaft 731 in the direction away from the front base 720 (forward) at the retracted position, The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the connecting member interposed between the base 720 and the second displacement member 740.

  However, in the present embodiment, one end in the longitudinal direction of the connecting second member 770 is connected to the second displacement member 740, while one end in the longitudinal direction of the connecting first member 760 is relatively to the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. It is connected to the front base 720 at a close position. Therefore, in the retracted position, the rotating shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 serves as a base end (fulcrum), and the tip portion opposite to the rotating shaft 731 (that is, the second displacement member 740 side) serves as a free end. In this state, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in the standing posture. Therefore, the first displacement member 730 has a free end according to its own weight and the weight of the second displacement member 740 (on the side opposite to the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730, that is, on the second displacement member 740 side). ) From the front base 720 (forward, right side in FIG. 47 (b)).

  On the other hand, in the state where the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted position, the second displacement member is attached to the base side engaging member 726 of the front base 720 as shown in FIG. Since the displacement-side engagement member 742 of 740 can be engaged, the direction in which the tip portion (second displacement member 740) opposite to the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 is separated from the front base 720 (front, Inclination to the right side of FIG. 47 (b) can be suppressed.

  Note that the displacement-side engagement member 742 may protrude from the back surface of the first displacement member 730. In this embodiment, the displacement-side engagement member 742 protrudes from the back surface of the second displacement member 740. Is done. Therefore, the engagement position between the base side engagement member 726 and the displacement side engagement member 742 can be set to a position away from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. This effectively tilts the tip portion (second displacement member 740) of the first displacement member 730 opposite to the rotation shaft 731 in a direction away from the front base 720 (forward, right side in FIG. 47 (b)). Can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the displacement-side engagement member 742 is formed on the second displacement member 740, the displacement-side engagement member 742 is positioned away from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. It becomes easy to be affected by shaking in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 47) of 730, and the positional relationship between the base-side engagement member 726 and the displacement-side engagement member 742 becomes unstable. Therefore, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracted position, it is difficult to engage the base side engagement member 726 and the displacement side engagement member 742.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement-side engagement member 742 has the second engagement surface as the engagement surface of the inner surface of the bent portion 742b moves from the distal end side to the proximal end side (base portion 742a side) of the bent portion 742b. The displacement member 740 is formed to be inclined in the direction approaching the back surface. Thereby, on the receiving side of the displacement-side engagement member 742 (the distal end side of the bent portion 742b, the upper side in FIG. 47A), the interval between the engagement surface and the back surface of the second displacement member 740 can be widened. Even when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracted position, even if shaking occurs, the base side engagement member 726 and the displacement side engagement member 742 can be easily engaged. .

  As described above, when the engagement of the base-side engagement member 726 and the displacement-side engagement member 742 is facilitated while the engagement is started, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are retracted. The second displacement member 740 is brought closer to the front base 720 side (left side in FIG. 47B) with the inclination of the engagement surface of the base side engagement member 742 (bending portion 742b) as it is displaced toward the front side. be able to.

  Thereby, in the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 separate their distal end portions (on the second displacement member 740 side) from the front base 720 with the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 as a fulcrum. In addition to suppressing tilting in the direction (forward, right side in FIG. 47 (b)), it is possible to suppress the projecting dimension of the second displacement member 740 from the front base 720 and to the front base 720 accompanying the tilt. Because of the proximity of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 as a whole with some elastic deformation, the front base of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 is utilized by utilizing the elastic recovery force. The backlash with respect to 720 can be suppressed, and the posture can be stably maintained in the stopped state.

  On the other hand, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 use the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 as a fulcrum and the front end portion (second displacement member 740 side) approaches the front base 720 (front). Inclination to the left of FIG. 47 (b) is allowed. In this case, the base-side engagement member 726 and the displacement-side engagement member 742 are plate-like bodies bent in a substantially U-shaped cross section, and the rear or front base of the second displacement member 740 is tilted when the tilt is performed. When it collides with the front of 720, it is denatured in the direction of bending, so there is a high risk of breakage.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the receiving recesses 727 and 743 for receiving the other bent portions 726b and 742b are recessed on the front surface of the front base 720 and the back surface of the second displacement member 740. 47 (c), the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are tilted in the direction approaching the front base 720 (forward, left side in FIG. 47 (b)). In doing so, the mating bent portions 726b and 742b can be received by the receiving recess portions 727 and 743, respectively. Thereby, breakage due to the collision between the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 can be suppressed.

  During the tilting, the back surface of the second connecting member 770 facing the front surface of the front base 720 collides with the entire surface in a face-to-face manner, reducing the surface pressure during the collision. (Dispersed). Therefore, damage can be suppressed.

  48A is a partially enlarged view of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 in the XLVIIIa portion of FIG. 45C, and FIG. 48B is the direction of the arrow XLVIIIb of FIG. 48A. It is a side view of the 1st displacement member 730 and the 2nd displacement member 740 in vision.

  As described above, when the left rotation unit 700 is shifted from the retracted position to the extended position, the first displacement member 730 extends and the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730. Is relatively displaced (rotated) around the rotation shaft 741 (see FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (c)).

  As shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), according to the present embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the overhanging position (FIG. 45 (c)). The engagement surface of the displacement-side engagement member 742 (bending portion 742b) is engaged with the engaged portion 735 of the first displacement member 730, whereby the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are engaged. Can be combined. Therefore, it can suppress that the 2nd displacement member 740 rattles with respect to the 1st displacement member 730 in an overhanging position.

  In particular, since the engaging surface of the displacement side engaging member 742 is inclined as described above, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are slightly elastically deformed by the inclination. They can be displaced in directions close to each other. Therefore, at the retracted position, rattling between the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be suppressed, and the posture can be stably maintained in the stopped state.

  In addition to engaging the displacement-side engagement member 742 with the base-side engagement member 726 of the front base 720 in the retracted position and coupling the second displacement member 740 to the front base 720, the displacement-side engagement member 742 has the first in the extended position. Since the second displacement member 740 can be combined with the first displacement member 730 by engaging with the engaged portion 735 of the first displacement member 730, the parts for these both roles are individually provided. It can be dispensed with, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the part cost can be reduced.

  Next, the winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 55. 49 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 65, and FIG. 50 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 65. 51 (a) is a front view of the winning device 65, FIG. 51 (b) is a rear view of the winning device 65, and FIG. 51 (c) is a top view of the winning device 65.

  52 (a) and 52 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning device 65 along the line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 51. FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b) are shown in FIG. 52 (a). FIG. 52 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning device 65 along the lines LIIIa-LIIIa and LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 52 (b).

  51, the opening / closing plate 860 is not shown, and in FIG. 53, the guide rib 813a is not shown. FIG. 52A shows a state in which the seesaw member 840 has formed the first state, and FIG. 52B shows a state in which the seesaw member 840 has formed the second state.

  As shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the winning device 65 includes a front base 810, an intermediate base 820 superimposed on the back side of the front base 810, and a back base 830 superimposed on the back side of the intermediate base 820. And a seesaw member 840 and a driven member 850 disposed between opposing surfaces of the front base 810 and the intermediate base 820, and an opening / closing plate 860 for opening and closing the winning opening 65a.

  The winning device 65 is formed in a box shape having an internal space by the front base 810, the front base 820, and the back base 830, and a guide passage through which a ball that has won a prize is guided and passed through the internal space. The weight of the game ball is applied to the seesaw member 840 when the game ball passes through the guide passage.

  The seesaw member 840 forms a first state where one end side (one end decorative portion 853) is lowered and the other end side (other end decorative portion 843) is raised in a state where the weight of the game ball is not applied (FIG. 52 (a)), when the weight of the game ball is applied to the other end side, a second state is formed in which the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered (see FIG. 52 (b)).

  That is, the winning device 65 uses the weight of the game ball passing through the guide passage to cause the seesaw member 840 to alternately appear in the first state and the second state, and one end side (one end decoration) of the seesaw member 840 is displayed. The body 853) and the other end side (the other end side decorative body 843) are formed to be executable.

  Here, as will be described later, the seesaw member 840 has a length dimension of the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 larger than the length dimension of the receiving surface 844 in the direction connecting the one end side and the other end side. The Therefore, when a plurality of balls pass continuously, the game balls stay on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846, and the second state is easily maintained. On the other hand, in this embodiment, even when a plurality of game balls pass continuously, the seesaw member 840 is prevented from remaining in the second state due to the weight of the game balls, and the first state and the second state It is comprised so that the production which makes it appear alternately can be performed reliably. Hereinafter, the configuration of the winning device 65 for performing such effects will be described.

  The front base 810 includes a front substrate 811 that forms a front surface thereof, a front first side wall 812 that protrudes from the back surface of the front substrate 811, a front second side wall 813, a front first bottom wall 814, and a front second bottom wall 815. And mainly.

  The front base 810 is provided with recessed portions 811a and 811b formed by notching the lower edge side thereof in parallel with each other at a predetermined interval in the width direction, and the seesaw member 840 is interposed through the recessed portions 811a and 811b. And a part (one end side decoration part 853 and the other end side decoration part 843) of the driven member 850 is exposed so that a player can visually recognize.

  The front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813 form a side wall of a guide passage that guides the game ball, and are disposed to face each other with a predetermined interval therebetween. The front first bottom wall 814 and the front second bottom wall 815 are portions that form the bottom wall of the guide passage, and are connected to the lower ends of the front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813, respectively.

  Between the front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813, the open portion on the upper end side thereof is a winning opening 65a, and the game ball flows into the guide passage from the open portion (winning port 65a). In this case, the front second side wall 813 is formed substantially vertically, while the front first side wall 812 and the front first bottom wall 814 are inclined downward toward the front second bottom wall 815 and the front first bottom wall 814 is inclined downward. The front second bottom wall 815 is disposed at a lower position than the wall 814. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the guide passage from the winning opening 65a can be guided to the front second bottom wall 815 by the downward inclination of the front first side wall 812 and the front first bottom wall 814.

  The front second bottom wall 815 is formed with a guide bottom surface 815a that is inclined downward toward the side away from the front substrate 811 (that is, the intermediate base 830 side). Therefore, the game ball guided to the front second bottom wall 815 rolls on the guide bottom surface 815a along its descending slope and is guided to the guide passage (receiving port 821b) of the intermediate base 830.

  The front second side wall 813 is provided with a plurality of guide ribs 813a (three in this embodiment). The guide rib 813a is formed in a shape in which the standing height from the front second side wall 813 is lowered as the guide rib 813a is separated from the front base 811, so that the standing tip surface is an inclined surface. As a result, for example, the game ball travels to the front second side wall 813 at a relatively high speed as a result of colliding with the front first side wall 812 and rebounding when it flows (falls) from the winning opening 65a into the guide passage. Even in this case, such a game ball can be smoothly guided toward the guide passage of the intermediate base 830 by the inclined surface of the standing end of the guide rib 813a.

  The intermediate base 820 includes an intermediate substrate 821 that faces the front substrate 811 of the front base 810 with a predetermined distance therebetween, an intermediate first side wall 822 that protrudes from the back surface of the intermediate substrate 821, an intermediate second side wall 823, and an intermediate bottom wall. 824.

  The intermediate substrate 821 is formed with an opening / closing plate opening / retreating port 821a, a receiving / receiving port 821b, a delivery / outlet port 821c, and a discharge port 821d. A support shaft 821e, a bearing 821f, The stopper portions 821g and 821h are projected.

  The opening / closing plate advancing / retreating port 821a of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for allowing the opening / closing plate 860 to advance / retreat, and the opening / closing plate 860 is advanced (protruded) toward the front base 810 from the opening / closing plate advancing / retreating port 821a. When the opening 65a is closed and the opening / closing plate 860 is retracted (retracted) to the opening / closing plate advance / retreat opening 821a, the winning opening 65a is opened.

  The reception opening 821b of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for receiving a game ball guided from the front second bottom wall 815 (guide bottom surface 815a) of the front base 810 in the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side. (Accepting bottom surface 821b1) is formed continuously to the guiding bottom surface 815a of the front second bottom wall 815.

  The outlet 821c of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for sending game balls from the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the bottom surface of the opening is a guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 described later. It is formed by. That is, the game ball that has passed through the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824, and is sent out to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 from the outlet 821c.

  The discharge port 821 d of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for receiving a game ball discharged from the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840, and the bottom surface of the opening is formed by the discharge bottom wall 825. The game ball discharged from the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and received in the discharge port 821d rolls on the discharge bottom wall 825 to a discharge passage (not shown) connected to the back side of the back base 830. Sent out.

  The support shaft 821e of the intermediate substrate 821 is a shaft-like body for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840, and is inserted into the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. The bearing 821f of the intermediate substrate 821 is a shaft hole for rotatably supporting the driven member 850, and the rotating shaft 851 of the driven member 850 is inserted therethrough.

  The stopper portions 821g and 821h of the intermediate substrate 821 are portions for contacting the lower surface of the seesaw member 840 to restrict the rotation of the seesaw member 840, and the stopper portion 821g is located on the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840. The stopper portion 821h is formed to be able to contact the lower surface (surface opposite to the receiving surface 844) of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction. Is done.

  The first state of the seesaw member 840 is formed by restricting the rotation of the seesaw member 840 by the stopper portion 821h (see FIG. 52A), and the second state is that the rotation of the seesaw member 840 is a stopper. It is formed by being regulated by the portion 821g (see FIG. 52 (b)).

  Here, as described above, the stopper portion 821g is formed at a position capable of contacting the lower surface of the seesaw member 840 opposite to the discharge surface 846, so that the discharge of the game ball can be stabilized. That is, when the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and the second state is formed by its weight, the stopper portion 821g supports the lower surface opposite to the discharge surface 846. For example, the stopper portion 821h Thus, compared with the case where the stopper portion 821g supports a position close to the support shaft 821e (for example, the lower surface opposite to the inclined surface 845), the seesaw member 840 can be prevented from shaking on the discharge surface 846 side. As a result, the discharge of game balls from the discharge surface 846 can be stabilized.

  The intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 form a side wall of a guide passage (passage for guiding a game ball received from the receiving port 821b to the delivery port 821c) on the intermediate base 820 side, and has a predetermined interval. They are arranged opposite to each other while being spaced apart. That is, the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 receive the game ball sent from the guide passage on the front base 810 side along the horizontal direction (FIG. 52 (a) left and right direction) from the receiving port 821b. The received game ball is guided toward the intermediate bottom wall 824 along a substantially vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52 (a)).

  The intermediate bottom wall 824 is a portion that forms the bottom wall of the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side, and is connected to the lower ends of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823, respectively. The intermediate bottom wall 824 is formed with a guide bottom surface 824a inclined downward toward the delivery port 821c side (that is, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840). The game ball guided in the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 and substantially horizontally (see FIG. 5) to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 via the outlet 821c. 52 (a) left and right direction).

  As described above, the intermediate base 820 side guide passage is provided with the intermediate bottom wall 824 (guide bottom surface 824a), and the game ball rolling on the guide bottom surface 824a is laterally transferred to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in a substantially horizontal direction. Since the guide balls are guided from the side, it is possible to guide the game balls one by one to the receiving surface 844 in order, and a plurality of games on the receiving surface 844 as in the case of dropping the game balls from above the receiving surface 844. It is possible to avoid the accumulation of balls. As a result, as will be described later, even if a plurality of game balls pass through the guide passage continuously, it is possible to easily switch the seesaw member 840 between the first state and the second state.

  Here, the extended length of the guide passage for guiding the game ball along the substantially horizontal direction toward the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side is twice the diameter of the game ball. It is preferable to set as follows. In the present embodiment, the horizontal distance L (see FIG. 52 (a)) from the extended tip of the guide bottom surface 824a to the back wall 831 described later of the back base 830 is set to 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball. Is done. As a result, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls pass through the guide passage continuously, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 at intervals.

  Moreover, the opposing space | interval of the intermediate | middle 1st side wall 822 and the intermediate | middle 2nd side wall 823 is set to the dimension equivalent to the diameter of a game ball. Therefore, since the position of the game ball can be defined between the opposing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823, the game ball that rolls off the guide bottom surface 824a and is sent out from the delivery port 821c is always the seesaw member 840. Can be received by the receiving surface 844 (guided to the same position of the receiving surface 844).

  In this case, the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 is formed such that, in the first state, the height position of the descending slope end is higher than the height position of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 ( (See FIG. 53 (a)). Thereby, as will be described later, the game ball can be smoothly guided from the guide bottom surface 824a to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the transition to the second state can be promptly performed.

  On the other hand, in the second state, the height position of the descending slope end is formed to be lower than the height position of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (see FIG. 53B). Accordingly, as described later, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 can be easily lowered by using a step formed between the guide bottom surface 824a and the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the first state is formed. Can be easier.

  The back base 830 mainly includes a back wall 831, a discharge side wall 832, and a discharge ceiling wall 833. The back wall 831 abuts on the back side end surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822, the intermediate second side wall 823, and the intermediate bottom wall 824 of the intermediate base body 820 (that is, covers the open part on the back side). It is a part and forms a wall (back wall) on the back side of the guide passage.

  The discharge side wall 832 and the discharge ceiling wall 833 are portions that form a side wall and a ceiling wall of a guide passage for guiding a game ball from the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 to the discharge passage (not shown), and the discharge port 821d It extends along the outer edge. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the guide passage taken in by the discharge bottom wall 825 of the intermediate base 820, the discharge side wall 832 and the discharge ceiling wall 833 of the rear base 830 is substantially the same as the shape of the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820. The Thereby, since the lateral width of the guide passage can be secured, a plurality of game balls can be smoothly guided. Further, even when the subsequent game ball collides with the previous game ball on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and jumps up, the subsequent game ball can be smoothly guided. Details will be described later.

  The seesaw member 840 includes a bearing 841 formed at a substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction, a connecting pin 842 formed at one end in the longitudinal direction, an other end decorative portion 843 formed at the other end in the longitudinal direction, and an upper surface. It mainly includes a receiving surface 844, an inclined surface 845, a discharge surface 846, and a claw portion 847 standing on the discharge surface 846.

  As described above, the bearing 841 is a hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 821e protruding from the intermediate substrate 821 of the intermediate base 820 is rotatably inserted, and the seesaw member is interposed via the support shaft 821e and the bearing 841. 840 is rotatably supported between the opposed surfaces of the front base 810 and the intermediate base 820.

  The connection pin 842 is an axial body having a circular cross section, and is slidably inserted into a connection groove 852 described later of the driven member 850. Thereby, the rotation of the seesaw member 840 can be transmitted to the driven member 850. That is, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated about the support shaft 821e as a rotation center, the connection pin 842 acts on the connection groove 852, so that rotation about the rotation shaft 851 of the driven member 850 can be formed. .

  The other end decorative portion 843 is a portion that is decorated with a design or the like on the front surface, and is exposed so as to be visible to the player via the recessed portion 811b of the front base 810 as described above.

  The receiving surface 844 is a flat surface-like portion that rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a in the guide passage of the intermediate base 820 and receives the game ball sent out from the outlet 821c, and the inclined surface 845 has the receiving surface 844 This is a flat surface portion for rolling the received game ball to the discharge surface 846.

  The receiving surface 844 and the inclined surface 845 do not depend on the rotational position of the seesaw member 840, that is, in a no-load state where the game ball is not placed on the seesaw member 840 (ie, the first state, see FIG. 52 (a)). ) Is formed in a shape having a downward slope toward the discharge surface 846. Therefore, in any state of the first state or the second state, the game ball received by the receiving surface 644 can be rolled from the receiving surface 644 and the inclined surface 643 toward the discharge surface 646.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the receiving surface 844 is located at one end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (left side in FIG. 52A) with respect to the shaft center of the bearing 841, so the second state (the other end side is lowered). When the receiving surface 844 receives a game ball in the state where the one end side is raised, see FIG. 52 (b)), the longitudinal one end side (receiving surface 844 side) is set by the weight of the received game ball. Can be lowered. As a result, as described later, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, the first state and the second state can be easily switched alternately.

  The discharge surface 846 is a flat surface-like portion for sending out (discharges) game balls from the seesaw member 840 to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820, and from the front base 810 side to the intermediate base 820 side (FIG. 52 (b)). It is formed so as to be inclined downward from the front side to the back side of the drawing. Therefore, when the game ball rolls to the discharge surface 846, the game ball can roll toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 by the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846.

  When the game ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, the claw portion 847 switches the rolling direction of the game ball to a direction toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820. And a guide surface 847a formed as an inclined surface for guiding the abutted game ball toward the discharge port 821d. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 can be easily flown into the discharge port 821d. Therefore, as described later, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state Can be switched smoothly.

  In this case, the claw portion 847 is formed on the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, and is arranged so as to be biased toward the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d) in the width direction of the seesaw member 840. Established. Thus, as described later, when the position of the game ball rolling on the exposed surface 846 varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (ie, , The time during which the second state is formed) can be made constant, and as a result, the alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly.

  The driven member 850 is provided with a rotary shaft 851 projecting from the back surface on the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the driven member 850, and juxtaposed below the rotary shaft 851 and has a long hole shape in front view on the back surface of the driven member 850. A connecting groove 852 that is recessed as a groove of the main body, and a one-end decorative portion 853 that is formed on the front surface of the driven member 850 and that is exposed to the player through the recessed portion 811b of the front base 810. Prepare for.

  As described above, the rotating shaft 851 is a shaft-like body that is rotatably inserted into the bearing 821f that protrudes from the intermediate substrate 821 of the intermediate base 820. The driven member 850 is interposed via the rotating shaft 851 and the bearing 821f. Is rotatably supported between the opposed surfaces of the front base 810 and the intermediate base 820.

  As described above, the connecting groove 852 is a concave groove through which the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840 is slidably inserted, and the connecting pin 842 is slid along the extending direction of the connecting groove 852. The driven member 850 is rotated with the rotation of the seesaw member 840.

  When the seesaw member 840 transitions from the first state to the second state, the inner wall surface of the connection groove 852 is pushed up by the connection pin 842 of the seesaw member 840, and the driven member 850 has the rotation shaft 851 as the rotation center as shown in FIG. (A) By rotating clockwise, the continuous follower member 850 (one-end decorative portion 853) is raised (see FIG. 52B). On the other hand, when the seesaw member 840 transitions from the second state to the first state, the inner wall surface of the connection groove 852 is pushed down by the connection pin 842 of the seesaw member 840, and the driven member 850 has the rotation shaft 851 as the center of rotation as shown in FIG. (A) The continuous follower member 850 (one-end decorative portion 853) is lowered by rotating clockwise (see FIG. 52A).

  In this embodiment, the link pin 842 of the seesaw member 840 is thus connected to the connection groove 852 of the driven member 850, and the link mechanism is configured to rotate the driven member 850 as the seesaw member 840 rotates. The link ratio of the link mechanism is set to a ratio that amplifies the rotation angle of the driven member 850 with respect to the rotation angle of the seesaw member 840. Thereby, the movable range of the driven member 850 (one end decoration part 853) can be expanded, and the production effect accompanying the displacement can be heightened.

  Here, since the seesaw member 840 is rotated using the weight of the game ball, the transition from the first state to the second state can be easily performed at a high speed and can be performed in a relatively short time. On the other hand, since the transition from the second state to the first state needs to rotate the seesaw member 840 only by its own weight, the operation becomes slow and time is increased. When a plurality of game balls pass through the guide passage continuously, in order to reliably switch the seesaw member 840 between the first state and the second state, the transition from the second state to the first state is performed. It is necessary to make this happen promptly.

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, the driven member 850 is connected to one end in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, and thus the external force that lowers the weight of the driven member 850 on one end in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 is used. (That is, it can be used as an auxiliary force for making a transition from the second state to the first state). Thereby, the time required for the transition from the second state to the first state can be shortened. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls pass through the guide passage continuously, the first of the seesaw member 840 can be reduced. It is possible to facilitate switching between the first state and the second state.

  Next, the operation of the winning device 65 will be described. When game balls flow into the guide passage on the front base 810 side from the winning opening 65a, the game balls are collected on the front second bottom wall 815 and roll on the guide bottom surface 815a of the front second bottom wall 815. By doing so, it is guided in a substantially horizontal direction (the right direction in FIGS. 53A and 53B), and flows into the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side from the receiving port 821b of the intermediate base 820.

  The game ball that has flowed into the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 has a substantially vertical direction between the opposing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 (downward direction in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b)). To reach the intermediate bottom wall 824. The guide direction of the game ball that has reached the intermediate bottom wall 824 is switched. That is, the game ball rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 and is guided in a substantially horizontal direction (left direction in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b)). It is sent out from the outlet 821c to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840.

  As shown in FIG. 52A, when the seesaw member 840 forming the first state receives a game ball on the receiving surface 844, the game ball rolls the receiving surface 844 and the inclined surface 845 toward the discharge surface 846. The seesaw member 840 is rotated by the weight of the game ball about the rotation shaft 841 in the clockwise direction in FIG. 52A (the other end in the longitudinal direction (the other end decoration portion 843 side) is lowered). As shown in 52 (b), the second state is formed. However, in FIG. 52 (b), the illustration of the game ball is omitted.

  When the game ball is discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 and the no-load state where the weight of the game ball is not applied to the seesaw member 840 is formed, the seesaw member 840 rotates the rotating shaft 841 by its own weight. 52 (b) is rotated counterclockwise as the center (the other end in the longitudinal direction (the other end decorative portion 843 side is raised), and the first state is formed as shown in FIG. 52 (a) ( The seesaw member 840 is returned to the first state).

  In this case, when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided to the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 is lowered in the second state (the other end in the longitudinal direction (the other end decoration portion 843 side) by the weight of the game ball. The first state and the second state cannot be switched alternately.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the seesaw member 840 has its receiving surface 844 positioned on one end side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 52 (b)) with respect to the rotating shaft 841, so that FIG. As shown, even when the seesaw member 840 forming the second state receives a game ball on its receiving surface 844, one end in the longitudinal direction can be lowered by the weight of the game ball supported by the receiving surface 844. That is, the seesaw member 840 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 52 (b) about the rotation shaft 841 (the other end in the longitudinal direction (the other end decoration portion 843 side is raised)), and is shown in FIG. 52 (b). The second state can be formed (easily formed). As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, the first state and the second state can be easily switched alternately.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the guide passage for guiding the game balls is formed in the internal space of the front base 810, the intermediate base 820, and the back base 830, so that a plurality of game balls can be received from the winning opening 65a. Even in the case of continuous inflow, a plurality of game balls can be stored using the guide passage, and the plurality of game balls can be sequentially guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. it can.

  However, even when a plurality of game balls are stored using the guide passage and the game balls are sequentially guided to the guide surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game balls are received by the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. In the form guided by dropping from above, the plurality of game balls are likely to be stacked on the receiving surface 844 and the rolling of the game balls from the receiving surface 844 to the inclined surface 845 is obstructed. It is impossible to alternately switch between the first state and the second state.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, a horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) having a guide bottom surface 824a that extends in a substantially horizontal direction and on which a game ball rolls is provided on the terminal end side (the delivery port 821b side) of the guide passage. ) And the game ball rolling on the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage is guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 from a substantially horizontal direction (FIG. 53 (a) and FIG. 5 (b) left and right direction). Can do. Thereby, it is possible to guide the game balls one by one in order from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the receiving surface 844 can receive the game balls one by one from the horizontal passage), and this is required. It can be avoided that a plurality of game balls are stacked on the receiving surface 844. Therefore, it is possible to easily switch the seesaw member 840 between the first state and the second state.

  In this case, as described above, the guide path on the side of the intermediate base 820 moves the game ball along the substantially vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 52 (a)) between the opposing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823. And a horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is connected to the downstream side thereof, and the extending length of the horizontal passage is made shorter than twice the diameter of the game ball. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are stored in the guide passage, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 while being spaced one by one.

  In other words, the extension length of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball (in this embodiment, from the extension tip of the guide bottom surface 824a to the back surface). The horizontal distance L of the base 830 to the back wall 831 to be described later is approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball), and there can be only one game ball in the horizontal passage. Since the extending direction of the horizontal passage is different from the extending direction of the upstream passage, when the sphere flows from the upstream passage to the horizontal passage, it is necessary to change the inflow direction. The amount of time required to flow into the horizontal passage can be increased by changing the direction.

  Therefore, when the previous game ball existing in the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball (next game ball) after the upstream passage is changed in direction. It takes time to flow into the horizontal passage, and the subsequent game ball is guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. That is, the later game ball is spaced from the previous game ball. As a result, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 one by one while being spaced apart.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 (b) and 53 (b), the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is above the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) in the second state. Therefore, a step in the height direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 53 (b)) can be formed between the receiving surface 844 and the guide bottom surface 824a. Thus, in the second state, when the game ball is guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 by rolling the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage, the game ball rides on the receiving surface 844 (collision with a step). It is possible to make the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 easy to be lowered (moved downward in FIG. 53 (b)) by using this riding operation (collision). That is, the longitudinal end of the seesaw member 840 can be easily lowered, and the first state can be easily formed. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, The state and the second state can be easily switched alternately.

  On the other hand, when the seesaw member 840 forms the first state (see FIGS. 52 (a) and 53 (a)), the seesaw member 840 is in an unloaded state and the guide bottom surface of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824). The game ball guided from 824a and received by the receiving surface 844 is quickly rolled to the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 side, and the weight of the game ball is applied to the other end in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840. Lowering (forming the second state) is required.

  In this case, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is, as shown in FIGS. 52 (a) and 53 (a), from the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) in the first state. Therefore, it is not necessary for the game ball to ride on the receiving surface 844 (collision with a step) as in the case of the second state described above, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a time lag due to such an operation. Therefore, the second ball can be easily formed by quickly rolling the game ball from the receiving surface 844 to the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 side.

  In the first state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is formed so as to be at the same height position (position that is flush) with the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824). It is preferable to do. When the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is located below the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage, the game ball is bounced from the guide bottom surface 824a to the receiving surface 844. This is because a time lag occurs and the load on the rotating shaft 841 of the seesaw member 840 increases due to the impact of dropping, and these can be eliminated at the same height position.

  Next, the claw portion 847 of the seesaw member 840 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the winning device 65 taken along the line LIV-LIV in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the seesaw member 840 has a claw portion 847 standing from its discharge surface 846. The nail | claw part 847 is provided with the guide surface 847a formed so that it may incline so that it may approach to the discharge port 821d as it goes to the other end decoration part 843 side from the inclined surface 825 side. Accordingly, when the game ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 toward the other end decorative portion 843 side (right side in FIG. 54) along the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 54) of the seesaw member 840, the game ball Can be brought into contact with the guide surface 847a of the claw portion 847, and the rolling direction can be switched to the direction toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 (upward in FIG. 54). The time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened, and as a result, the first state and the second state can be switched alternately. It can be performed smoothly.

  In this case, as described above, the claw portion 847 is the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (the other end decoration portion 843 side, the right side in FIG. 54) on the discharge surface 846 and the width direction of the seesaw member 840 ( 54 (vertical direction in FIG. 54), it is biased toward the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the lower side in FIG. 54). Thus, when the position of the game ball rolling on the exposed surface 846 varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (ie, the second state is Forming time) can be made constant, and as a result, the alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly.

  That is, in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 (the vertical direction in FIG. 54), the game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the front base 810 (on the opposite side to the discharge port 821d, the lower side in FIG. 54) The game ball that rolls on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the intermediate base 820 (the side close to the discharge port 821d, the upper side in FIG. 54) has a short distance to the discharge port 821d.

  Therefore, the claw portion 847 is disposed so as to be biased toward the side close to the front base 810 in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the lower side in FIG. 54), thereby approaching the front base 810. The former game ball that rolls on the discharge surface 846 on the side (the lower side in FIG. 54) collides with the guide surface 847a of the claw portion 847 at an early stage, and is discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d. With respect to the latter game ball that rolls on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to 820 (the upper side in FIG. 54), the collision of the claw portion 847 with the guide surface 847a can be delayed or prevented from colliding. Thereby, in each of the former and the latter, the total time that the game ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 can be made close to each other. As a result, even when the position where the game ball rolls varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the weight of the game ball acts on the discharge surface 846 can be easily made constant.

  Next, the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 will be described with reference to FIG. 55 is a schematic rear view of the winning device 65. FIG. 55 (a) shows the first state shown in FIG. 52 (a), and FIG. 55 (b) shows the second state shown in FIG. 52 (b). Respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), the horizontal width dimension of the discharge port 821d (the horizontal dimension in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b)) is more than twice the diameter of the game ball. A large dimension (approximately 2.5 times in this embodiment) is set. Thereby, in a state where the previous game ball exists on the other longitudinal end of the seesaw member 840 (the left side in FIGS. 55A and 55B), the next game ball is further moved to the other longitudinal end. Each of these game balls can smoothly flow into the discharge port 821d even when it is rolled in the direction.

  For example, a later game ball collides with a previous game ball that rolls on the discharge surface 846, and the subsequent game ball is rebounded in the direction opposite to the rolling direction (that is, the distance between the two game balls (FIG. 55). (A) and the horizontal interval in FIG. 55 (b) are enlarged in the width direction of the discharge port 821d), even when these game balls are discharged to the discharge port 821d, the width of the discharge port 821 is sufficient. Each of them can be smoothly flowed in.

  The height dimension of the discharge port 821d (the vertical dimension in FIGS. 55A and 55B) is higher on the inclined surface 845 side than on the discharge surface 846 side of the seesaw member 840. Is set to a larger dimension. Also in this state, in the state where the previous game ball is present on the other longitudinal side of the seesaw member 840 (the left side in FIGS. 55A and 55B), the next game ball is further moved in the longitudinal direction on the other side. Each of these game balls can smoothly flow into the discharge port 821d even when it is rolled toward the.

  That is, the following game ball collides with the previous game ball that rolls on the discharge surface 846, and the subsequent game ball is bounced upward, or is bounced back to the opposite side of the rolling direction and is inclined. Even when the ball is splashed upward at 845, the subsequent game ball can be smoothly flowed into the discharge port 821 using the height dimension of the discharge port 821d on the inclined surface 845 side. On the other hand, even if the previous game ball collides with the subsequent game ball, it is difficult to jump up, so the space required for the discharge port 821d can be reduced by keeping the height of the discharge port 821d on the discharge surface 846 side low. Therefore, it is possible to secure a space for disposing another member.

  Next, the game area will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60. 56 and 57 are partially enlarged views of the game board 13 in which the LVI portion of FIG. 2 is partially enlarged. FIG. 57 shows a state where the center frame 86 is removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 assembled with nails, a windmill, an inner rail 61, an outer rail 62, various winning holes (see FIG. 2), a center frame 86, and the like. As described above, the area on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the inner rail 12 is a game area (an area where nails, winning holes, etc. are arranged and a shot ball flows down). The

  The game board 13 has an opening formed in the center so that the third symbol display device 81 as a display device can be visually recognized. In this case, conventionally, the opening device of the game board 13 is made larger than the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81, and an effect device that is displaceably disposed on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60). A region that can be visually recognized is being secured. However, since it is necessary to secure an area for the ball to flow down, there is a limit to increasing the opening of the game board 13.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the center frame 86 that is housed in the opening of the game board 13 (the opening 60a of the base plate 60) is formed from a light transmissive material, and a part of the center frame 86 (hereinafter referred to as the center frame 86). (Referred to as “region forming portion R”) forms part of the gaming region. Thereby, it is possible to visually recognize the effect device (in the present embodiment, the left rotation unit 700) through the region forming portion R of the center frame 86 (through the watermark). Therefore, the area where the left rotation unit 700 can be visually recognized can be enlarged while securing the area for the sphere to flow down. However, in FIG. 56, in order to simplify the drawing, the illustration of the left rotation unit 700 viewed through the region forming portion R is omitted.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the opening of the game board 13 (the opening 60a of the base plate 60) is formed so that the inner edge thereof reaches the outer edge of the game area (that is, the inner rail 61). The area where the effect device (left rotation unit 700) can be visually recognized can be ensured through the area forming portion R of 86.

  On the other hand, the width of the region forming portion R of the center frame 86 is set to a size that allows only one game ball to pass through. The area in which the effect device (the left rotation unit 700) can be directly visually recognized can be secured to the maximum extent without using the portion R.

  Hereinafter, the detailed configuration of the region forming portion R in the center frame 86 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 is a front perspective view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 59 is a front view of the region forming portion R. FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the region forming portion R taken along line LX-LX in FIG. In FIG. 60, the left rotation unit 700 is schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the center frame 86 has a frame plate base portion 910 formed in a frame shape when viewed from the front, and an inner portion that is erected from the back surface of the frame plate base portion 910 and is fitted into the opening 60a of the base plate 60. It mainly includes a fitting wall portion 920 and an inner edge defining wall portion 930 that stands from the front surface of the frame base portion 910 that is opposite to the inner fitting wall portion 920 and defines the inner edge of the game area.

  The frame plate base portion 910 is a portion that is superimposed on the front surface of the base plate 60, and the front surface side is a region where the game ball flows down. The frame base 910 is provided with a plurality of insertion holes 911 through which tapping screws for fastening and fixing the center frame 86 to the base plate 60 are inserted. Further, the outer edge of the frame plate base 910 is formed to be inclined downward so as to be smoothly connected to the front surface of the base plate 60. By this inclination, the rolling of the game ball can be made smooth.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, the columnar portion 940, the side wall portion 950, and the downstream wall portion 960 are erected from the front surface of the frame base 910 in the region forming portion R of the center frame 86.

  The columnar portion 940 is formed as a columnar body having a substantially rhombic cross section, and is disposed at an intermediate position between the inner rail 61 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930 (see FIG. 56). Thereby, in the upstream portion of the region forming portion R, the first path M1 is partitioned between the columnar body 940 and the inner rail 61, and the second path is formed between the columnar body 940 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930. M2 is partitioned.

  The side wall portion 950 is formed as a wall portion arranged in parallel with the inner rail 61 on the downstream side of the columnar body 940, and divides the third path M3 with the inner edge defining wall portion 930. In this case, the inner edge defining wall portion 930 is closer to the inner rail 61 side than the portion facing the columnar body 940 at the portion facing the side wall portion 950.

  Accordingly, the downstream side of the second path M2 is formed to be bent toward the inner rail 61 side (side wall portion 450 side). On the other hand, since the first path M1 and the third path M3 are paths formed along the inner rail 61, they are connected to each other in a substantially straight line. In addition, the first route M1 and the third route M3 are formed as linear routes that cause the sphere to flow down in an inclined direction in a front view.

  A concave groove 971 is formed in the front surface of the frame base 910. The concave groove 971 is a part for suppressing the flow velocity of the game ball, is formed as a concave part having an inverted triangular cross section, and is repeatedly bent left and right in a saw blade shape when viewed from the front, while the first path M1 and the first path It extends along the route direction of the three routes M3.

  Protrusions 972 project from the opposing surfaces of the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930. The protrusion 972 is a part for suppressing the flow speed of the game ball, is formed in a substantially semicircular cross section, and extends along the standing direction of the both wall portions 930 and 950. Each of the protrusions 972 is disposed at a position shifted in phase from the bent portion of the concave groove 971 along the path direction of the third path M3.

  The downstream wall portion 960 is formed as a wall portion connected to the downstream side end portion of the side wall portion 950, and faces the downstream side of the third path M3. Specifically, it is formed as a wall portion substantially orthogonal to the flow direction of the third path M3. In this case, the inner edge defining wall portion 930 has a portion corresponding to the downstream wall portion 940 formed along the downstream wall portion 960, whereby the fourth portion is formed between the inner edge defining wall portion 930 and the downstream wall portion 940. A route M4 is partitioned.

  The width dimension of the first path M1 (opposite distance between the inner rail 61 and the columnar body 640), the width dimension of the second path M2 (opposite distance between the columnar body 640 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930), and the width of the third path M3. Only one game ball can pass through the dimension (opposite distance between the side wall part 950 and the inner edge defining wall part 930) and the width dimension of the fourth path M4 (opposite distance between the downstream wall part 960 and the inner edge defining wall part 930). Each width is set. In this embodiment, it is set to approximately 1.2 times the diameter of the game ball.

  Next, the action of the region forming portion R formed in this way on the flowing down game ball will be described. The game balls guided by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 and flowing down from the upper area of the game area are bounced back to the nail or rolled along the inner edge defining wall portion 930, and then the first path M1 or the second path. It flows into the region forming part R from either of the two paths M2. A game ball passing through the first route M1 or the second route M2 and flowing down the third route M3 collides with the downstream wall portion 960, and flows down to the lower region of the game region via the fourth route M4.

  Here, since the region forming portion R is a part of the center frame 86 and is formed from a resin material, a nail cannot be implanted. For this reason, the flow speed of the game ball cannot be reduced, and it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the region forming portion R, the downstream wall portion 960 is erected on the downstream side of the third path M3 (the merged portion of the third path M3 and the fourth path M4). The falling velocity of the game ball can be reduced by the collision with the downstream wall portion 960, so that the player can easily see the game ball flowing down.

  In this case, since the downstream wall portion 960 is erected from the frame plate substrate 910, that is, formed integrally with the center frame 86, the downstream wall portion 960 can be easily formed by resin molding using a mold. There is no need to perform a complicated operation such as forming the frame as a separate part and fastening the frame to the frame plate substrate 910. Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

  On the other hand, when the third path M3 is formed in a straight line and the flow velocity of the game ball is relatively high, the downstream wall portion 960 formed of a resin material bears a portion where the game ball repeatedly collides. There is a risk of damage. On the other hand, since the downstream wall part 960 is connected with the downstream side of the side wall part 950, the rigidity of the downstream wall part 960 can be improved and the damage of the downstream wall part 960 can be suppressed.

  In this case, an inclined surface 961 that is inclined toward the fourth path M4 is formed at a connection portion between the side wall portion 950 and the downstream wall portion 960. Thereby, since the connection part of the side wall part 950 and the downstream wall part 960 can be made into a front view triangular shape as shown in FIG. 59, the rigidity of the downstream wall part 960 can be improved by that much.

  In addition, when the game ball that has flowed down the third path M3 collides with the downstream wall 960 after colliding with the inclined surface 961, it can be prevented that the game ball bounces in the direction of flowing backward through the third path M3. , It can be made to flow down toward the exit of the 3rd course M3, reducing the flow down speed. Thereby, while being able to guide a game ball smoothly to the 4th path | route M4, the burden of the downstream wall part 960 can be reduced. Therefore, the damage of the downstream wall part 960 can be suppressed also from this point.

  The side wall portion 950 is also a part formed integrally with the center frame 86, and can be easily formed by resin molding using a mold. Therefore, as with the downstream wall portion 960, the side wall portion 950 is formed as a separate part. There is no need to perform complicated operations such as fastening and fixing to the frame plate substrate 910, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. Moreover, since the side wall part 950 that functions to partition the third path M3 can also be used for the role of increasing the rigidity of the downstream wall part 960, the structure can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. Can do.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the manner in which the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the inner rail 61 is that after colliding with the nail and jumping, the speed is relatively slow. It was difficult to cause damage to the inner rail 61.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, an area in which the effect device (the left rotation unit 700) can be directly visually recognized through the opening of the center frame 86 (that is, without the area forming portion R). In order to ensure the maximum, the width of the region forming portion R is set to a narrow dimension (in this embodiment, the third path M3 is a width dimension that allows only 1 game ball to pass through 1). That is, the width of the game area is narrowed by the area forming portion R. Therefore, it is necessary to greatly change the flow direction of the game ball that has flowed down the game area on the upstream side of the area forming portion R (in the present embodiment, it is necessary to form the second path M2). In this form, a part of the game balls (game balls flowing down the second path M2) collide with the inner rail 61 at a relatively high speed, which may cause damage to the inner rail 61 (bending due to the collision). .

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the side wall portion 750 is juxtaposed with the inner rail 61, the game ball flowing down the second path M2 is received by the side wall portion 950 and collides with the inner rail 61. Can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of damage (bending due to collision) in the inner rail 61.

  That is, it is conceivable that the side wall 750 is not formed and the inner rail 61 is also used to partition the third path M3. In this case, it is necessary to avoid collision of the game ball with the inner rail 61. Therefore, on the upstream side of the region forming portion R, the width cannot be reduced, and the opening portion (inner edge defining wall portion 930) of the center frame 86 must be disposed in a direction away from the inner rail 61. Therefore, the area where the rendering device (left rotation unit 700) can be directly visually recognized is reduced accordingly. Therefore, the present embodiment in which the side wall portion 750 is arranged side by side with the inner rail 61 results in maximizing a region where the effect device (the left rotation unit 700) can be directly visually recognized.

  As described above, the side wall portion 750 is integrally formed as a part of the center frame 86 made of a light transmissive material, so that the light emitting body on the back side of the center frame 86 (side wall portion 950, concave groove 971, etc.) It can function as a light guide that guides the emitted light P to the game area. For example, the light P emitted from the back side and introduced into the side wall portion 950 is guided to the standing end surface (upper surface in FIG. 60) of the side wall portion 950 and irradiated from the standing end surface. In addition to exhibiting the effect of the light P, the light P guided to the side surface of the side wall portion 950 (the surface facing the inner edge defining wall portion 930) is irradiated from the side surface of the side wall portion 950. can do. Thereby, the light is guided to the front surface (upper side surface in FIG. 60) of the frame plate base portion 910 and the side surface of the inner edge defining wall portion 930 (the surface facing the side wall portion 950), and together with the light P irradiated from the upper surface or side surface, An effect of light P that shines in a region where the ball rolls (the game ball when the game ball rolls) can be exhibited.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the side wall portion 950 is juxtaposed with the inner rail 61, the light P emitted from the back side of the center frame 86 and introduced into the side wall portion 750 is the inner rail 61 side (inner edge defining wall). The leakage from the side surface on the side opposite to the portion 930 to the outside can be reduced by the inner rail 61. That is, the inner rail 61 can reflect the light P toward the standing end surface or the side surface (the side surface facing the inner edge defining wall portion 930). Therefore, the light quantity which can be irradiated from the standing end surface or side surface of the side wall part 950 can be increased, and as a result, the effect by the guided light P can be enhanced.

  The light emitter is disposed in the left rotation unit 700 (not shown), and the retracted position of the left rotation unit 700 is the back surface of the region forming portion R. Therefore, in a state where the left rotation unit 700 is disposed at the retracted position, the left rotation unit 700 can be visually recognized through the region forming portion R, and the light P emitted from the light emitter is guided through the side wall portion 950. It can be made to be visually recognized by the player. That is, the shape of the left rotation unit 700 visually recognized through the region forming portion R and the light P irradiated from the standing end surface of the side wall portion 950 can be associated with each other, and can be visually recognized by the player. The effect of the light P can be enhanced.

  Here, as described above, the protrusions 972 protrude from the opposing surfaces of the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the third path M3 can collide with the protrusion 972, and the flow down can be inhibited. Thereby, in the area | region formation part R which cannot plant a nail, the flow-down speed of a game ball can be made slow and it can make it easy for a player to visually recognize the game ball which flows down.

  In this case, the protrusion 972 protruding from the side wall portion 950 and the protrusion 972 protruding from the inner edge defining wall portion 930 are disposed with a phase shift along the path direction of the third path M3. That is, they are arranged in a staggered manner on the left and right opposing surfaces. Therefore, when a game ball flows down on the third path M3, the game ball can collide with the left and right protrusions 972 alternately to meander the game ball left and right. As a result, the flow velocity of the game ball can be easily reduced, and a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the flow direction (the direction of the third path M3) is imparted to the game ball to change the movement of the game ball. Can do.

  Further, a concave groove 971 formed in a saw-tooth shape in front view is provided in the front surface of the frame base 910 as described above. Therefore, when a game ball flows down on the third path M3, the game ball can be guided along the inner surface of the concave groove 971 and meandered left and right. Therefore, this also makes it easy to slow down the flow velocity of the game ball, and also gives the game ball a displacement component in a direction perpendicular to the flow direction (the path direction of the third path M3) to change the movement of the game ball. Can be given.

  In addition, when light emitted from the back side of the region forming portion R is guided toward the front surface of the game region, the light is diffused or collected in the concave groove 971 formed in the front surface of the frame base 910. Since it can be used as a lens that causes light to be emitted, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light that is guided.

  In this case, the bent portion of the concave groove 971 is phased along the path direction of the third path M3 with respect to the protrusion 972 protruding from the side wall part 950 and the protrusion 972 protruding from the inner edge defining wall part 930. Are arranged to be shifted. Therefore, when the game ball flows down on the third path M3, the game ball guided to the inner surface of the concave groove 971 and meandering right and left can be easily caused to collide with the left and right protrusions 972 alternately. A synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action by 971 and the action by the protrusion 972. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball can be easily made slower, and the change in the movement of the game ball can be made larger.

  The protrusions 972 and the concave grooves 971 slow down the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the third path M3, so that the damage to the downstream wall portion 960 is suppressed and the game from the third path M3 to the fourth path M4 is performed. Contributes to smooth guidance of the sphere.

  Further, the end side of the concave groove 971 (the portion arranged in parallel with the inclined surface 961) has its extending direction overlapped with the downstream wall portion 960 and directed to the outlet of the third path M <b> 3. Thereby, the game ball guided to the terminal end side of the concave groove 971 can collide with the downstream wall portion 960 from an oblique direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing in the direction of flowing backward through the third path M3, and to flow down toward the exit of the third path M3 while reducing the flow down speed. Thereby, while being able to guide a game ball smoothly to the 4th path | route M4, the burden of the downstream wall part 960 can be reduced.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 61, in the gaming board 2013 in the second embodiment, the formation range of the area forming portion R is expanded to substantially the uppermost part of the gaming area compared to the gaming board 13 in the first embodiment. As a result, the rendering device (in the present embodiment, the central rotation unit 400, the central rotation unit 500, and the left rotation unit 700) is directly connected through the opening of the center frame 2086 (that is, without the region forming portion R). The visually recognizable area can be further expanded as compared with the first embodiment.

  In the region forming member R, the formation of the columnar body 940 (see FIG. 59) is omitted, and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 is extended along the outer rail 62. As a result, the fifth path M5 and the sixth path M6 are defined between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall 2930 in a region above the return ball preventing member 68.

  Note that the facing distance between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall 2930 is set to a dimension that is larger than twice the diameter of the game ball and smaller than three times. In this embodiment, it is set to approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball. Thus, a path (the fifth path M5 and the sixth path M6) can be formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 so that the game balls can pass without colliding with each other. It is possible to secure the above-described region where the effect device can be directly visually recognized through the opening.

  Further, the wind turbine WM has a rotational axis disposed substantially at the center between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall 2930. Thereby, the game balls can pass between the outer rail 62 and the rotating shaft of the windmill WM, and between the rotating shaft of the windmill WM and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930, respectively.

  According to the region forming portion R formed in this way, the game balls launched from the ball launch unit and guided to the upper region of the game region by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 are guided along the outer rail 62. Thus, after passing through the windmill WM, the fifth path M5 is moved. In this case, by setting the firing strength to a value larger than the reference value, the game ball can flow down to the right region beyond the top of the gaming region, while the firing strength is set to a value smaller than the reference value. Thus, the game ball can flow down (move the sixth path M6) along the inner edge defining wall 2930 without exceeding the upper top of the game area. The game ball that has moved along the sixth path M6 flows down to the third path M3 after passing through the windmill WM.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the right rotation unit 600 of the first embodiment, the case where the two members of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 (the connecting displacement member 642) can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the transmission member 654 will be described. However, the right rotation unit 3600 according to the third embodiment includes three members, a first displacement member 3630, a second displacement member 3640 (connection displacement member 642), and a third displacement member 3660 in accordance with the displacement of the transmission member 654. Can be displaced. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 3600. 62 and 63 show a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 3600 (the rear base 610 and the front base 620) is assembled.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the right rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment includes a third displacement member 3660 that is slidably disposed on the front surface of one end side (upper side of FIG. 62) of the first displacement member 3630. Prepare. As will be described later, the tip of the connecting pin 3641d of the second displacement member 3640 (driven member 3641) is slidable by the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 through the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 3630. The third displacement member 3660 can be displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630 (slide displacement) by the relative rotation of the driven member 3641 with respect to the first displacement member 3630. .

  The through-groove 3636 is a groove-like opening formed by being curved in an arc shape with the support shaft 632 as the center, and the groove width is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641. Is done. Therefore, when the connecting pin 3641d is displaced along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the driven member 3641 is allowed to rotate around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 3630.

  The connecting pin 3641d is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section that is inserted into the through groove 3636, and the protruding height thereof is set to a dimension that can protrude from the front surface of the first displacement member 3630. That is, in the assembled state, the distal end side of the connecting pin 3641d can be inserted into a slide groove 3661 described later of the third displacement member 3660 through the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 3630.

  A sliding groove 3661 is recessed on the back surface of the third displacement member 3660, and a slide rail 3661 is disposed above the sliding groove 3661. As described above, the sliding groove 3661 is a concave groove through which the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is slidably inserted, and is formed linearly with a constant groove width. The dimension is set slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641.

  The slide rail 3662 is a telescopic linear guide mechanism interposed between the first displacement member 3630 and the third displacement member 3660. The back rail is fixed to the first displacement member 3630, and the back side thereof. The front side rail is connected to the front side of the rail so that relative displacement in the longitudinal direction is possible. The third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 by the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 3662 due to the relative displacement in the longitudinal direction of the back-side rail and the front-side rail.

  In a state where the third displacement member 3660 is disposed on the front side of the first displacement member 3630, only a part of the sliding groove 3661 is overlaid on the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 3630 (the sliding groove 3661 and The through groove 3636 is crossed). Therefore, the driven member 3641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 3630, and the connection pin 3641d is displaced along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, so that the connection pin 3641d is moved to the third displacement member. The third displacement member 3660 can be slid relative to the first displacement member 3630 by acting on the inner wall surface of the slide groove 3661 of 3660 (pressing the inner wall surface of the slide groove 3661 by the connecting pin 3641d).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67, the operation of the right rotation unit 3600 will be described. 64 and 65 are front views of the right rotation unit 3600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 66 and 67 operate between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit 3600 in each state at the time of doing.

  FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (c) are FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (c), and FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c) are FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (c). c) and the same state. In this case, FIG. 64C is the same as FIG. 65A, and FIG. 66C is the same as FIG. 67A.

  Here, in the third embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 3630, whereby the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640, and the third displacement member. When 3660 is displaced, the displacement modes of the first displacement member 3630 and the second displacement member 3640 are the same as in the case of the first embodiment described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a), in the retracted position, the slide rail 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 is shortened, and the connecting pin of the driven member 3641 in the second displacement member 3640 3641d is positioned on one end side of the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 (the end portion on the side far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, the right side in FIG. 66 (a)). In this case, the length from the proximal end of the first displacement member 3630 to the distal end of the third displacement member 3660 is the dimension h1.

  From this state, when the transmission member 654 is driven to rotate in the forward direction (FIG. 66 (a) clockwise), the state shown in FIG. 64 (b) and FIG. As shown in 66 (c), the first displacement member 3630 is rotated in the extending direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630 but is displaced together with the first displacement member 3630.

  Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the third displacement member 3660. Accordingly, since the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 in the second displacement member 3640 does not slide in the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660, the third displacement member 3660 is also integrated with the first displacement member 3630. Displaced. That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 64A to 64C and 66A to 66C, the length from the proximal end of the first displacement member 3630 to the distal end of the third displacement member 3660 is shown. Is maintained as dimension h1.

  When the transmission member 654 is driven to rotate in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 67 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 67 (a), the first displacement member 3630 is moved to FIG. 67 (a). While maintaining the state (position) shown, the second displacement member 3640 (connection displacement member 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630, and the states shown in FIGS. 65 (b) and 67 (b) are obtained. After passing, it arrange | positions in the overhang | projection position shown in FIG.65 (c) and FIG.67 (c).

  In this case, when the driven member 3641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 3641 causes the connecting pin 3641d to move the other end side of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (support shaft). It is set as the rotation of the direction (FIG. 67 (a) counterclockwise) made to slide toward the edge part near 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, FIG. 67 (a) left side).

  Therefore, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the inner wall surface far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, the upper side in FIG. 67 (a)) is connected by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641. The slide rail 3662 (see FIG. 63) is pushed up in the extending direction. As a result, the third displacement member 3660 is slid relative to the first displacement member 3630, and in the sections shown in FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c) and FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (c), The length from the proximal end of the first displacement member 3630 to the distal end of the third displacement member 3660 is changed (increased) from the dimension h1 to the dimension h3 via the dimension h2 (h1 <h2 <h3).

  Contrary to the case described above, when the transmission member 654 is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 67 (c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 65 (c) and 67 (c), the first displacement is detected. While the member 3630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 67 (c), the second displacement member 3640 (connection displacement member 642) is relatively displaced in the opposite direction with respect to the first displacement member 3630, and FIG. After the state shown in (b) and FIG. 67 (b), it is arranged in the state shown in FIG. 65 (a) and FIG. 67 (a).

  In this case, the rotation of the driven member 3641 around the support shaft 632 causes the connecting pin 3641d to move to one end side of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the end far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a). , In the direction of sliding in FIG. 67 (c) right) (FIG. 67 (c) clockwise).

  Therefore, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the inner wall surface closer to the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, the lower side in FIG. 67C) is connected by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641. Since the slide rail 3662 (see FIG. 63) is pushed down in the direction of shortening, the third displacement member 3660 is slid relative to the first displacement member 3630 and the third displacement member 3660 is displaced from the base end of the first displacement member 3630. The length to the tip is reduced to the dimension h1.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 66 (c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 64 (c) and 66 (c), the first displacement member 3630 moves the rotation shaft 631. It is rotated in the standing direction as a rotating shaft, and is arranged at the retracted position shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630, so that the connecting pin 3641 d of the driven member 3641 is moved to the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660. Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are displaced together with the first displacement member 3630.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630, and the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640, and The configuration in which the third displacement member 3660 is integrally displaced (see FIGS. 64 and 66), and the second displacement member 3640 and the first displacement member 3630 with respect to the first displacement member 3630 while maintaining the first displacement member 3630 in a stopped state. The third displacement member 3660 can be individually displaced relative to each other (see FIGS. 65 and 67).

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment, the case where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the third displacement member 3660 is slidably displaceable with respect to the first displacement member 3630 has been described, but the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment is The third displacement member 4660 is rotatable with respect to the first displacement member 4630. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  68 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 69 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 4600. 68 and 69 show a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 4600 (the rear base 610 and the front base 620) is assembled.

  As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment includes a third displacement member 4660 rotatably supported on the front surface of one end side (upper side of FIG. 68) of the first displacement member 4630. . As will be described later, the distal end of the connecting pin 3641d of the second displacement member 3640 (driven member 3641) is slidable groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660 through the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 4630. The third displacement member 4660 can be relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to the first displacement member 4630 by the relative rotation of the driven member 3641 with respect to the first displacement member 4630.

  A sliding groove 4661 is recessed on the back surface of the third displacement member 4660, and a rotating shaft 4661 protrudes above the sliding groove 4661. As described above, the sliding groove 4661 is a concave groove through which the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is slidably inserted, and is formed linearly with a constant groove width. The dimension is set slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641.

  The rotation shaft 4661 is a shaft-like body that is inserted into a shaft support hole 4737 that is drilled on one end side (the upper side in FIG. 68) of the first displacement member 4630, and through the rotation shaft 4462 and the shaft support hole 4637, The third displacement member 4660 is rotatably supported by the first displacement member 4630. Note that the holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 4637 is fastened and fixed to the end surface in the axial direction of the rotation shaft 4462, thereby restricting the rotation shaft 4662 from coming out of the shaft support hole 4637.

  In a state where the third displacement member 4660 is disposed (axially supported) on the front side of the first displacement member 4630, only a part of the sliding groove 4661 is overlaid on the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 4630 (sliding). The moving groove 4661 intersects with the through groove 3636). Therefore, the driven member 3641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 4630, and the connection pin 3641d is displaced along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, so that the connection pin 3641d is moved to the third displacement member. The third displacement member 4660 can be rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630 by acting on the inner wall surface of the slide groove 4661 of 4660 (pressing the inner wall surface of the slide groove 4661 by the connecting pin 3641d).

  Next, the operation of the right rotation unit 4600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 are front views of the right rotation unit 4600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 72 and 73 operate between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit 4600 in each state at the time of doing.

  70 (a) to 70 (c) are illustrated in FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (c), and FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (c) are illustrated in FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (c). c) and the same state. In this case, FIG. 70C is the same as FIG. 71A, and FIG. 72C is the same as FIG. 73A.

  Here, in the fourth embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 4630, whereby the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 3640, and the third displacement member. When 4660 is displaced, the displacement modes of the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 3640 are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 72 (a), in the retracted position, an imaginary line L1 that passes through the axial center of the shaft support hole 4737 (rotary shaft 4661) and extends in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 4630, The angle formed by the imaginary line L2 that passes through the axial center of the shaft support hole 4637 (rotary shaft 4661) and extends along the longitudinal direction of the third displacement member 4660 is the intersection angle θ1.

  From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (FIG. 72 (a) clockwise), the state shown in FIG. 70 (b) and FIG. As shown in 72 (c), the first displacement member 4630 is rotated in the protruding direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630 but is displaced together with the first displacement member 4630.

  Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the third displacement member 4660, and the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 in the second displacement member 3640 is a sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660. Therefore, the third displacement member 4660 is also displaced together with the first displacement member 4630. That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 70A to 70C and 72A to 72C, the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (imaginary line). The angle formed with L2) is maintained at the crossing angle θ1.

  When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 73 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 73 (a), the first displacement member 4630 is moved to FIG. 73 (a). The second displacement member 3640 (connection displacement member 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while being maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 71 (b) and FIG. 73 (b). After passing, it arrange | positions in the overhang | projection position shown in FIG.71 (c) and FIG.73 (c).

  In this case, when the driven member 3641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 3641 is caused by the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 (on the traveling direction side of the connecting pin 3641 d). The inner wall surface, the upper side in FIG. 73A is the direction pushed up by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641.

  Thereby, the third displacement member 4660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and in the sections shown in FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (c) and FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (c). The angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (imaginary line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (imaginary line L2) is changed (decreased) from the intersection angle θ1 to the intersection angle θ3 via the intersection angle θ2 (θ3 < θ2 <θ1).

  Contrary to the case described above, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction (FIG. 73 (c) counterclockwise) from the state shown in FIGS. 71 (c) and 73 (c), the first displacement is obtained. While the member 4630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 73 (c), the second displacement member 3640 (connection displacement member 642) is relatively displaced in the opposite direction with respect to the first displacement member 4630, and FIG. After the state shown in FIG. 73 (b) and FIG. 73 (b), it is arranged in the state shown in FIG. 71 (a) and FIG. 73 (a).

  In this case, the rotation of the driven member 3641 around the support shaft 632 causes the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 (the inner wall surface on the traveling direction side of the connecting pin 3641d, the lower side in FIG. 73C). ) Is a direction pushed down by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641. Therefore, the third displacement member 4660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (imaginary line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (imaginary line L2) intersects. Increased to angle θ1.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 72 (c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 70 (c) and 72 (c), the first displacement member 4630 causes the rotation shaft 631 to move. It is rotated in the standing direction as a rotation axis, and is arranged at the retracted position shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 72 (a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630, and thus the connecting pin 3641 d of the driven member 3641 is moved to the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660. Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced together with the first displacement member 4630.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630, and the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 3640, and the like. The configuration in which the third displacement member 4660 is integrally displaced (see FIGS. 70 and 71) and the second displacement member 3640 and the first displacement member 4630 while maintaining the first displacement member 4630 in the stopped state. The third displacement member 4660 can be individually and relatively displaced (see FIGS. 71 and 73).

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 81. In the third embodiment, the case where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the third displacement member 3660 is slidably displaceable with respect to the first displacement member 3630 has been described, but the right rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment is The third displacement member 5660 can protrude and retract in the front-rear direction with respect to the one displacement member 5630. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 74 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 75 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 5600. 74 and 75 show a state where a part of the right rotation unit 5600 (the rear base 610 and the front base 620) is assembled.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, in the right rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment, the third displacement member 5660 is arranged in the front-rear direction (for example, FIG. a) It is arranged so as to be able to appear and retract in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface). As will be described later, the distal end of the connecting pin 5461d of the second displacement member 5640 (driven member 5541) is slid and inclined by the third displacement member 5660 via the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 5630. The third displacement member 5660 is displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630 (in the front-rear direction) by the rotation of the driven member 5461 relative to the first displacement member 5630. Can appear).

  A pair of sliding holes 5638 are formed in the first displacement member 5630. The sliding hole 5638 is a hole having a circular cross section through which a sliding guide rod 5664 described later of the third displacement member 5660 is inserted, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sliding guide rod 5664. The That is, the sliding guide rod 5664 is supported so as to be slidable along the direction in which the sliding hole 5638 is formed, and thereby the third displacement member 5660 is supported so as to be able to protrude and retract in the front-rear direction with respect to the first displacement member 5630. Is done.

  The connecting pin 5641d is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section that is inserted into the through groove 3636, and is set to a protruding height at which the tip is located in the through groove 3636. That is, in the assembled state, the distal end of the connecting pin 5461d is brought into contact with the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 in the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 5630.

  On the back surface of the third displacement member 5660, a sliding inclined portion 5663 and a sliding guide rod 5664 are projected. As described above, the sliding inclined portion 5663 is a plate-like portion on which the connecting pin 5461d of the driven member 5541 is slid, and the back surface on which the connecting pin 5461d is slid is from one end (the right side in FIG. 75). It is formed as an inclined surface that rises and inclines toward the other end (left side in FIG. 75). That is, the protruding height of the sliding inclined portion 5663 from the third displacement member 5660 is gradually increased from one end to the other end. Therefore, when the connecting pin 5461d is slid from the one end to the other end (or the opposite direction) on the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 as the driven member 5641 rotates, the driven member The distance between the 5641 and the third displacement member 5660 is enlarged (reduced).

  Here, the sliding inclined portion 5663 is set to have a plate thickness slightly smaller than the groove width of the through groove 3636, and the back view shape is formed in a curved shape corresponding to the through groove 3636. That is, in the assembled state, the projecting tip side of the sliding inclined portion 5663 is inserted into the through groove 3636 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the third displacement member 5660 is projected and retracted relative to the first displacement member 5630, not only the sliding guide rod 5664 but also the sliding inclined portion 5663 slides the third displacement member 5660. Since the movement can be supported (that is, supported at three positions), the third displacement member 5660 can be prevented from tilting forward, and the intrusion operation can be stabilized.

  As described above, the sliding guide rod 5664 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section that is slidably supported by the sliding hole 5638 of the first displacement member 5630, and the sliding hole 5638 is provided at the axial end surface thereof. The holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter is fastened and fixed, thereby restricting the sliding guide rod 5664 from coming out of the sliding hole 5638.

  In this case, the biasing member S formed as a coil spring is interposed between the holding body C and the first displacement member 5630 in an elastically compressed state (a state in which the overall length is shortened). The elastic recovery force of the biasing member S is applied in a direction in which the holding body C is separated from the back surface of the first displacement member 5630. As a result, the third displacement member 5660 is biased in the direction approaching the first displacement member 5630, and the sliding inclined portion 5663 is inserted into the through groove 3636.

  Therefore, by rotating the driven member 5461 around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 5630 and displacing the connecting pin 5641d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the tip of the connecting pin 5461d is moved to the first position. The third displacement member 5660 is caused to act on the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 (the connecting pin 5461d is slid along the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663), and the third displacement member 5660 is moved back and forth with respect to the first displacement member 5630. Can be infested in the direction.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80, the operation of the right rotation unit 5600 will be described. 76 and 77 are front views of the right rotation unit 5600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 78 and 79 operate between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit 5600 in each state at the time of doing. 80 and 81 are top views of the right rotation unit 5600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

  76 (a) to 76 (c) are shown in FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c), 80 (a) to 80 (c), and FIGS. 77 (a) to 77 (c). ) Is the same as FIGS. 79 (a) to 79 (c) and FIGS. 81 (a) to 81 (c). In this case, FIG. 76 (c) is the same as FIG. 77 (a), FIG. 78 (c) is FIG. 79 (a), and FIG. 80 (c) is the same as FIG. is there.

  Here, in the fifth embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 5630, whereby the first displacement member 5630, the second displacement member 5640, and the third displacement member. When 5660 is displaced, the displacement modes of the first displacement member 5630 and the second displacement member 5640 are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 76 (a), 78 (a), and 80 (a), at the retracted position, the third displacement member 5660 is brought close to the first displacement member 5630, and the second displacement member 5640 is placed. In FIG. 78 (a), the connecting pin 5461d of the driven member 5461 in FIG. 5 is connected to one end side of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 (the end portion on the side where the protruding height from the back surface of the third displacement member 5660 is low ) And the right side of FIG. In this case, the protrusion amount from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660 is the dimension J1.

  From this state, when the transmission member 654 is driven to rotate in the forward direction (FIG. 78 (a) clockwise), the state shown in FIG. 76 (b), FIG. 78 (b) and FIG. As shown in 76 (c), FIG. 78 (c), and FIG. 80 (c), the first displacement member 5630 is rotated in the protruding direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 5640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630 but is displaced together with the first displacement member 5630.

  Therefore, the second displacement member 5640 is not displaced relative to the third displacement member 5660. Accordingly, since the connecting pin 5461d of the driven member 5461 in the second displacement member 5640 does not slide on the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660, the third displacement member 5660 is also integrated with the first displacement member 5630. Is displaced. That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (c), FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c), and FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c), the third displacement member 5660 is The state of being closest to the first displacement member 5630 (the state in which the protruding amount is the dimension J1) is maintained.

  When the transmission member 654 is rotated in the forward direction (FIG. 67 (a) clockwise) from the state shown in FIGS. 77 (a), 79 (a), and 81 (a), the first displacement member 5630 is moved. While maintaining the state (position) shown in FIG. 79 (a), the second displacement member 5640 (connection displacement member 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 5630, and FIGS. 77 (b) and 79 (79). After the state shown in b) and FIG. 81 (b), it is arranged at the overhanging position shown in FIGS. 77 (c), 79 (c) and 81 (c).

  In this case, when the driven member 5461 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 5641 causes the tip of the connecting pin 5461 d to move beyond the back of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660. The direction of sliding toward the end side (the end portion of the third displacement member 5660 on the side where the projecting height is higher from the back side, the upper left side in FIG. 79 (a), the left side in FIG. 81 (a)) (FIG. 79 (a) ) Counterclockwise rotation).

  Therefore, the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 is pushed forward (upper side in FIG. 81 (a)) by the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641. As a result, the third displacement member 5660 protrudes forward relative to the first displacement member 5630, and FIGS. 77 (a) to 77 (c), 79 (a) to 79 (c), and 81 (a). ) To the section shown in FIG. 81 (c), the amount of protrusion from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660 is changed (increased) from the dimension J1 to the dimension J3 via the dimension J2 (J1). <J2 <J3).

  Contrary to the case described above, the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction (FIG. 79 (c) counterclockwise) from the state shown in FIGS. 77 (c), 79 (c) and 81 (c). Then, while the first displacement member 5630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 79 (c), the second displacement member 5640 (the connected displacement member 642) is relative to the first displacement member 5630 in the opposite direction. After being displaced and passing through the states shown in FIGS. 77 (b), 79 (b) and 81 (b), they are arranged in the states shown in FIGS. 77 (a), 79 (a) and 81 (a). The

  In this case, the rotation of the driven member 5461 around the support shaft 632 causes the connecting pin 5461d to move to one end side of the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 (the protrusion from the back surface of the third displacement member 5660). The rotation is in the direction (FIG. 79 (c) clockwise) of sliding toward the lower end, the lower right side of FIG. 79 (c) and the right side of FIG. 81 (c).

  Therefore, when the connecting pin 5461d is moved to one end of the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 in the third displacement member 5660, the sliding inclined portion 5663 is retracted (immersed) backward (back side) accordingly. Therefore, due to the elastic recovery force of the biasing member S, the third displacement member 5660 is brought close to the first displacement member 5630, and from the front of the first displacement member 5630 to the front of the third displacement member 5660. The protrusion amount is reduced to the dimension J1.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 78 (c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 76 (c), 78 (c) and 80 (c), the first displacement member. 5630 is rotated in the standing direction with the rotation shaft 631 as a rotation axis, and is disposed at the retracted position shown in FIGS. 76 (a), 78 (a), and 80 (a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 5640 does not displace relative to the first displacement member 5630, and thus the connecting pin 5461 d of the driven member 5541 is slidably inclined by the third displacement member 5660. Since the back surface of 5663 is not slid, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are displaced together with the first displacement member 5630.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 5630, and the first displacement member 5630, the second displacement member 5640, and the like. The configuration in which the third displacement member 5660 is displaced integrally (see FIGS. 76, 78, and 81) and the second displacement with respect to the first displacement member 5630 while maintaining the first displacement member 5630 in a stopped state. The member 5640 and the third displacing member 5660 can be individually and relatively displaced (see FIGS. 77, 79, and 81). In particular, according to the fifth embodiment, since the displacement direction of the third displacement member 5660 is the front-rear direction, interference with displacement in other adjacent units can be avoided, and the movable range in such other units can be reduced. Can be secured. Further, the third displacement member 5660 can be brought close to the player by the forward protrusion of the third displacement member 5660, and an effect with a powerful force can be performed.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment, the case where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the period during which the second displacement member 3640 is displaced coincides with the period during which the third displacement member 3660 is displaced has been described. In the right rotation unit 6600, the period during which the second displacement member 6640 is displaced differs from the period during which the third displacement member 4660 is displaced. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  82 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 6600. 82 and 83 show a state where a part of the right rotation unit 6600 (the rear base 610 and the front base 620) is assembled.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment is similar to the case of the fourth embodiment in that the third displacement member is located on the front side of one end side (upper side in FIG. 82) of the first displacement member 4630. 4660 is rotatably supported, and the driven member 6641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, whereby the second displacement member 6640 (connection displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 4660 are first displaced. Relative displacement (rotation) with respect to member 4630.

  In this case, in the fourth embodiment, the connecting groove 641c of the driven member 3641 is formed in a straight line, whereas the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 in the sixth embodiment is an action section 6641c1 as described later. In addition, it is bent from the non-interference section 6641c2 in a generally U shape when viewed from the front.

  Thus, while the connecting pin 643 passes through the action section 6641c1, both the second displacement member 6640 (connection displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 4660 are rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, while the connection pin During the period when 643 passes through the non-interference section 6641c2, only the third displacement member 4660 can be rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while the second displacement member 6640 is stopped.

  The connection groove 6641c is a groove-like opening through which the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642 is slidably inserted, and an action section 6641c1 extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 6641; Extending along the width direction of the driven member 6641 while curving in an arc shape with the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) as a concave (ie, a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape concentric with the rotating shaft 631) A non-interference section 6641c2.

  As will be described later, the action section 6641c1 is a section that acts on the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642, and the non-interference section 6641c2 is a section that does not interfere with the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87, the operation of the right rotation unit 6600 will be described. 84 and 85 are front views of the right rotation unit 6600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 86 and 87 operate between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit 6600 in each state at the time of doing.

  84 (a) to 84 (c) are FIGS. 86 (a) to 86 (c), and FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c) are FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (c). c) and the same state. In this case, FIG. 84 (c) is the same as FIG. 85 (a), and FIG. 86 (c) is the same as FIG. 87 (a).

  Here, the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment is substantially the same in other configurations except that the shape of the connection groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 is different from the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment. Since they are formed in the same manner, description of the same parts is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 84 and 86, when the transmission member 654 is driven to rotate in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 86 (a)) from the retracted position shown in FIGS. As described above, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 6640 (driven member 6641) with respect to the first displacement member 4630 is not formed while the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the action section 635a of the first groove 635. The second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced together with the first displacement member 4630.

  That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 84 (a) to 84 (c) and FIGS. 86 (a) to 86 (c), the first displacement member 4630 (imaginary line) is the same as in the case of the fourth embodiment described above. L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (imaginary line L2) are maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 85A and 87A, the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is connected to the start end (the operating section 6641c and the non-interfering section 6641c2 of the operating section 6641c1 in the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641). It is located at the end opposite to the connecting portion, right side in FIG. 87 (a). In this case, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is located at a connection portion between the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b of the first groove 635.

  When the transmission member 654 is driven to rotate in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 87 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 85 (a) and 87 (a), the first displacement member 4630 is moved to FIG. 87 (a). The driven member 6641 whose inner wall surface of the second groove 641b is pushed downward (downward in FIG. 87 (a)) by the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654 while maintaining the state (position) shown in FIG. As a center, the connecting groove 6641c is rotated in the upward direction (FIG. 87 (b) counterclockwise).

  By the rotation of the driven member 6641, the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is pushed upward by the inner wall surface of the operating section 6641c1 while sliding on the operating section 6641c1 in the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641. As a result, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated in the direction of lifting the decorative portion 642b with the support shaft 633 as the center of rotation (FIG. 87 (a) clockwise). As a result, the connecting pin 643 reaches the connecting portion of the operating section 6641c1 and the non-interfering section 6641c2 of the connecting groove 6641c, and the state shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 87 (b) (the decorative portion 642b is lifted to the top). State) is formed.

  In this case, the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642 is disposed on the same side (left side in FIG. 87 (b)) as the decoration portion 642b (that is, the center of gravity of the connection displacement member 642) with respect to the shaft support hole 642a. The connection groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 is formed so that the inner wall surface of the non-interference section 6641c2 can support the connection pin 643 from below. That is, the non-interference section 6641c2 has an inner wall surface formed as a plane that intersects the moving direction of the connecting pin 643 with a predetermined angle when the connecting displacement member 642 rotates by its own weight about the shaft support hole 642a. Is done.

  Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 85B and FIG. 87B, the inner wall surface of the non-interference section 6641c2 supports the connection pin 643 from below (regulates the movement of the connection pin 643), thereby connecting the displacement member. It can control that 642 rotates with dead weight centering on axis support hole 642a. That is, the connection displacement member 642 can be maintained in a stopped state with respect to the first displacement member 4630.

  85B and 87B, in the third displacement member 4660, as described above, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 is pushed up by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 6641. Thus, the first displacement member 4630 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630 (imaginary line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (imaginary line L2) is changed to an intersection angle θ2 ( (Θ2 <θ1).

  When the transmission member 654 is driven to rotate in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 87 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 87 (b), the inside of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 will be described. The wall surface is pushed up by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 6641, and as shown in FIGS. 85 (c) and 87 (c), the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (imaginary line). L2) is changed (decreased) to the intersection angle θ3 (θ3 <θ2 <θ1).

  In this case, the non-interference section 6641c2 of the connecting groove 6641c is curved in an arc shape centering on the support shaft 632 (shaft support hole 641a), so that the driven member 6641 has the support shaft 632 (shaft support hole 641a). Even if it is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 87 (b) as the center, the inner wall surface of the non-interference section 6641c2 supports the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642 from below, and the connection displacement member 642 supports the shaft support hole 642a. Although it is restricted from rotating by its own weight as the center, the connection pin 643 is not pushed upward, and therefore the connection displacement member 642 is not rotated in the direction of lifting the decorative portion 642b with the support shaft 633 as the rotation center. That is, the connection displacement member 642 can be maintained in a substantially stopped state, and the rotation of the third displacement member 4660 can be continued.

  Contrary to the case described above, when the transmission member 654 is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 87 (c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 85 (c) and 87 (c), the connecting displacement member While the connection pin 643 of 642 passes through the non-interference section 6641c2, the connection displacement member 642 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIGS. 85 (c) and 87 (c) (FIG. 85 (b)). 87B), while the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642 passes through the action section 6641c1, the connection pin 643 is pushed down by the inner wall surface of the action section 6641c1 to lower the decoration portion 642b. The connecting displacement member 642 is rotated about the support shaft 633 in the direction.

  The operation mode of the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment formed as described above will be described with reference to FIG. 88 in comparison with the operation mode of the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment.

  88 (a) to 88 (c) are schematic front views of the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, and FIGS. 88 (d) to 88 (g) are right rotation units in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 6B is a schematic front view of 6600, and shows respective states when operating between a retracted position and an extended position.

  In the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the first displacement member 4630, A mode in which the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced integrally (a mode between FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b)) and the first displacement member 4630 while maintaining the stopped state. Forming the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 relative to the first displacement member 4630 (form between FIG. 88 (b) and FIG. 88 (c)) is formed. it can. In this case, in the latter form, the displacement period (start and end) of the second displacement member 3640 is substantially the same as the displacement period (start and end) of the third displacement member 4660.

  On the other hand, in the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 6640, and the third displacement member 4660 are integrally displaced (FIG. 88 (d) and FIG. 88 (e)). And a mode in which the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while maintaining the first displacement member 4630 in a stopped state (FIG. 88). (Form between (e) and FIG. 88 (f)), and with respect to these 1st displacement member 4630 and 2nd displacement member 6640, maintaining the 1st displacement member 4630 and the 2nd displacement member 6640 in a stop state. Thus, a form in which the third displacement member 4660 is relatively displaced (a form between FIG. 88 (f) and FIG. 88 (g)) can be formed.

  That is, in the sixth embodiment, the displacement period (start and end) of the second displacement member 6640 and the displacement period (start and end) of the third displacement member 4660 can be made different. More specifically, while the displacement of the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 is simultaneously started, the timing for stopping the displacement of the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 is shifted (the second displacement member 6640). Can be stopped first, and then the displacement of the third displacement member 4660 can be stopped).

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 94. In the third embodiment, the connection displacement member 642 and the third displacement member 3660 are displaceably disposed on the first displacement member 3630 to form the right rotation unit 3600, but in the seventh embodiment, In the right rotation unit 7600, a third displacement member 7660 is displaceably disposed on the first displacement member 7630, and a connection displacement member 642 is displaceably disposed on the third displacement member 7660. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 89 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 90 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 7600. 89 and 90 show a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 7600 (the rear base 610 and the front base 620) is assembled.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, in the right rotation unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment, a third displacement member 7660 is rotatably supported on the front surface of one end side (upper side in FIG. 89) of the first displacement member 7630. The connection displacement member 642 is rotatably supported by the third displacement member 7660. As will be described later, when the driven member 7641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630 and the third displacement member 7660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated. Along with this, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated while changing the position of the rotation center with a curved locus.

  The first displacement member 7630 has a notch 7639 formed at the edge of one end side (the upper side in FIG. 90), and a space formed by the notch 7639 forms a support shaft 7665 of a third displacement member 7660 described later. It is set as an arrangement space. A connection groove 7641 c is formed in the driven member 7641 of the second displacement member 7640. The connection groove 7641c is a groove-like opening that extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 7641, and the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642 is slidably inserted therethrough.

  Note that the groove width of the connecting groove 7641c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 643. Further, the total length (groove length) of the connecting groove 7641c is made longer than that of the connecting groove 641c in the fourth embodiment. Thereby, the relative displacement amount (relative rotation angle) of the connecting displacement member 642 with respect to the driven member 7641 can be ensured.

  A support shaft 7665 projects from the back surface of the third displacement member 7660. The support shaft 7665 is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section that is inserted into the shaft support hole 642a of the connection displacement member 642, and the connection displacement member 642 is connected to the third displacement member 7660 via the support shaft 7665 and the shaft support hole 642a. It is pivotally supported on the back of the machine.

  Note that a holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 642a is fastened and fixed to the end surface in the axial direction of the support shaft 7665, thereby restricting the instruction shaft 7665 from coming out of the shaft support hole 642a. The support shaft 7665 has a large-diameter portion on the base side and a small-diameter portion smaller in diameter than the large-diameter portion on the distal end side, and the small-diameter portion is inserted into the shaft support hole 642a. That is, the large-diameter portion is a portion for raising the connecting displacement member 642 from the back surface of the third displacement member 7660. By raising the large-diameter portion, the front-rear direction of the connecting displacement member 642 with respect to the driven member 7641 (for example, 91A is set to be the same as that in the fourth embodiment.

  Next, the operation of the right rotation unit 7600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. 91 and 92 are front views of the right rotation unit 7600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 93 and 94 operate between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit 7600 in each state at the time of doing.

  91 (a) through 91 (c) are shown in FIGS. 93 (a) through 93 (c), and FIGS. 92 (a) through 92 (c) are shown in FIGS. 94 (a) through 94 (c). c) and the same state. In this case, FIG. 91C is the same as FIG. 92A, and FIG. 93C is the same as FIG. 94A.

  Here, in the seventh embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 7630, whereby the first displacement member 7630, the second displacement member 7640, and the third displacement member. When the 7660 is displaced, the displacement modes of the first displacement member 7630 and the third displacement member 7660 are the same as those in the above-described fourth embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 93, when the transmission member 654 is driven to rotate in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 93 (a)) from the retracted position shown in FIGS. As described above, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 7640 (the driven member 7641) relative to the first displacement member 7630 is not formed while the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the action section 635a of the first groove 635. The second displacement member 7640 and the third displacement member 7660 are displaced together with the first displacement member 7630.

  That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (c) and FIGS. 93 (a) to 93 (c), as in the case of the fourth embodiment described above, the first displacement member 7630 (imaginary line). L1) and the third displacement member 7660 (imaginary line L2) are maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

  When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 94A) from the state shown in FIGS. 92A and 94A, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is in the first groove 635. By passing the non-interference section 635b, the first displacement member 7630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 94A, and the driven member 7641 rotates about the support shaft 632 (the shaft support hole 641a). As shown in FIG. 94 (a) in the counterclockwise direction.

  Accordingly, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 7660 is caused by the connection pin 3641d of the driven member 7641, and the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642 is changed by the inner wall surface of the connection groove 7461c of the driven member 7641. , Respectively, are pushed upward (upper side in FIG. 94 (a)).

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 94, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630, and the first displacement member 7630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 7660 (virtual). The angle formed with the line L2) is changed (decreased) from the crossing angle θ1 to the crossing angle θ3 via the crossing angle θ2 (θ3 <θ2 <θ1), and the connecting displacement member 642 is supported by the support shaft 7665 (the shaft support hole 642a). 94) is rotated clockwise in FIG. 94 (a), and the decorative portion 642b is lifted upward.

  In this case, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated in the direction of lifting the support shaft 7665 about the rotation shaft 4661 as the center of rotation, so that the third displacement member 7660 is utilized by utilizing the rotation of the third displacement member 7660. The connecting displacement member 642 supported by the support shaft 7665 can be lifted upward.

  That is, according to the seventh embodiment, the connection displacement member 642 is rotated with respect to the third displacement member 7660 about the support shaft 7665 as a center of rotation, and the first displacement member 7630 has an arcuate locus. It can be displaced (lifted) upward. As a result, the displacement of the connecting displacement member 642 (decoration portion 642b) can be linked with the displacement of the third displacement member 7660 to provide a more complicated aspect, and the amount of overhanging of the ornament portion 642b (the first amount) Crossing angle θ4, which is an angle formed by imaginary line L3 passing through the axial center of shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 7665) and along the longitudinal direction of connecting displacement member 64 with respect to displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1)) It can be set as the attitude | position extended by expanding further upwards.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 105. In the first embodiment, the mode of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the same in the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. In the left rotation unit 8700 according to the eighth embodiment, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is defined as the forward path and the return path. It is different. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 95 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 8700 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 96 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 8700. FIG. 97 is a front view of the guide portion 8773. 95 and 96 show a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 8700 (the rear base 710 and the front base 720) is assembled.

  As shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the left rotation unit 8700 in the eighth embodiment, a guide portion 8773 is recessed in the front of one end side in the longitudinal direction of the connection second member 8770 (upper side in FIG. 95). As will be described later, the guide portion 8773 is formed as a circular path, and the connection pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is guided along the guide portion 8773, so that the second displacement member 740 is relative to the first displacement member 730. The form of displacement can be made different between the forward path and the return path.

  The connecting pin 8744a is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section that protrudes from the rear surface of the flange member 8744 and is eccentric from the axis of the rotating shaft 741, and its diameter is slightly larger than the groove width of the guide portion 8773. It is possible to move along the guide portion 8773 by setting the small size. The connecting second member 8770 stores an elastic body (not shown) made of a coil spring in an elastically compressed state, and the elastic recovery force of the elastic body connects the connecting pin 8744a to the connecting second member 8770. It acts on the direction which makes it protrude from the back surface. Therefore, when the connecting pin 8744a moves along the guide portion 8773, the state where the tip of the connecting pin 8744a is in contact with the bottom surface of the guide portion 8773 is maintained.

  The guide portion 8773 is a concave groove having a substantially U-shaped cross section for guiding the connecting pin 8744a, and is formed as a circular path, and a plurality of steps (first to third steps 8773h to 8773j) in the path. Are formed with directionality (see FIG. 97).

  More specifically, the guide portion 8773 extends in a substantially straight line shape when viewed from the front along the width direction of the second connecting member 8770 (direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, left-right direction in FIG. 97) starting from the position P1. The first groove 8773a is connected to the terminal end of the first groove 8773a and extends substantially linearly in a front view along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 97) of the connecting second member 8770 with the position P2 as the starting end. The second groove 8773b is connected to the terminal end of the second groove 8773b and extends while curving in an arc shape (an arc shape protruding in a direction away from the position P2 in this embodiment) starting from the position P3. The end is formed from a third groove 8773c connected to the start of the first groove 8773a.

  A first step 8773h is formed at a connection portion between the first groove 8773a and the second groove 8773b. The first step 8773h has a bottom surface on the start end side (position P2) of the second groove 8773b that is lower than the bottom surface on the terminal end side of the first groove 8773a (positioned on the back side in FIG. 97). This is the vertical plane that connects the two. Accordingly, the movement of the connection pin 8744a from the end of the first groove 8773a to the start of the second groove 8773b is allowed, while the movement of the connection pin 8744a from the start of the second groove 8773b to the end of the first groove 8773a is It can be regulated by one step 8773h.

  Similarly, a second step 8773i and a third step 8773j are formed in a connection portion between the second groove 8773b and the third groove 8773c and a connection portion between the third groove 8773c and the first groove 8773a, respectively. The second step 8773i is such that the bottom surface on the start end side (position P3) of the third groove 8773c is lower than the bottom surface on the terminal end side of the second groove 8773b, so that the third step 8773j is the start end side of the first groove 8773a. The bottom surface of (position P1) is formed lower than the bottom surface on the terminal side of the third groove 8773c, respectively.

  Thereby, the movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the terminal end of the second groove 8773b (third groove 8773c) to the start end of the third groove 8773c (first groove 8773a) is allowed, while the third groove 8773c (first groove 8773a). The movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the starting end to the end of the second groove 8773b (third groove 8773c) can be restricted by the second step 8773i (third step 8773j).

  That is, the connecting pin 8744a is allowed only a circular movement in which the guide portion 8773 moves in the first groove 8773a, the second groove 8773b, and the third groove 8773c in order along the directions of the arrows L1, L2, and L3. .

  Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 8700 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Here, in the eighth embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides on the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), so that the connection first member 760 and the connection second member. When the 8770, the first displacement member 730, and the second displacement member 740 are respectively displaced, the displacement of the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 8770 and the first displacement member 730 is the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as that of the embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 98 to FIG. 101, the operation of the left rotation unit 8700 when operating the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

  98 and 99 are front views of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 100 and 101 are directed from the retracted position to the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state at the time of operating a forward path.

  As shown in FIGS. 98 (a) and 100 (a), in the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and are disposed in front of the front base 720.

  In this case, while passing through the shaft center of the shaft support hole 732 (rotary shaft 741) and passing through the imaginary line M1 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730 and the shaft center of the shaft support hole 732 (rotation shaft 741). The angle formed by the imaginary line M2 along the longitudinal direction of the second displacement member 740 is the intersection angle α1. The connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is positioned at the position P1 of the guide portion 8773 (the start end of the first groove 8773a) (see FIG. 97), and the connecting second member 8770 is the uppermost (upper side of FIG. 100 (a)). ).

  From this state, when the transmission member 754 is driven to rotate in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 100A), the connecting first member 760 extends in the overhanging direction (FIG. 100A counterclockwise in FIG. 100A). The first displacement member 730 is rotated in the protruding direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100A) with the rotation shaft 731 as the rotation center. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the protruding direction as shown in FIGS. 98 (b) and 100 (b).

  Further, when the connection first member 760 is rotated in the protruding direction, the connection second member 8770 is drawn downward (lower side in FIG. 101A), and the guide portion 8773 of the connection second member 8770 (the first portion). The inner wall surface of the groove 8773a) pushes down the connecting pin 8744a in the flange member 8744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 8744a arranged at the position P1 moves the guide portion 8773 along the first groove 8773a. Are guided in the direction of the arrow L1 (see FIG. 97).

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 98B and 100B, the second displacement member 740 moves in the first direction with respect to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (FIG. 100A). The angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α1 to the intersection angle α2. (Α1 <α2).

  When the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 100 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 98 (b) and 100 (b), as in the case described above, the connected first member. 760 is rotated in the protruding direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100 (b)) with the rotation shaft 761 as the rotation center, whereby the first displacement member 730 is extended in the protruding direction (FIG. 100 (b) with the rotation shaft 731 as the rotation center. ) Counterclockwise) and further tilted in the overhang direction as shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 101 (a).

  Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the protruding direction, the second connecting member 8770 is further drawn downward (the lower right side in FIG. 101 (b)), and the guide portion 8773 of the second connecting member 8770 ( The inner wall surface of the first groove 8773a) pushes down the connecting pin 8744a in the flange member 8744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 8744a moves the guide portion 8773 along the first groove 8773a in the direction of the arrow L1. Further guidance is provided (see FIG. 97).

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 99A and 101A, the second displacement member 740 is rotated in the first direction (FIG. 100B) with respect to the first displacement member 730 with the rotation shaft 741 as the rotation center. The angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α2 to the intersection angle α3. (Α1 <α2 <α3).

  Thereafter, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. 99B and 101B, the first displacement member 730 is tilted to the maximum and the first displacement A state is formed in which the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (relatively rotated) relative to the member 730. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the overhang position.

  In this case, the connecting pin 8744a is guided in the direction of the arrow L1 along the first groove 8773a along the first groove 8773a, passes through the first step 8773h (jumps down), and then hits the inner wall surface of the second groove 8773b. , At position P2 (see FIG. 97). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is changed (increased) from the intersection angle α3 to the intersection angle α4 (α1 <α2 <α3). <Α4).

  Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 8700 when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position will be described with reference to FIGS.

  102 and 103 are front views of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position, and FIGS. 104 and 105 are directed from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 11 is a schematic back view of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating on the return path. 98 (a) is the same as FIG. 103 (b), and FIG. 99 (b) is the same as FIG. 102 (a).

  Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 101 (a). Yes, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 105 (a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 98 (b) and 100 (b). .

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 102A and 104A, in the extended position, the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is positioned at the position P2 of the guide portion 8773 (the start end of the second groove 8773b) ( 97), the second connecting member 8770 is drawn to the lowermost position (lower right side in FIG. 104 (a)).

  Contrary to the case described above (outward path shown in FIGS. 98 to 101), the transmission member 754 is moved in the reverse direction (FIG. 104 (a) counterclockwise) from the overhanging position shown in FIGS. 102 (a) and 104 (a). When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104 (a)) around the rotation shaft 761, the first displacement member 730 rotates the rotation shaft 731. It is rotated in the retracting direction (FIG. 104 (a) clockwise) as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (stands up) in the retracting direction as shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b).

  Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 8770 is pushed upward (upper left in FIG. 104 (a)), and the connecting pin 8744a arranged at the position P2 becomes the guide portion. 8773 is guided in the direction of arrow L2 along the second groove 8773b (see FIG. 97). In this case, as described above, the second groove 8773b extends along the longitudinal direction of the connection second member 8770, and the relative displacement of the connection second member 8770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is relative to each other in the longitudinal direction. A linear motion (slide displacement) in a direction along the direction is assumed.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b), in the section where the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the second groove 8773b (see FIG. 97), the second displacement member relative to the first displacement member 730 is obtained. The relative displacement (relative rotation) about the rotation shaft 741 of 740 is not formed. Thereby, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4.

  When the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 104 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b), as in the case described above, the connected first The member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (FIG. 104 (b) clockwise) with the rotation shaft 761 as the rotation center, so that the first displacement member 730 is retracted with the rotation shaft 731 as the rotation center (FIG. 104 (b) clock). ), And further rotated (stands up) in the retracting direction as shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 105 (a).

  Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 8770 is further pushed upward (upper left in FIG. 104 (b)), so that the connecting pin 8744a causes the guide portion 8773 to move to the second position. After being further guided along the groove 8773b in the direction of the arrow L2, passing through the second step 8773i (jumping down), it hits the inner wall surface of the third groove 8773c, thereby being positioned at the position P3 (see FIG. 97).

  As described above, relative displacement (relative rotation) around the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is not formed in the section where the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the second groove 8773b. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 103A and 105A, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4. Is done.

  Thereafter, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 stands up to the maximum and the first displacement is reached, as shown in FIGS. 103 (b) and 105 (b). A state is formed in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the member 730 is minimized. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted position.

  In this case, the connecting second member 8770 is pushed up to the top, so that the connecting pin 8744a is guided in the direction of the arrow L3 along the third groove 8773c through the third groove 8773c and passes through the third step 8773j ( After jumping down), it comes into contact with the inner wall surface of the first groove 8773a, thereby returning to the position P1 (see FIG. 97). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is restored (decreased) from the intersection angle α4 to the intersection angle α1.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 730 relative to the back base 710 and the front base 720 in the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. ) Can be the same, while the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be varied.

  Specifically, in the forward path, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is the displacement of the first displacement member 730 relative to the back base 710 and the front base 720. While gradually increasing in proportion to the amount (rotation amount), on the return path, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4. However, it is possible to form a mode in which it is displaced toward the retracted position and is decreased from the intersecting angle α4 to the intersecting angle α1 in a short time immediately before being disposed at the retracted position.

  Further, since the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the grooves 8773a to 8773c of the guide portion 8773, even when the transmission member 754 (first displacement member 730) is rotationally driven (displaced) at a relatively high speed, Shaking of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the guide portion 8773 is formed as a circular path in which concave grooves having a U-shaped cross section are continuously formed has been described. However, the guide portion 9773 in the ninth embodiment includes a connecting pin 744a. It is formed as a loosely fitted opening. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 106 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 9700 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 107 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 9700. 106 and 107 show a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 9700 (the rear base 710 and the front base 720) is assembled.

  As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, in the left rotation unit 9700 according to the ninth embodiment, a guide portion 9773 is formed to open at one end side in the longitudinal direction of the connection second member 9770 (upper side in FIG. 106). As will be described later, the displacement of the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 within the guide portion 9773 causes the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 relative to the first displacement member 730 to be different between the forward path and the backward path. can do.

  The guide portion 9773 is connected to the first inner wall 9773a extending substantially linearly in the front view along the width direction (direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction) of the connecting second member 9770, and to the end of the first inner wall 9773a. And a second inner wall 9773b extending substantially linearly in a front view along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 106) of the connecting second member 9770, and connected to the end of the second inner wall 9773b and arc-shaped. (In the present embodiment, the third inner end is connected to the starting end of the first inner wall 9773a and extends while curving in an arc shape protruding in a direction away from the connecting portion of the first inner wall 9773a and the second inner wall 9773b). The inner wall 9773c is formed as an opening that is an inner wall surface.

  Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 9700 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Here, in the ninth embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides on the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), whereby the connection first member 760 and the connection second member. When 9770, the first displacement member 730, and the second displacement member 740 are respectively displaced, the displacement of the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 9770 and the first displacement member 730 is the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as that of the embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the operation of the left rotation unit 9700 when operating the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position will be described with reference to FIGS.

  108 and 109 are front views of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 110 and 111 are directed from the retracted position to the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state at the time of operating a forward path.

  As shown in FIGS. 108 (a) and 110 (a), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and are disposed in front of the front base 720.

  In this case, while passing through the shaft center of the shaft support hole 732 (rotary shaft 741) and passing through the imaginary line M1 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730 and the shaft center of the shaft support hole 732 (rotation shaft 741). The angle formed by the imaginary line M2 along the longitudinal direction of the second displacement member 740 is the intersection angle β1. Further, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 is positioned at a connecting portion (starting end of the first inner wall 9773a) of the first inner wall 9773a and the third inner wall 9773c of the guide portion 9773, and the connecting second member 9770 is the uppermost (FIG. 110 (a) upper side).

  The center of gravity G, which is the center of mass of the second displacement member 740 (the point of action of the resultant force of gravity acting on the second displacement member 740), is viewed in the axial direction of the rotation shaft 741 (the shaft support hole 732) (ie, 110 (a)) on the opposite side of the connecting pin 744a (left side of FIG. 110 (a)) across the vertical line Z passing through the axis of the rotating shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) and parallel to the gravity direction. ).

  Therefore, the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight in the direction in which the connection pin 744a is lifted upward (counterclockwise in FIG. 110 (a)) with the rotation shaft 741 as the rotation center. As the second displacement member 740 rotates due to its own weight, the connection pin 744a is brought into contact with (pressed against) the first inner wall 9773a of the guide portion 9773.

  From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (FIG. 110 (a) clockwise), the connecting first member 760 extends in the protruding direction (FIG. 110 (a) counterclockwise with the rotation shaft 761 as the rotation center. The first displacement member 730 is rotated in the protruding direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110 (a)) with the rotation shaft 731 as the rotation center. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the protruding direction as shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b).

  When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the protruding direction, the second connecting member 9770 is drawn downward (the lower side in FIG. 110A), and the inner wall surface of the guide portion 9773 of the second connecting member 9770 is drawn. The (first inner wall 9773a) pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 744a moves the guide portion 9773 along the first inner wall 9773a toward the second inner wall 9773b. Guided in the direction.

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b), the second displacement member 740 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (FIG. 110 (a) timepiece with the rotation axis 741 as the rotation center). The angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β1 to the intersection angle β2. (Β1 <β2).

  When the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 110 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b), as in the case described above, the connected first member. 760 is rotated in the protruding direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110 (b)) with the rotation shaft 761 as the rotation center, so that the first displacement member 730 extends in the protruding direction (FIG. 110 (b) with the rotation shaft 731 as the rotation center. ) Counterclockwise) and further tilted in the overhang direction as shown in FIGS. 109 (a) and 111 (a).

  Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the overhang direction, the second connecting member 9770 is further drawn downward (lower right side in FIG. 110 (b)), and the guide portion 9773 of the second connecting member 9770 is pulled. The inner wall surface (first inner wall 9773a) pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 744a pushes the guide portion 9773 along the first inner wall 9773a to the second inner wall 9773b. You will be guided further in the direction toward.

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 109A and 111A, the second displacement member 740 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (FIG. 110B) with the rotation axis 741 as the rotation center. The angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β2 to the intersection angle β3. (Β1 <β2 <β3).

  Thereafter, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of the movable range, as shown in FIGS. 109 (b) and 111 (b), the first displacement member 730 is tilted to the maximum and the first displacement A state is formed in which the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (relatively rotated) relative to the member 730. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the overhang position.

  In this case, the connecting pin 744a is guided along the first inner wall 9773a through the guide portion 9773, and abuts against the inner wall surface of the second inner wall 9773b, so that a connecting portion (second inner wall 9773b and second inner wall 9773b). 9773b). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is changed (increased) from the intersection angle β3 to the intersection angle β4 (β1 <β2 <β3). <Β4).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115, the operation of the left rotation unit 9700 when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position will be described.

  112 and 113 are front views of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position, and FIGS. 114 and 115 are directed from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 11 is a schematic back view of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating on the return path. FIG. 112 (a) is the same as FIG. 109 (b), and FIG. 113 (b) is the same as FIG. 108 (a).

  Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 114 (b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 109 (a) and 111 (a). The rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 115 (a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b). .

  112 (a) and 114 (a), in the extended position, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 is connected to the first inner wall 9773a and the second inner wall 9773b of the guide portion 9773 (first portion). The second connecting member 9770 is positioned at the lowest position (the lower right side in FIG. 114 (a)).

  Further, the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is connected to the connecting pin 744a with respect to the vertical line Z in the axial direction view of the rotating shaft 741 (the shaft support hole 732) (that is, the state of FIG. 114 (a)). It is located on the same side (right side in FIG. 114 (a)). Therefore, the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight in a direction (FIG. 114 (a) clockwise) in which the connection pin 744a is pushed downward with the rotation shaft 741 as the rotation center. As the second displacement member 740 rotates due to its own weight, the connection pin 744a comes into contact with (is pressed against) the second inner wall 9773b of the guide portion 9773.

  From this state, in contrast to the case described above (outward path shown in FIGS. 108 to 111), the transmission member 754 is moved in the reverse direction (FIG. 114 (a) from the overhanging position shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and 114 (a). a) When rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (FIG. 114 (a) clockwise) with the rotation shaft 761 as the rotation center. The rotating shaft 731 is rotated in the retracting direction (FIG. 114 (a) clockwise) about the rotation center. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (stands up) in the retracting direction as shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 114 (b).

  When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 9770 is pushed upward (upper left in FIG. 114 (a)). As described above, the connection pin 744a is in contact with (pressed against) the second inner wall 9773b of the guide portion 9773 as the second displacement member 740 rotates due to its own weight. Guided in the direction toward the third inner wall 9773c along the second inner wall 9773b.

  In this case, as described above, the second inner wall 9773b extends along the longitudinal direction of the coupling second member 9770, and the relative displacement of the coupling second member 9770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the longitudinal direction of each other. A linear motion (slide displacement) in a direction along the direction is assumed.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 114 (b), in the section where the connecting pin 744a is guided along the second inner wall 9773b, the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is provided. The relative displacement (relative rotation) about the rotation center is not formed. Thereby, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle β4.

  When the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 114 (b)) from the state shown in FIG. 112 (b) and FIG. The member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (FIG. 114 (b) clockwise) with the rotation shaft 761 as the rotation center, so that the first displacement member 730 is retracted with the rotation shaft 731 as the rotation center (FIG. 114 (b) clockwise). ), And further rotated (stands up) in the retracting direction as shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 115 (a).

  When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 9770 is further pushed upward (upper left in FIG. 114 (b)), so that the connecting pin 744a causes the guide portion 9773 to move to the second position. It is further guided in the direction toward the third inner wall 9773c along the inner wall 9773b and hits the inner wall surface of the third inner wall 9773c, so that the connection portion between the second inner wall 9773b and the third inner wall 9773c (the start end of the third inner wall 9773c) is reached. Be positioned.

  As described above, relative displacement (relative rotation) around the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is not formed in the section where the connecting pin 744a is guided along the second inner wall 9773b. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 115 (a), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle β4. Is done.

  Thereafter, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 stands up to the maximum as shown in FIGS. 113 (b) and 115 (b), and the first displacement A state is formed in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the member 730 is minimized. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted position.

  In this case, the connecting second member 9770 is pushed up to the uppermost position, whereby the connecting pin 744a is guided along the third inner wall 9773c in the direction toward the first inner wall 9773a, and the first inner wall 9773a. The first inner wall 9773a and the third inner wall 9773c are connected (returned) to the connecting portion (starting end of the first inner wall 9773a). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is restored (decreased) from the intersection angle β4 to the intersection angle β1.

  In the present embodiment, the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 crosses the vertical line Z when shifting from the state shown in FIG. 115A to the state shown in FIG. The second member 9770 can be rotated prior to being pushed up by the connecting second member 9770.

  Specifically, in a state where the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is located on the same side as the connecting pin 744a (right side in FIG. 115 (a)) with respect to the vertical line Z, the second displacement member 740 is Since the connection pin 744a is pressed against the third inner wall 9773c by rotation due to its own weight, the connection second member 9770 is gradually rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 115 (a) as the connection second member 9770 is pushed upward. On the other hand, when the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is positioned on the side opposite to the connecting pin 744a (left side in FIG. 115 (a)) by this rotation, the second displacement member 740 is positioned. Is rotated in the direction of lifting the connecting pin 744a upward by its own weight. That is, it is rotated prior to being pushed up by the connecting second member 9770.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 730 relative to the back base 710 and the front base 720 in the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. While the aspect can be the same, the relative displacement aspect of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be made different, and in the return path, the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement can be different. The angle formed by the member 740 (virtual line M2) is displaced toward the retracted position while maintaining the intersection angle β4, and immediately before being disposed at the retracted position, from the intersection angle β4 to the intersection angle β1 at high speed (short time). A decreasing aspect can be formed.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Here, the left rotation unit 10700 according to the tenth embodiment is different from the left rotation unit 9700 according to the ninth embodiment only in that the cage 10746 is provided.

  FIG. 116 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit 10700 in the tenth embodiment, and illustrates a state where the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is located on the vertical line Z. As shown in FIG. 116, the left rotation unit 10700 in the tenth embodiment is provided with a cage 10746 on the back surface of the second displacement member 740. Here, the holder 10746 will be described with reference to FIG.

  117 (a) is a front view of the cage 10746, FIG. 117 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the cage 10746 along the CXVIIb-CXVIIb line of FIG. 117 (a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the holder | retainer 10746 in the CXVIIc-CXVIIc line | wire of Fig.117 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 117, the cage 10746 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an internal space with a circular cross section, and a predetermined heavy object is stored in the internal space so as to be displaceable. In the present embodiment, a predetermined heavy object is the liquid LQ, and about 1/3 of the volume of the internal space is filled with the liquid LQ. Therefore, according to the inclination of the holder 10746, the liquid LQ can be displaced to one end side or the other end side (right side or left side in FIG. 117 (c)) of the holder 10746 (see FIGS. 118 to 121).

  Returning to FIG. The cage 10746 is in a posture (horizontal posture) in which the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 116) is orthogonal to the vertical line Z in the axial direction view of the rotating shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) (that is, in the state in FIG. 116). In the position where the center in the longitudinal direction coincides with the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740, the second displacement member 740 is disposed on the back surface.

  Therefore, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated to one side or the other side with the rotation shaft 741 as the center of rotation, the cage 10746 in a horizontal posture is set to an inclined posture in which one side or the other side in the longitudinal direction is positioned downward. Then, the stored heavy object (liquid LQ) is displaced to one side in the longitudinal direction or the other side (that is, the same side as the moving direction of the center of gravity G).

  Accordingly, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated about the rotation shaft 741 as compared with the case where the cage 10746 is not provided, the second displacement member 740 and the cage 10746 are integrated with each other. It is possible to further increase the amount of change in the position of the center of mass (center of gravity G ′).

  Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 10700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 121. 118 and 119 are schematic back views of the left rotation unit 10700 in each state when the forward path is operated from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 120 and 121 are diagrams from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 10700 in each state at the time of operating a return path toward.

  118 to 121, the transmission member 754 is driven to rotate in the forward direction or the reverse direction, and the first displacement member 730 is rotated with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720, and the first displacement member. When the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to 730, the holder 10746 is inclined according to the rotational position of the second displacement member 740, and the liquid LQ filled in the internal space is supplied. The cage 10746 can be displaced to one end or the other end in the longitudinal direction.

  Thereby, the position of the center of gravity G ′ of the second displacement member 740 and the holder 10746 can be arranged at a position farther from the vertical line Z than in the case where the holder 10746 is not provided.

  Therefore, in the section in which the connecting pin 744a is displaced along the first to third inner walls 9773a to 9773c of the guide portion 9773, the rotation of the second displacement member 740 using the gravity center G ′ is ensured and the connecting pin 744a is ensured. Can be easily maintained in contact with the first to third inner walls 9773a to 9773c. As a result, rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed, and the relative displacement (rotation) can be stabilized.

  On the other hand, in a section where the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight prior to the pushing-up by the connecting second member 9770, the preceding of the second displacement member 740 can be ensured using the center of gravity G '. As a result, the rotation from the intersection angle β4 to the intersection angle β1 can be performed at a higher speed (short time) immediately before being placed at the retracted position.

  Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 130. In the first embodiment, a case where relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed in both the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position will be described. However, in the left rotation unit 11700 in the eleventh embodiment, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed only in the forward path and not in the return path. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 11700 in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 122 shows a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 11700 (the rear base 710 and the front base 720) is assembled.

  As shown in FIG. 122, in the left rotation unit 11700 in the eleventh embodiment, the second displacement member 740 and the connected second member 11770 are connected by a rack and pinion mechanism including a pinion gear 11747 and a rack gear 11774. In this case, as will be described later, since the pinion gear 11747 is configured as a one-way clutch, the linear motion of the connecting second member 11770 is converted into the rotational motion of the second displacement member 740 in the forward path, while the second connecting gear in the return path By restricting the linear motion of the member 11770 from being converted into the rotational motion of the second displacement member 740, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be formed only in the forward path.

  The pinion gear 11747 is formed as a cam-type one-way clutch in which a roller and a spring are interposed between an inner ring and an outer ring. A rotation shaft 741 of a second displacement member 740 is fastened and fixed to the inner ring, and a rack gear 11774 is disposed on the outer periphery of the outer ring. Gears meshed with each other are engraved. In this case, when the outer ring is rotated clockwise in the rear view of the second displacement member 740, the pinion gear 11747 transmits the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740), while the outer ring rotates counterclockwise. Then, the transmission of the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740) is cut off.

  The rack gear 11774 is a gear carved on the side surface of the connecting second member 11770 and meshes with the pinion gear 11747. Note that the engraved range of the rack gear 11774 is a range in which the engagement with the pinion gear 11747 is released in a state where the second connecting member 11770 is pulled down to the maximum (see FIGS. 126 (b) and 129). ).

  A biasing spring SP formed as a metal torsion spring is interposed between the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740. The urging spring SP has an arm extended from one end of the coil portion to the first displacement member 730 in a state where the coil portion is externally fitted to the rotation shaft 741 and is elastically twisted and deformed. The arm extending from the other end of the coil portion is locked to the second displacement member 740, and the elastic recovery force is expressed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2). In the direction to maintain the angle formed by the crossing angle γ1.

  Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 11700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 130.

  Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides on the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), whereby the connection first member 760 and the connection second member. When the 11770, the first displacement member 730, and the second displacement member 740 are respectively displaced, the connection first member 760 and the displacement mode of the connection second member 11770 and the first displacement member 730 are the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as that of the embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126, the operation of the left rotation unit 11700 when operating the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

  123 and 124 are front views of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state when the forward path is operated from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 125 and 126 are directed from the retracted position to the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state at the time of operating a forward path.

  As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 125 (a), at the retracted position, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is an intersection angle. γ1. In this case, the connection 2nd member 11770 is made into the state pushed up most up (the upper part of Drawing 125 (a)).

  From this state, when the transmission member 754 is driven to rotate in the forward direction (FIG. 125 (a) clockwise), the connecting first member 760 extends in the protruding direction (FIG. 125 (a) counterclockwise with the rotation shaft 761 as the center of rotation). The first displacement member 730 is rotated in the protruding direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110 (a)) with the rotation shaft 731 as the rotation center. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the protruding direction as shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 126 (a) through the state shown in FIGS. 123 (b) and 125 (b).

  Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the protruding direction, the connecting second member 11770 is drawn downward (lower side in FIG. 125A), so that the rack gear 11774 of the connecting second member 11770 is pinion gear. The 11747 (outer ring) is rotated clockwise in FIG. 125 (a). The rotation of the outer ring in this direction is a rotation in a direction in which the rotation is transmitted to the inner ring (second displacement member 740).

  Therefore, after the state shown in FIGS. 123 (b) and 125 (b), as shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 126 (a), the second displacement member 740 is moved by the biasing spring SP (see FIG. 122). ) Further elastically deforming in the torsional direction, the angle between the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is relatively rotated with respect to the first displacement member 730. The crossing angle is changed (increased) from the crossing angle γ1 to the crossing angle γ3 via the crossing angle γ2 (γ1 <γ2 <γ3).

  Thereafter, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. 124 (b) and 126 (b), the first displacement member 730 protrudes to the maximum, and the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the overhang position.

  In this case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 124 (b) and 126 (b), when the connecting second member 11770 is drawn to the lowest position, the meshing of the rack gear 11774 and the pinion gear 11747 is released. Thereby, the second displacement member 740 receives the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP (see FIG. 122) and returns to the initial position. That is, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is returned (decreased) from the intersection angle γ3 to the intersection angle γ1.

  Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 11700 when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130.

  127 and 128 are front views of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position, and FIGS. 129 and 130 are directed from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 11 is a schematic back view of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state when operating on the return path. 127A is the same as FIG. 124B, and FIG. 128B is the same as FIG. 123A.

  Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 127 (b) and 129 (b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 126 (a). Yes, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 128 (a) and 130 (a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 123 (b) and 125 (b). .

  Contrary to the above-described case (outward path shown in FIGS. 123 to 126), the transmission member 754 is moved in the reverse direction (FIG. 129 (a) counterclockwise) from the extended position shown in FIGS. 127 (a) and 129 (a). When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 129 (a)) with the rotation shaft 761 as the rotation center, the first displacement member 730 causes the rotation shaft 731 to rotate. It is rotated in the retracting direction (FIG. 129 (a) clockwise) as the center of rotation. Thereby, the first displacement member 730 passes through the states shown in FIGS. 127 (b) and 128 (a), FIGS. 129 (b) and 130 (a), and FIGS. 128 (b) and 130 (b). As shown in FIG.

  Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the connecting second member 11770 is pushed upward (upper left in FIG. 129 (a)), so that in FIGS. 127 (b) and 129 (b). As shown, the rack gear 11774 is engaged with the pinion gear 11747, and the connecting second member 11770 is further pushed upward, whereby the rack gear 11774 rotates the pinion gear 11747 (outer ring) counterclockwise in FIG. 129 (b). The rotation of the outer ring in this direction is a rotation in a direction that cuts off the transmission of the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740).

  Therefore, from the state shown in FIGS. 127 (b) and 129 (b), through the state shown in FIGS. 128 (a) and 130 (a), the retracted position shown in FIGS. 128 (b) and 130 (b). The second displacement member 740 is not rotated relative to the first displacement member 730 until the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2). Is maintained at the crossing angle γ1.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the forward path, the first displacement member 730 is rotated with respect to the first displacement member 730 as the first displacement member 730 rotates (tilts) in the protruding direction with respect to the back base 710 and the front base 720. The two displacement members 740 are gradually relatively displaced, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is increased from the intersection angle γ1 to the intersection angle γ3. In the overhang position, a displacement mode that changes to the intersection angle γ1 is formed, while in the return path, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is not formed (that is, the first displacement member 730 (virtual line). M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) are maintained at the crossing angle γ1), and the first displacement member 730 rotates in the retracting direction with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720 ( It can form a stand) displaced manner.

  Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. In the first embodiment, the case where the base side engaging member 726 is fixed in a state of protruding from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. However, the base side engaging member 12726 in the twelfth embodiment is the front base 12720. It is arrange | positioned so that it can appear in front of. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 131 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit 12700 in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 132 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 12720, and FIG. 132 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 12720 taken along line CXXXIIb-CXXXIIb in FIG. 132 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, in the left rotation unit 12700 in the twelfth embodiment, the base side engagement member 12726 and the transmission member 12728 are housed in the internal space of the front base 12720, and the second displacement member. An insertion member 12745 is disposed on the back surface of the 12740.

  The base-side engaging member 12726 is slidably disposed along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 12720 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction (FIG. 132 (a) vertical direction on the paper surface, FIG. 132 (b) vertical direction). 12726c, and a base portion 726a and a bent portion 726b are formed in front of the slide portion 12726c (the front side in FIG. 132 (a) and the lower side in FIG. 132 (b)).

  The base side engaging member 12726 is slidably displaced toward the front along a guide groove (not shown) so that the base 726a and the bent portion 726b are moved from the receiving recess 727 to the front side (FIG. 132 (a) paper surface. The slide portion 12726c slides along the guide groove (not shown) toward the back side (the back side in FIG. 132 (a) and the top side in FIG. 132 (b)). By being displaced, the base portion 726 a and the bent portion 726 b can be immersed in the receiving recess 727.

  In this case, an urging spring SP1 made of a coil spring is disposed between the front surface of the slide portion 12726c and the rear surface of the front base 12720 in an elastically compressed state, and the elastic recovery of the urging spring SP1 is achieved. The base side engaging member 12726 is maintained in the immersed state (the state shown in FIG. 132B) by the force. In this immersion state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b and the front surface of the front base 12720 are disposed flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the base-side engagement member 12726.

  The side surface (left side of FIG. 132 (b)) of the slide portion 12726c is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined in a direction away from the transmission member 12728 as it goes to the back side, and the inclined surface of the transmission member 12728 is formed on the inclined surface. Abutted.

  The transmission member 12728 is disposed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction (FIG. 132 (a) left-right direction, FIG. 132 (b) left-right direction) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 12720, and is disposed at one end side (FIG. 132 ( b) The right side) is exposed from the insertion opening 12720a formed in the side surface of the front base 12720. Further, on the other end side (the left side in FIG. 132 (b)) of the transmission member 12728, an inclined surface is formed which is inclined in a direction away from the base side engaging member 12726 toward the front side. The inclined surface of the base side engaging member 12726 is brought into contact.

  Therefore, the base-side engagement member 12726 is moved to the front side by sliding the transmission member 12728 toward the base-side engagement member 12726 by the action of the inclined surfaces of the base-side engagement member 12726 and the transmission member 12728. The base side engagement member 12726 is slid to the back side (inside the receiving recess 727) by sliding the transmission member 12728 in a direction away from the base side engagement member 12726. Can be displaced (immersive).

  An urging spring SP2 made of a coil spring is disposed between the transmission member 12728 and the front base 12720 in a state of being elastically pulled and deformed, and the transmission member is caused by the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP2. 12728 is maintained at a position spaced from the base side engaging member 12726 (the position shown in FIG. 132 (b), that is, the position where the base side engaging member 12726 is immersed).

  The pressing member 12745 includes a base portion 12745a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 12740, and an insertion portion 12745b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 12745a. In the pressing member 12745, the standing height of the base portion 12745 a is made higher than the standing height of the base portion of the displacement side engaging member 742 so that the insertion portion 12745 b can be inserted into the insertion port 12720 a of the front base 12720. At the same time, the extending direction of the insertion portion 12745b is the same direction (parallel) as the extending direction of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 742.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the engaging action by the base side engaging member 12726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 will be described.

  FIG. 133 is a partial cross-sectional schematic view of the left rotation unit 12700 for explaining the engagement action by the base side engagement member 12726 and the displacement side engagement member 742, and the second displacement member 12740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state when being done is schematically illustrated. Note that the second displacement member 12740 approaches the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 133 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 133 (c), and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed at the retreat position.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (a), when the second displacement member 12740 is displaced toward the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 133 (a)) with respect to the front base 12720, first, the insertion portion 12745b of the pressing member 12745 is moved. The tip is brought into contact with one end side of the transmission member 12728 through the insertion opening 12720a of the front base 12720.

  When the second displacement member 12740 is further displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 133 (a)) with respect to the front base 12720 from the state shown in FIG. 133 (a), the insertion portion 12745b of the pressing member 12745 is The transmission member 12728 is pushed in the direction approaching the base side engaging member 12726 by being inserted into the front base 12720 from the insertion port 12720a against the urging force of the urging springs SP1 and SP2. )

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 133 (b) and 133 (c), the base side engaging member 12726 is gradually projected toward the front surface of the front base 12720, and is displaced toward the base side engaging member 12726. The side engaging members 742 are brought close to each other, and the respective bent portions 726b and 742b enter the inner surfaces of the counterpart bent portions 726b and 742b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 133 (d), when the second displacement member 12740 is disposed at the retracted position, the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bending portions 726b and 742b can be engaged with each other. As a result, it is possible to suppress the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 12740 from tilting in a direction away from the front base 12720.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 12740 are projected to the projecting position, the base-side engagement member 12726 is received by the receiving recess 727 by the elastic recovery force of the biasing springs SP1 and SP2. I can be immersed inside. That is, in the immersion state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b of the base side engaging member 12726 can be disposed flush with the front surface of the front base 12720. Thereby, even when the front surface of the front base 12720 is exposed, the base-side engagement member 12726 is hardly visible to the player, and the appearance can be improved.

  Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 136. In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base side engaging member 726 protruding from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. The displacement-side engagement member 13742 of the second displacement member 13740 in the form is engaged with the wall surface on the front side of the front base 13720. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 134 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 13700 in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 135 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 13720, and FIG. 135 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 13720 taken along line CXXXVb-CXXXVb in FIG. 135 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, the left rotation unit 13700 in the thirteenth embodiment has a front base 13720, its front side (FIG. 135 (a) front side, FIG. 135 (b) lower side), and side surface side. An opening 13720a connected to the right side (FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b) right side) is formed, and a rotation member 13726 is rotatably arranged in a space formed by the opening 13720a.

  The rotating member 13726 is formed in a cross-sectional shape from a side surface portion 13726a that closes the side surface side of the front base 13720 and a front surface portion 13726b that closes the front side of the front base 13720 in the opening 13720a. One side (the opposite side of the front portion 13726b) is pivotally supported.

  That is, the turning member 13726 is arranged at an initial position (position shown in FIGS. 134 and 135) that closes the opening 13720a by being turned to one side around the pivotal support portion of the side face portion 13726a. By being pivoted to the other side around the shaft support portion of the side surface portion 13726a, it is immersed in the front base 13720.

  In this case, an urging spring SP3 made of a torsion spring is disposed between the front base 13720 and the rotating member 13726 in a state of being elastically torsionally deformed, and due to the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP3, The rotating member 13726 is maintained at the initial position. In this initial position, the front surface of the front portion 13726b and the side surface of the side surface portion 13726a and the front surface and the side surface of the front base 13720 are arranged flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the rotating member 13726.

  The displacement-side engagement member 13742 includes a base portion 13742a that is erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 13740, and a bent portion 742b that is formed by bending the tip of the base portion 13742a and has an inner surface as an engagement surface. Note that the standing height of the base portion 13742a is set to a height at which the bent portion 742b can contact the side surface portion 13726a of the rotating member 13726. Accordingly, when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b can rotate the rotating member 13726 in the immersion direction along with the displacement (see FIG. 136).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the engaging action by the front base 13720 and the displacement side engaging member 13742 will be described.

  FIG. 136 is a partial schematic cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 13700 for explaining the engagement action by the front base 13720 and the displacement side engagement member 13742. When the second displacement member 13740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition states are schematically illustrated. The second displacement member 13740 approaches the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 136 (a) toward the state shown in FIG. 136 (b), and the state shown in FIG. 136 (c) is the same as that of the second displacement member 13740. Corresponds to the state of being placed at the retreat position.

  As shown in FIG. 136 (a), when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced toward the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 136 (a)) with respect to the front base 13720, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 13742 is obtained. The tip of this is brought into contact with the side surface portion 13726a of the rotating member 13726.

  When the second displacement member 13740 is further displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 136 (a)) with respect to the front base 13720 from the state shown in FIG. 136 (a), the bent portion of the displacement side engagement member 13742 742b pushes (rotates) the rotating member 13726 in the immersion direction against the urging force of the urging spring SP3.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 136 (b), the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 13742 gradually enters the internal space of the front base 13720 through the opening 13720a, and is shown in FIG. 136 (c). As described above, when the second displacement member 13740 is disposed at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engagement member 13742 can face the rear surface of the front base 13720 so as to be engageable. As a result, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 13740 can be prevented from tilting in a direction away from the front base 13720.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 13740 are extended to the extended position, the rotating member 13726 is disposed (returned) to the initial position by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP3. Can be made. That is, in the initial position, the front surface of the front portion 13726b and the side surface of the side surface portion 13726a can be arranged flush with the front surface and the side surface of the front base 13720, respectively. Thereby, even when the front surface and the side surface of the front base 13720 are exposed, the opening 13720a and the rotation member 13726 are hardly seen by the player, and the appearance can be improved.

  Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 139. In the first embodiment, the case where the base side engaging member 726 is fixed in a state of protruding from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. However, the base side engaging member 14726 in the fourteenth embodiment is the front base 14720. It is arrange | positioned so that it can appear in front of. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 137 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 14700 in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 138 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the left rotation unit 14700 in a state in which the second displacement member 740 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 138 (b) is a CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb line in FIG. 138 (a). It is a partial expanded cross-section schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 14700 in FIG. FIG. 139 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the left rotation unit 14700 in a state where the second displacement member 740 is disposed at the extended position, and FIG. 139 (b) is a diagram of CXXXIXb of FIG. 139 (a). It is a partial expanded cross section schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 14700 in the -CXXXIXb line.

  As shown in FIGS. 137 to 139, in the left rotation unit 14700 in the fourteenth embodiment, the base side engaging member 14726 is housed in the internal space of the front base 14720, and one end in the longitudinal direction of the rack member 14752 ( A transmission portion 14752b is formed on the front side of FIG.

  The base-side engaging member 14726 includes a slide portion 14726c that is slidably disposed in the front-rear direction (FIG. 138 (b) and FIG. 139 (b) left-right direction) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 14720. A base portion 726a and a bent portion 726b are formed on the front surface (the left side surface in FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b)) of the slide portion 14726c.

  The base-side engaging member 14726 is slidably displaced toward the front along a guide groove (not shown) so that the base 726a and the bent portion 726b are moved from the receiving recess 727 to the front side (the left side in FIG. 138 (b)). ) (See FIG. 138), and the slide portion 14726c is slid toward the back side (right side in FIG. 139 (b)) along a guide groove (not shown), thereby receiving the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b. It can be immersed in the recess 727 (see FIG. 139).

  In this case, an urging spring SP4 made of a coil spring is disposed between the back surface of the slide portion 14726c and the front surface of the back surface base 710 in an elastically deformed state, and the urging spring SP4 is elastically restored. The base side engaging member 14726 is maintained in the immersed state (the state shown in FIG. 139 (b)) by the force. In this immersion state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b and the front surface of the front base 14720 are disposed flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the base-side engagement member 14726.

  The back surface (the right side of FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b)) of the slide portion 14726c is inclined in a direction away from the rack member 14752 as it goes upward (the upper side of FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b)). It is formed as an inclined surface, and the inclined surface (front surface) of the transmission portion 14752b of the rack member 14752 is in contact with the inclined surface.

  A base side engaging member 14726 (sliding portion) is provided on the front side (the left side in FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b)) of the transmission portion 14752b as it goes downward (lower side in FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b)). 14726c), an inclined surface inclined in a direction away from the inclined surface is formed, and the inclined surface of the slide portion 14726c is brought into contact with the inclined surface.

  Therefore, as the rack member 14752 is displaced downward by the action of the inclined surfaces of the base side engaging member 14726 and the transmission portion 14752b, the base side engaging member 14726 is slid to the front side (direction protruding from the receiving recess 727). In addition to being able to be displaced, as the rack member 14752 is displaced upward, the base-side engaging member 14726 can be slid to the rear side (in the direction of immersing into the receiving recess 727).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 138, when the rack member 14752 is displaced to the lowermost position and the second displacement member 740 is disposed at the retracted position, the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b are displaced. The first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be prevented from tilting in a direction away from the front base 14720.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 139, when the rack member 14752 is displaced to the uppermost position and the second displacement member 740 is disposed at the extended position, the base side engagement is caused by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP4. The member 14726 can be immersed in the receiving recess 727. That is, in the immersed state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b of the base side engaging member 14726 can be arranged flush with the front surface of the front base 14720. Thereby, even when the front surface of the front base 14720 is exposed, the base-side engagement member 14726 is hardly visible to the player, and the appearance can be improved.

  Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 142. In the first embodiment, the case where the base-side engagement member 726 is fixed in a state of protruding from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. However, the base-side engagement member 15726 in the fifteenth embodiment is the front base 15720. It is arrange | positioned so that a slide displacement is possible in the front. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 140 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 15700 in the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 141 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 15720, and FIG. 134 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 15720 along the CXLIb-CXLIb line in FIG. 141 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 140 and 141, the left rotation unit 15700 according to the fifteenth embodiment has a front base 15720, its front side (FIG. 141 (a) front side of FIG. 141, lower side of FIG. 141 (b)) and side surface side. An opening 15720a that continues to the right side (FIG. 141 (a) and FIG. 141 (b) right side) is formed, and the front side of the front base 15720 (the lower side in FIG. 141 (b)) in the space formed by the opening 15720a. A base-side engagement member 15726 is slidably disposed in the portion.

  The base side engaging member 15726 is formed in a flat plate shape having substantially the same shape as the front side of the front base 15720 in the opening 15720a (that is, a shape closing the opening 15720a in a front view), and is formed on the front base 15720. The first guide groove 15720b1 and the second guide groove 15720b2 are disposed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction (FIG. 141 (a) and FIG. 141 (b) left-right direction).

  The first guide groove 15720b1 is formed with a first inclination angle with respect to the left-right direction of the front base 15720 (FIG. 141 (b) left-right direction) in the top view shown in FIG. 141 (b). The guide groove 15720b2 is formed with an inclination angle (second inclination angle) smaller than the inclination angle of the first guide groove 15720b1 with respect to the left-right direction of the front base 15720 (FIG. 141 (b) left-right direction). The In the present embodiment, the second inclination angle is 0 °. That is, the second guide groove 15720b2 is formed in parallel to the left-right direction of the front base 15720.

  Therefore, the base-side engagement member 15726 is guided along the first guide groove 15720b1 from the initial position shown in FIG. 141 (b), so that the rear side of the front base 15720 obliquely rearward (FIG. 141 (b)). The left side of the front base 15720 is slid and displaced toward the side of the front base 15720 (the left side of FIG. 141 (b)). It is immersed in the base 15720.

  In this case, a biasing spring (not shown) made of a coil spring is disposed between the front base 15720 and the base-side engagement member 15726 in a state of being elastically tensioned and deformed. The base side engaging member 15726 is maintained in the initial position by the elastic recovery force. In this initial position, the front side of the base side engagement member 15726 (the front side of FIG. 141 (a) and the lower side of FIG. 141 (b)) and the front side of the front base 15720 are arranged flush with each other. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the side engagement member 15726.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the engaging action by the base side engaging member 15726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 will be described.

  FIG. 142 is a partial schematic cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 15700 for explaining the engagement action by the base side engagement member 15726 and the displacement side engagement member 742, and the second displacement member 740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state when being done is schematically illustrated. Note that the second displacement member 740 approaches the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 142 (a) toward the state shown in FIG. 142 (c), and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed at the retreat position.

  As shown in FIGS. 142 (a) and 142 (b), when the second displacement member 740 is displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 142 (a)) with respect to the front base 15720, the displacement-side engagement is performed. The distal end of the bent portion 742b of the member 742 is inserted into the front base 15720 through the opening 15720a, and the base portion 742a of the displacement side engaging member 742 is brought into contact with the side surface of the base side engaging member 15726.

  When the second displacement member 740 is further displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 142 (b)) with respect to the front base 15720 from the state shown in FIG. 142 (b), as shown in FIG. 142 (c). The base portion 742a of the displacement side engaging member 742 pushes the base side engaging member 15726 along the first guide groove 15720b1 in the immersing direction against the urging force of the urging spring (slides). When the second displacement member 740 is further displaced in the retracting direction from the state shown in FIG. 142 (c), the base side engaging member 15726 is pushed in the immersion direction along the second guide groove 15720b2 (slide displacement). )

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 142 (d), when the second displacement member 740 is disposed at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742 b of the displacement side engagement member 742 is placed on the back surface of the base side engagement member 15726. , Can be faced so as to be engageable. As a result, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be prevented from tilting in the direction away from the front base 15720 (the lower side in FIG. 142 (c)).

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are extended to the extended position, the base-side engagement member 15726 is disposed at the initial position (returned) by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring. ). That is, at the initial position, the front surface of the base side engaging member 15726 can be disposed flush with the front surface of the front base 15720. Thereby, even when the front surface of the front base 15720 is exposed, the opening 15720a and the base-side engagement member 15726 are hardly seen by the player, and the appearance can be improved.

  Next, the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base side engaging member 726 protruding from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. The displacement-side engagement member 16742 of the second displacement member 16740 in the form is engaged with the inner edge of the opening 16720a of the front base 16720. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 143 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 16700 in the sixteenth embodiment. 144 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 16720, and FIG. 144 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 16720 along the line CXLIVb-CXLIVb in FIG. 144 (a).

  FIG. 145 is a partial schematic cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 16700 for explaining the engaging action by the front base 16720 (opening 16720a) and the displacement side engaging member 16742, and the second displacement member 16740 is moved to the retracted position. The transition state at the time of being displaced toward is shown schematically. As the state shown in FIG. 145 (a) moves from the state shown in FIG. 145 (b) toward the state shown in FIG. 145 (b), the second displacement member 16740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed at the retreat position.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 to 145, in the left rotation unit 16700 in the sixteenth embodiment, an opening 16720a is formed on the side surface (the right side surface in FIGS. 135 (a) and 135 (b)) of the front base 16720. .

  The displacement-side engagement member 16742 includes a base portion 16742a that is erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 16740, and a bent portion 742b that is formed by bending the tip of the base portion 16742a and has an inner surface as an engagement surface. Note that the standing height of the base portion 16742a is set to a height at which the bent portion 742b can be inserted into the opening 16720a of the front base 16720.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the second displacement member 16740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engagement member 16742 is associated with the front base via the opening 16720a. When the second displacement member 16740 is gradually moved into the internal space of the 16720 and the second displacement member 16740 is disposed at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engagement member 16742 is engaged with the inner edge of the opening 16720a of the front base 16720. It is possible to face each other. As a result, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 16740 can be prevented from tilting in a direction away from the front base 16720.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, it is only necessary to open the opening 16720a in the front base 16720, and it is not necessary to provide a base-side engagement member. Therefore, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. Further, since the opening 16720a is disposed on the side surface of the front base 16720, when the second displacement member 16740 is displaced in the protruding direction and the front surface of the front base 16720 is exposed, the opening 16720a is visually recognized by the player. It is difficult to improve the appearance.

  Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base side engaging member 726 protruding from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. The displacement-side engagement member 17742 of the second displacement member 17740 in the form is engaged with the back surface of the back surface base 710. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 146 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 17700 in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 147 is a schematic top view of the left rotation unit 17700 for explaining the engagement action by the back base 710 and the displacement side engagement member 17742, and the second displacement member 17740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state is shown schematically.

  As the state shown in FIG. 147 (a) moves from the state shown in FIG. 147 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 147 (b), the second displacement member 17740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed at the retreat position.

  As shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, in the left rotation unit 17700 in the seventeenth embodiment, the entire front and side surfaces on one end side in the longitudinal direction of the front base 17720 (upper side in FIG. 146) are formed as decorative surfaces. That is, the front base 17720 is formed in a shape in which the base side engaging member 726 and the receiving recess 727 are omitted from the front base 720 in the first embodiment.

  The displacement-side engagement member 17742 includes a base portion 17742a that is erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 17740, and a bent portion 742b that is formed by bending the tip of the base portion 17742a and has an inner surface as an engagement surface. Note that the standing height of the base portion 17742a is set to a height at which the inner surface of the bent portion 742b can face the back surface of the back surface base 710 at a predetermined interval.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the second displacement member 17740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 17742 is gradually moved toward the back side of the back surface base 710 along with the displacement. When the second displacement member 17740 is disposed at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engagement member 17742 can be engaged with the back surface of the back surface base 710 so as to be engageable. As a result, it is possible to suppress the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 17740 from tilting in a direction away from the front base 17720.

  In particular, in this embodiment, since it is not necessary to provide the base-side engaging member on the front base 17720, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since it is not necessary to form an opening in the side surface of the front base 17720, it is possible to avoid the functional part unrelated to the decoration being visually recognized by the player and to improve the appearance of the front base 17720. Can do. In other words, it is not necessary to make it difficult for the player to see the side surface of the front base 17720 by the second displacement member 17740 disposed at the overhang position, so that the amount of overhang of the second displacement member 17740 is increased to enhance the effect. be able to.

  Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151. In the right rotation unit 600 of the first embodiment, the operation of displacing (standing) the first displacement member 630 tilted in the protruding direction toward the retracted position (standing operation of the first displacement member 630) is performed by the drive motor 650. Although the case where the rotation is performed only by the rotational driving force has been described, the rising operation of the first displacement member 630 in the right rotation unit 18600 of the eighteenth embodiment uses the action of inertial force in addition to the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650. Done. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of the right rotation unit 18600 in the eighteenth embodiment. 149 is a front view of the right rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 150 is when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position. It is a rear view of the right rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section.

  149 (a) and 150 (a) show a state in which the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 18640 are arranged at the overhanging position (that is, FIGS. 34 (c) and 36 (c)). Corresponding to FIGS. 149 (b) and 150 (b) correspond to FIGS. 34 (b) and 36 (b), and FIGS. 149 (c) and 150 (c) correspond to FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b). This corresponds to 36 (a).

  FIG. 151 is a schematic back view of the right rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIGS. 151 (a), 151 (b) and FIG. 151 (c) corresponds to FIGS. 150 (a), 150 (b), and 150 (c), respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 148, the right rotation unit 18600 in the eighteenth embodiment has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped contacted portion 18629 from the front of the front base 18620, and the decorative portion 642b of the connecting displacement member 18642 of the second displacement member 18640. A substantially cylindrical abutting portion 18644 protrudes from the back surface. The contact portion 18644 is disposed at the end portion on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) in the longitudinal direction of the connection displacement member 18642.

  As shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, the abutted portion 18629 and the abutting portion 18644 are in the middle when the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 18640 are displaced from the extended position toward the retracted position. In a predetermined section, the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 18644 is formed so as to be able to contact the upper surface of the contacted portion 18629 (the upper surface in FIG. 148).

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 149 (b), 150 (b), and 151 (b) from the overhang positions shown in FIGS. 149 (a), 150 (a), and 151 (a), The connecting displacement member 18642 is rotated about the support shaft 633 (the shaft support hole 642a) as the center of rotation so as to be retracted to the back surface of the first displacement member 630, and FIGS. 149 (c), 150 (c), and 151 (c). ), When the connecting displacement member 18642 is rotated to the maximum about the support shaft 633 (the shaft support hole 642a), the contact portion 18644 contacts the upper surface of the contacted portion 18629.

  From the states shown in FIGS. 149 (c), 150 (c), and 151 (c), the rotation (standing) of the first displacement member 630 toward the retracted position with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation center is started. (See FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b)), the contact portion 18644 is separated from the upper surface of the contacted portion 18629, and the contacted portion 18629 and the contact portion 18644 are separated. The contact is released.

  In this case, in the section until the contact portion 18644 contacts the contacted portion 18629 (that is, the section shown in FIGS. 149, 150, and 151), the drive motor 650 moves only the second displacement member 18640. It only needs to be rotationally driven and the driving load is relatively small. That is, this section is a section in which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, so that only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 is rotationally driven. It is assumed that the load. In addition, since the displacement direction of the connecting displacement member 18642 is a direction that descends downward in the direction of gravity, the load on the drive motor 650 is also reduced from this point.

  On the other hand, in a state where the contact portion 18644 is in contact with the contacted portion 18629, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Therefore, from this state, not only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 630 is added as a load for rotational driving of the drive motor 650. In particular, from this state, since the first displacement member 630 is erected against gravity, the load of the drive motor 650 is rapidly increased from this point.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the contact portion 18644 is provided at the end of the connection displacement member 18642 opposite to the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633), and the connection displacement member 18642 rotates the support shaft 633. When rotating about the center, the contact portion 18644 contacts the contacted portion 18629 of the front base 18620 (see FIG. 151 (c)).

  That is, the rotation of the connecting displacement member 18642 around the support shaft 633 as a rotation center can be regulated by the contact of the contacted portion 18629 and the contact portion 18644, and the rotation of the connecting displacement member 18642 can be stopped suddenly. The inertial force of the connecting displacement member 18642 generated by the sudden stop is a force in the direction in which the first displacement member 630 is displaced in the retracting direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation center (i.e., the arrow in FIG. 151 (c)). F) can be applied to the first displacement member 630.

  As a result, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, and not only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 630. In addition, the inertial force described above can be used as a force assisting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650 when added as a rotational driving load of the driving motor 650. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive motor 650, to stabilize the displacement of the displacement members 630 and 18640 from the extended position toward the retracted position, and to improve the durability of the drive motor 650. It is possible to improve the performance.

  Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160. In the right rotation unit 18600 of the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the contact portion 18644 of the connection displacement member 18642 is contacted with the contacted portion 18629 of the front base 18620 has been described, but the connection displacement member 19642 according to the nineteenth embodiment. The abutting portion 19644 is abutted against the abutted portion 19639 provided on the first displacement member 19630. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  152 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 19600 in the nineteenth embodiment, and FIG. 153 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 19600.

  As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, the right rotation unit 19600 according to the nineteenth embodiment includes a driven member 19641 of the second displacement member 19640 and a connection portion of the connection displacement member 19642 (a connection groove 641c and a connection pin 643). It is set at a position different from the case of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 29 and 30).

  Specifically, one end in the longitudinal direction of the driven member 19641 (on the opposite side to the second groove 641b across the shaft support hole 641a, the upper side in FIGS. 152 and 153) extends while being curved in an arc shape, and the curved portion thereof A connecting groove 641c is disposed on the extending distal end side. By this curved portion, interference between the driven member 19641 and the shaft support hole 642a of the connecting displacement member 19642 is avoided. The connecting displacement member 19642 is formed by projecting a plate-like overhanging portion 19642c outward from the shaft support hole 642a, and a connecting pin 643 projects from the front side of the overhanging portion 19642c.

  In this case, in the first embodiment described above, the shaft center of the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) of the driven member 641 and the shaft of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connecting displacement member 19642 are used. The connecting portion (the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643) of the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 is positioned inside (center side) the virtual circle that passes through the heart.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a hypothesis passing through the axis of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connection displacement member 19642 is centered on the shaft center of the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) of the driven member 19641. On the outside of the circle, the connecting portion (the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643) of the driven member 19641 and the connecting displacement member 19642 is positioned.

  Therefore, the direction of relative rotation of the connecting displacement member 19642 with respect to the first displacement member 19630 is opposite to that in the first embodiment. Here, the relative rotation in the reverse direction will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 157.

  154 and 155 are front views of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 156 and 157 operate between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state at the time of doing.

  Note that FIGS. 154 (a), 154 (b), and 154 (c) are the same as FIGS. 156 (a), 156 (b), and 156 (c), respectively, and FIG. ), FIG. 155 (b) and FIG. 155 (c) are the same states as FIG. 157 (a), FIG. 157 (b) and FIG. 157 (c), respectively. 154 (c) is the same as FIG. 155 (a), and FIG. 156 (c) is the same as FIG. 157 (a).

  Here, the right rotation unit 19600 according to the nineteenth embodiment has a relative rotation with respect to the first displacement member 19630 of the connection displacement member 19642 due to the difference in position of the connection portion (the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643) described above. Since the other operation modes are formed substantially the same except that the direction is the direction opposite to the direction of the first embodiment, the description of the same part will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 154 and 156, in the retracted position, the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (FIG. 156 (a) clockwise), and the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 has the first groove 635 (operation). By pushing down the section 635a) and the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b in the projecting direction, the first displacement member 19630 is rotated (tilted) in the projecting direction integrally with the second displacement member 19640.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 157 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 155 (a) and 157 (a), the drive pin 654b is moved to the first displacement member 19630. The inner wall surface of the second groove 641b of the driven member 19641 is pushed downward (downward in FIG. 157 (a)) while passing through the non-interference section 635b of the first groove 635.

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 155 (b) and 157 (b), the driven member 19641 is rotated in the direction of raising the connecting groove 641c about the support shaft 632 (FIG. 157 (b) counterclockwise). The rotation of the driven member 19641 is transmitted to the connection displacement member 19642 via the connection of the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643, and the connection displacement member 19642 lowers the decoration portion 642b with the support shaft 633 as the rotation center. It is rotated in the direction (FIG. 108 (b) counterclockwise).

  That is, while the first displacement member 19630 is stopped, the connection displacement portion 19642 is relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to the first displacement member 19630 in the direction opposite to that in the first embodiment. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 155 (c) and 157 (c), the drive pin 654 b of the transmission member 654 moves the non-interference section 635 b and the second displacement member 19640 in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630. By reaching the end of the two grooves 641b, the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 are disposed at the overhang position.

  Returning to FIG. 152 and FIG. In the present embodiment, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped contacted portion 19639 is projected from the back surface of the first displacement member 19630, and a substantially cylindrical abutting portion 19644 is projected from the front surface of the decorative portion 642b of the connecting displacement member 19642. . The contacted portion 19639 is disposed between the rotation shaft 631 and the support shaft 632 in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 19630.

  The abutted portion 19639 and the abutting portion 19644 are abutted portion 19639 in a predetermined section in the middle of the displacement of the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 from the extended position toward the retracted position. The outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 19644 is formed so as to be able to contact the side surface (the surface on the right side of FIG. 153). Here, the effect | action by contact | abutting of the to-be-contacted part 19639 and the contact part 19644 is demonstrated with reference to FIGS. 158-160.

  158 is a front view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 159 is when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position. It is a rear view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section.

  158 (a) and 159 (a) show a state in which the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 are arranged at the overhanging position (that is, FIGS. 155 (c) and 157 (c)). Corresponding to FIGS. 158 (b) and 159 (b) correspond to FIGS. 155 (b) and 157 (b), and FIGS. 158 (c) and 159 (c) correspond to FIGS. Corresponds to 157 (a).

  FIG. 160 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position. FIG. 160 (a), FIG. 160 (b) and FIG. 160 (c) corresponds to FIGS. 159 (a), 159 (b), and 159 (c), respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 158 (b), 159 (b) and 160 (b) from the overhanging position shown in FIGS. 158 (a), 159 (a) and 160 (a), the connecting displacement member 19642 Is rotated about the support shaft 633 (the shaft support hole 642a) as the center of rotation in the direction retracted to the back surface of the first displacement member 19630, as shown in FIGS. 158 (c), 159 (c) and 160 (c). When the connecting displacement member 19642 is rotated to the maximum with the support shaft 633 (the shaft support hole 642a) as the rotation center, the contact portion 19644 contacts the lower surface of the contacted portion 19639.

  In this case, in the section until the contact portion 19644 contacts the contacted portion 19639 (that is, the section shown in FIGS. 158, 159, and 160), the drive motor 650 moves only the second displacement member 19640. It only needs to be rotationally driven, and the driving load is relatively small. That is, this section is a section in which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630, so that only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 is rotationally driven. It is assumed that the load.

  On the other hand, in a state where the contact portion 19644 is in contact with the contacted portion 19639, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630. Therefore, from this state, not only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 19630 is added as a load for rotational driving of the drive motor 650. In particular, from this state, since the first displacement member 19630 is erected against gravity, the load on the drive motor 650 is rapidly increased.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the contact portion 19644 is provided on the decorative portion 642b of the connection displacement member 19642, and the connection displacement member 19642 is rotated about the support shaft 633, and the rotation of the connection displacement member 19642 is performed. Accordingly, the contact portion 19644 lifted upward comes into contact with the lower surface of the contacted portion 19639 of the first displacement member 19630 (see FIG. 160 (c)).

  In other words, the rotation of the connection displacement member 19642 around the support shaft 633 as a rotation center can be regulated by the contact of the contacted portion 19639 and the contact portion 19644, and the rotation of the connection displacement member 19642 can be stopped suddenly. The inertial force of the connecting displacement member 19642 generated by the sudden stop is a force in a direction to displace (that is, stand up) the first displacement member 19630 in the retracting direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation center (an arrow in FIG. 160 (c)). F) can act on the first displacement member 19630.

  As a result, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630, and not only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 19630. In addition, the inertial force described above can be used as a force assisting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650 when added as a rotational driving load of the driving motor 650. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive motor 650, to stabilize the displacement of each of the displacement members 19630 and 19640 from the extended position toward the retracted position, and to improve the durability of the drive motor 650. It is possible to improve the performance.

  Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. In the winning device 65 of the first embodiment, the game ball is sent from the outlet 821c to the seesaw member 840 (receiving surface 844) regardless of the state of the seesaw member 840 (that is, in either the first state or the second state). The winning device 20065 according to the twentieth embodiment has been described as being allowed, but at least in the second state, at least in the second state, the delivery of the game ball from the outlet 821c to the seesaw member 20840 (receiving surface 844) is restricted. Is done. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 161 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 20065 in the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 162 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 20065 in a state where the seesaw member 20840 forms the first state, and FIG. 162 (b) shows a winning in the state where the seesaw member 20840 forms the second state. 2 is a cross-sectional view of device 20065. FIG. Note that FIGS. 162 (a) and 162 (b) correspond to FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 161, in the prize winning device 20065 in the twentieth embodiment, a restricting portion 20848 is formed on the seesaw member 20840. The restricting portion 20848 is formed as a portion having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front from the edge of the receiving surface 844 opposite to the inclined surface 845 toward the upper side (upper side in FIG. 161).

  As shown in FIG. 162 (a), in the state where the seesaw member 20840 forms the first state, the restricting portion 20848 is positioned outside the opening region of the delivery port 821c, and thereby the opening width of the delivery port 821c. (FIG. 162 (a) dimension in the left-right direction) is maintained at a dimension W1 larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is allowed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 162 (b), in the state where the seesaw member 20840 forms the second state, the restricting portion 20848 is brought closer to the delivery port 821c side with the rotation of the seesaw member 20840, and the restricting portion 20848 A part is located inside the opening area of the outlet 821c (that is, a part of the restricting portion 20848 overlaps the opening area of the outlet 821c). As a result, the opening width of the delivery port 821c is reduced to a dimension W2 that is smaller than the diameter of the game ball (W2 <W1). Therefore, the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is restricted (prohibited).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the delivery of the game ball from the guide passage (sending port 821c) of the intermediate base 820 to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 20840 is controlled (allowed) according to the state of the seesaw member 20840. Or regulation).

  That is, in the first state, the seesaw member 20840 is rotated by sending a game ball from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 and rolling the game ball from the receiving surface 844 toward the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846. The second state can be quickly formed.

  Here, even after the seesaw member 20840 starts to rotate toward the second state, if game balls are further sent out from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844, they are sent out earlier (the receiving surface 844 received them). ) A state where the game ball is still rolling on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 is formed, and the seesaw member 20840 is easily maintained in the second state.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the seesaw member 20840 starts to rotate toward the second state, the restricting portion 20848 narrows the opening width of the delivery port 821c to the dimension W2, so that the receiving surface from the delivery port 821c. By restricting (prohibiting) the delivery of the game ball to 844, a time for discharging the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d can be secured.

  In other words, waiting for the game ball to be delivered from the outlet 821c to the receiving surface 844 until the game ball is completely discharged from the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d and there is no more game ball on the seesaw member 20840. Can be made. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, the first state and the second state can be easily switched alternately.

  Note that the dimension W2 may be larger than the diameter of the game ball as long as the dimension W2 is smaller than the dimension W1. That is, the dimension W2 may be a dimension that allows the game ball to be sent from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844. Even in this case, the opening width of the delivery port 821c is narrowed by the restricting portion 20848, so that it is difficult for the game ball to pass, and accordingly, the time required for sending the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is increased. (Can delay the passage of the game ball). As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, the first state and the second state can be easily switched alternately.

  Next, a twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the winning device 65 of the first embodiment, the case where the game ball is discharged to the discharge port 821d by rolling along the inclined surface 845 of the seesaw member 840 and the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 has been described. The winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment includes a rotating member 21870 for pushing out the game ball and discharging it to the discharge port 821d. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 163 (a) and FIG. 163 (b) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment, and correspond to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 163, the winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment includes a rotating member 21870 above the seesaw member 840. The rotating member 21870 does not interfere with the seesaw member 840 regardless of whether the seesaw member 840 is in the first state or the second state, and is in contact with the game ball on the seesaw member 840. Arranged at a possible height position.

  The rotation member 21870 is inserted with a shaft support pin (not shown) and is rotatably supported on the back surface of the front base 810. The rotation member 21870 extends from the shaft support portion 21187 to one side and is also provided with a delivery port 821c. A plate-shaped receiving plate 21872 facing to the plate, and a plate-shaped receiving plate 21872 and an extrusion plate projecting from the shaft support portion 21871 to the other side opposite to the receiving plate 21872 and facing the discharge port 821d 21873.

  The shaft support portion 21871 is disposed in a posture in which the axial center direction is along the direction of gravity (perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 163 (a)) (that is, orthogonal to the rotation shaft (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 840). The receiving plate 21882 and the extrusion plate 21873 are connected to each other with a predetermined crossing angle with the shaft support 21817 as the crossing center. Therefore, the rotation member 21870 is formed to be bent in a substantially U shape when viewed in the direction of the shaft support 211871 (gravity).

  In this case, the rotating member 21870 has the receiving plate 21873 at the rotational position along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (the left-right direction in FIG. 163 (a)) as shown in FIG. 163 (a). When the receiving plate 21872 is in a rotational position along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, as shown in FIG. 163 (b), the posture is projected above the receiving surface 844 of FIG. The extruded plate 21873 is in a posture of projecting above the inclined surface 845 and / or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840.

  In other words, the rotating member 21870 has the receiving plate 21882 at the rotational position where the extrusion plate 21873 is retracted to the side opposite to the discharge port 821d (lower side in FIG. 163 (a)), as shown in FIG. 163 (a). As shown in FIG. 163 (b), at the rotational position where the posture is advanced to the side close to 821c and the receiving plate 21882 is retracted to the opposite side (lower side of FIG. 163 (b)) to the delivery port 821c. The extrusion plate 21873 is set in a posture advanced to the side close to the discharge port 821d.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 163 (a), the game ball is still rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 from the delivery port 821c. When the game ball is sent out to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball sent out from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is received by the receiving plate 2172 of the rotating member 21870, and the rotating member 21870 receives the pushing plate 21873. Is rotated in a direction to protrude above the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846. By this rotation, as shown in FIG. 163 (b), the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be pushed out by the push plate 21873 and discharged to the discharge port 821d.

  As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged quickly to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are reduced. Alternating switching can be performed smoothly.

  The game ball delivered from the delivery port 821c is received by the receiving plate 21882 of the rotating member 21870, and the rotating member 21870 has a posture in which the extruded plate 21873 protrudes above the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846 (ie, 163 (b)), the game ball (game sphere shown on the left side of FIG. 163 (b)) received by the receiving plate 21873 moves the push plate 21873 backward while the inclined surface 845 and Since it rolls along the discharge surface 846, the rotating member 21870 can be returned to the posture in which the receiving plate 21872 protrudes above the receiving surface 844 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 163 (a)).

  In this way, the rotating member 21870 uses the rolling motion of the game ball, so that the initial position (the position at which the game ball can be received by the game ball receiving plate 21882 and the game ball can be pushed out by the push plate 21873, ie, FIG. (Position shown in (a)). Therefore, the driving by the driving means and the detection by the sensor device can be made unnecessary, so that the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Next, a twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 164 (a) and FIG. 164 (b) are partial enlarged sectional views of the winning device 22065 in the twenty-second embodiment, and correspond to FIG. FIG. 165 (a) and FIG. 165 (b) are partial enlarged sectional views of the winning device 22065 and correspond to FIG.

  Here, the prize winning device 22065 in the twenty-second embodiment has an opening 22849 formed in the seesaw member 22840 and a projecting piece 22874 projecting from the rotating member 22870 with respect to the prize winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment. Further, only the points provided are different, and the other configurations are the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, the rotating member 22870 has a plurality (three in this embodiment) of projecting pieces 22874 projecting from the lower side of the extrusion plate 21873 (seesaw member 22840 side, lower side of FIG. 165). Established. On the other hand, in the plate-like portion where the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 22840 are formed, a plurality of openings 22849 for receiving the projecting pieces 22874 are formed (in three places in this embodiment).

  The projecting piece 22874 is formed to be curved in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the seesaw member 22840 in a front view (viewed in the direction of the rotation axis (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 22840, ie, the state shown in FIG. 165). The On the other hand, the opening 22849 is curved in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the rotation member 22870 when viewed from the front (when viewed from the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation member 22870 (axial support portion 21877), that is, the state shown in FIG. 164). It is formed.

  Therefore, the seesaw member 22840 is rotated between the first state and the second state with the support shaft 821e (bearing 841) as the rotation center, and the rotation member 22870 is rotated in the movable range with the shaft support portion 18187 as the rotation center. In any case, it is possible to suppress the protrusion 22874 from being interfered with the inner edge of the opening 22849 in any state. As a result, the seesaw member 22840 and the rotation member 22870 can be made independent of each other and can be smoothly rotated.

  Here, as in the case of the twenty-first embodiment described above, when the extrusion plate 21873 of the rotating member 21870 does not include a projecting piece, the seesaw member 840 is in a state (or a state close thereto) forming the second state. When the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is pushed out to the discharge port 821d by the extrusion plate 21873, the distance between the extrusion plate 21873 and the inclination surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 Therefore, the lower part of the extrusion plate 21873 comes into contact with the upper part of the game ball (the part on the front side in FIG. 163 (a)). Therefore, the time until the push plate 21873 comes into contact with the upper portion of the game ball increases, and accordingly, it becomes difficult to quickly discharge the game ball to the discharge port 821d. In addition, it becomes difficult to sufficiently apply the rotational energy of the rotating member 21870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21882 to the game ball through the push plate 21873.

  On the other hand, according to this embodiment, since the protruding piece 22874 protrudes downward (seesaw member 22840) on the extrusion plate 21873 of the rotating member 22870, for example, as shown in FIG. 165 (b). In addition, in a state where the seesaw member 22840 forms the second state, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 22840 can be pushed out to the discharge port 821d by the projecting piece 22874.

  Therefore, in this case, the projecting piece 22874 can be brought into contact with the side portion of the game ball (the lower portion in FIG. 164 (a)). Accordingly, it is possible to shorten the time until the projecting piece 22874 comes into contact with the side portion of the game ball, and to discharge (push out) the game ball quickly to the discharge port 821d accordingly. Further, the energy of rotation of the rotating member 22870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21872 can be sufficiently applied to the game ball through the projecting piece 22874.

  As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged quickly to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are reduced. Alternating switching can be performed smoothly.

  Next, a twenty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. In the twenty-first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 21870 is disposed (rotatably supported) on the front base 810 has been described. However, the rotating member 23870 of the twenty-third embodiment is disposed on the seesaw member 840 (rotatable). Is supported by In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 166 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 23065 in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 167 (a) and FIG. 167 (b) are partial enlarged sectional views of the winning device 23065 and correspond to FIG. FIG. 168 (a) and FIG. 168 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 23065 and correspond to FIG.

  Here, the winning device 23065 in the twenty-third embodiment is different from the winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment in the position where the rotating member 23870 is disposed and the presence or absence of the stopper portion 23875, and the other configurations are the same. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 166 to 168, the rotating member 23870 in the twenty-third embodiment is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the seesaw member 840 by a shaft support pin 23876 inserted through the shaft support portion 21871. In this case, in this embodiment, the rotating member 23870 is disposed in a posture in which the axial center direction of the shaft support portion 21187 is orthogonal to the rotating shaft (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 840, and below the extrusion plate 21873. The side surface faces the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 substantially in parallel.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the rotating member 23870 is disposed on the seesaw member 840, as shown in FIGS. 168 (a) and 168 (b), the seesaw member 840 is in the first state or the first state. In any case of forming two states, the push plate 21873 can face the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840.

  Therefore, unlike the above-described twenty-first embodiment (that is, the lower plate portion of the push plate 21873 is in contact with the upper portion of the game ball (the front portion of FIG. 163 (a)), the push plate 21873. Can be brought into contact with the side portion of the game ball (the lower portion in FIG. 167 (a)). Accordingly, it is possible to shorten the time until the push plate 21873 comes into contact with the side portion of the game ball, and to discharge (push out) the game ball quickly to the discharge port 821d accordingly. Further, the rotation energy of the rotating member 23870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21882 can be sufficiently given to the game ball through the push plate 21873.

  As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged quickly to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are reduced. Alternating switching can be performed smoothly.

  Here, in the rotating member 23870 of this embodiment, a stopper portion 23875 protrudes from the back surface of the extrusion plate 21873 (the surface opposite to the side from which the game ball is pushed out), and the stopper portion 23875 contacts the back surface of the front base 810. It is possible to contact. In a state where the stopper portion 23875 is in contact with the back surface of the front base 810 (see FIG. 167 (a)), the rotating member 23870 has the pushing plate 21873 in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (FIG. 167 (a) left-right direction). It is arranged at the rotational position along.

  Accordingly, the stopper plate 23875 is omitted, and the push plate is closer to the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 than the case where the push plate 21873 is retracted to a position where it comes into contact with the back surface of the front base 810. The time until the pushing plate 21873 comes into contact with the game ball can be shortened. As a result, the game ball can be quickly discharged (extruded) to the discharge port 821d.

  Here, as described above, even if the rotating member 23870 is arranged in a posture in which the extruded plate 21873 protrudes above the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 167 (b)), A game ball (a game ball shown on the left side of FIG. 167 (b)) received by the receiving plate 21872 is rolled along the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 while the push-out plate 21873 is moved backward, thereby receiving the plate 21872. The rotating member 23870 can be returned to the posture that protrudes upward from the receiving surface 844 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 167 (a)).

  In this case, in this embodiment, since the rotating member 23870 is disposed on the seesaw member 840, a predetermined gap is formed between the extrusion plate 21873 and the front base 810. Therefore, when the pushing plate 21873 is retracted to a position where it comes into contact with the back surface of the front base 810, the game ball rolls away from the discharge port 821d, and the rolling trajectory of the game ball increases. Thus, the discharge to the discharge port 821d is delayed.

  On the other hand, by providing the stopper portion 23875 from the back surface of the extrusion plate 21873, the game balls (game balls shown on the left side in FIG. 167 (b)) received by the receiving plate 21873 are placed on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846. When it rolls along, it can suppress that the extrusion board 21873 is retracted too much to the back side of the front base 810 (refer FIG. 167 (a)). That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling unnecessarily in a direction away from the discharge port 821d, and to easily discharge the game ball to the discharge port 821d quickly.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the stopper portion is not formed on the back surface of the receiving plate 21872, the receiving plate 21872 can be retracted to a position where it abuts on the back surface of the front base 810 (FIG. 167 (b)). )reference). That is, using the gap between the rotating member 23870 and the front base 810 that is formed because the rotating member 23870 is disposed on the seesaw member 840, the receiving plate 21882 receives the game ball and rotates the rotating member 23870. The rotation angle of the rotation member 23870 (the rotation angle from the rotation position shown in FIG. 167 (a) to the rotation position shown in FIG. 167 (b)) can be increased.

  As a result, the time during which the game ball sent out from the delivery port 821c is in contact with the receiving plate 21882 can be lengthened (that is, the impulse received by the rotating member 23870 from the game ball can be increased). Therefore, the rotational energy of the rotating member 23870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21882 can be increased, and even when a plurality of game balls roll on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846, A plurality of game balls can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d by pushing out the extrusion plate 21873. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are reduced. Alternating switching can be performed smoothly.

  Next, a twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. In the first embodiment, the case where the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining the rotation shaft in a horizontal posture has been described. However, in the seesaw member 840 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the posture of the rotation shaft is inclined with the rotation. Is done. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 169 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 24065 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 170 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 24065.

  As shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, in the prize winning device 24065 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, bearing portions 24816 and 24826 are provided to protrude from the back surface of the front base 24810 and the front surface of the intermediate base 24820, respectively. The bearing portions 24816 and 24826 are portions that rotatably support both ends of the rotating shaft 24877 on the inner peripheral surface thereof, and are substantially U-shaped protrusions when viewed from the front (upper side in FIGS. 169 and 170). Formed as part.

  In the present embodiment, the bearing portion 24816 of the front base 24810 has a larger inner peripheral radius than the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate base 24820. Thus, as described later, rotation of one end in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 24877 (the end on the side where the cam portion 24877b is formed) is allowed.

  The rotating shaft 24877 is a shaft-like body for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 with respect to the front base 24810 and the intermediate base 24820. Here, the rotating shaft 24877 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 171 (a) is a front view of the rotating shaft 24877, and FIG. 171 (b) is a side view of the rotating shaft 24877 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CLXXIb of FIG. 171 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 171, the rotation shaft 24877 includes a main body portion 24877a formed as an axial body having a circular cross section, and a cam portion 24877b formed at an end portion in the axial direction of the main body portion 24877a. The cam portion 24877b is formed to project radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 24877a (that is, the distance from the axial center of the main body portion 24877a to the outer peripheral surface of the cam portion 24877b is changed according to the rotation angle. ) It is formed as a so-called disc cam.

  Returning to FIG. 170 and FIG. The rotation shaft 24877 is set such that the axial length of the main body portion 24877a is larger than the axial length of the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. Therefore, the main body portion 24877a of the rotating shaft 24877 is fitted into the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840, and the cam portion 24877b and the main body portion 24877a protruding from both axial ends of the bearing 841 are the bearing portion 24816 and the intermediate base of the front base 24810. It is supported by a bearing portion 24826 of 24820 (see FIG. 173). The rotating shaft 24877 is fixed to the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840 after being positioned at a predetermined phase (rotating position).

  Next, the operation of the cam portion 24877b in the rotating shaft 24877 when the seesaw member 840 is rotated will be described.

  FIG. 172 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 in a state where the seesaw member 840 forms the first state, and FIG. 172 (b) shows the winning device 24065 in a state where the seesaw member 840 forms the second state. FIG. FIG. 173 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 along the line CLXXIIIa-CLXXIIIa in FIG. 172 (a), and FIG. 173 (b) is the winning device 24065 along the line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb in FIG. 172 (b). FIG. Note that FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b) correspond to FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 172 (a) and 173 (a), in the first state, the axis of the rotation shaft 24877 is parallel to the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 173 (a)), and the rotation shaft 24877 Both ends in the axial direction are pivotally supported by the bearing portion 24816 of the front cover 24810 and the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate cover 24820, respectively. In this case, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is inclined downward at a first inclination angle toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820.

  When the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state shown in FIGS. 172 (a) and 173 (a) toward the second state, the cam portion 24877b at one end in the axial direction of the rotation shaft 24877 is increased as the rotation angle increases. However, by gradually acting on the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 24816 of the front cover 24810, the height position of one end side in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 24877 (the side on which the cam portion 24877b is formed) is gradually increased.

  As shown in FIGS. 172 (b) and 173 (b), when the seesaw member 840 reaches the second state, the height position of one end side in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 24877 (the side on which the cam portion 24877b is formed) is maximized. Thus, the shaft center of the rotating shaft 24877 is inclined downward from the front base 24810 toward the intermediate base 24820. As a result, the inclination angle of the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 that is lowered toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 is increased to the second inclination angle that is larger than the first inclination angle described above.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, as the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state toward the second state, the inclination angle of the descending inclination of the discharge surface 846 can be increased.

  Here, as in the first embodiment described above, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated with its rotating shaft maintained in a horizontal posture (that is, the inclination angle of the descending inclination of the discharge surface 846 is maintained at a predetermined angle). ), If the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is strong (large), the discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 is accelerated, and the second state cannot be reliably formed, while the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 If the ball is loose (small), the discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 is delayed, and the residence time is lengthened. Therefore, the alternate switching between the first state and the second state cannot be performed smoothly.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is made relatively gentle (small) at the initial stage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being quickly discharged from the discharge surface 846 (that is, to make the game ball stay on the discharge surface 846) and to easily form the second state reliably. it can.

  On the other hand, at the final stage, the inclination angle of the descending inclination of the discharge surface 846 is relatively strong (large), and the game ball can be quickly discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d. The time during which the sphere is placed (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened, and the alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly.

  Next, a twenty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 177. In the first embodiment, the case where the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in a horizontal posture has been described. However, in the seesaw member 840 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the posture of the rotation shaft is tilted with the rotation. Is done. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 174 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 25065 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, and FIG. 175 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 25065.

  As shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, in the prize winning device 25065 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, bearing portions 25816 and 24826 are provided to protrude from the back surface of the front base 25810 and the front surface of the intermediate base 24820, respectively. These bearing portions 25816 and 24826 are portions that rotatably support both ends of the rotating shaft 25877 on the inner peripheral surface thereof, and are formed in the same shape.

  The rotation shaft 25877 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 with respect to the front base 25810 and the intermediate base 24820, and the axial length thereof is the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. The dimension is set to be larger than the axial length. Therefore, the rotary shaft 25877 is fitted in the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840, and the portions protruding from both axial ends of the bearing 841 are respectively supported by the bearing portion 25816 of the front base 25810 and the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate base 25820. (See FIG. 177).

  Further, a push-up portion 25817 is provided on the back surface of the front base 25810 so as to protrude from the side of the bearing portion 25816. The push-up portion 25817 is positioned on the movement locus of the portion where the discharge surface 846 is formed when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, and is discharged when the seesaw member 840 approaches the second state. It abuts on the lower surface of the surface 846 forming portion. As a result of this contact, as will be described later, one side of the seesaw member 840 is pushed up by the pushing-up portion 25817, and the inclination angle of the descending slope of the discharge surface 846 is increased.

  Next, the operation of the push-up portion 25817 when the seesaw member 840 is rotated will be described.

  FIG. 176 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 in a state where the seesaw member 840 forms the first state, and FIG. 176 (b) shows the winning device 25065 in a state where the seesaw member 840 forms the second state. FIG.

  FIG. 177 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 along the line CLXXVIIa-CLXXVIIa in FIG. 176 (a), and FIG. 177 (b) is the winning device 25065 along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 176 (a). 177 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 along the line CLXXVIIc-CLXXVIIc in FIG. 176 (b), and FIG. 177 (d) is the line CLXXVIId-CLXXVIId in FIG. 176 (b). It is sectional drawing of the prize-winning apparatus 25065 in. Note that FIGS. 176 (a) and 176 (b) correspond to FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 176 (a), 177 (a), and 177 (b), in the first state, the seesaw member 840 and the push-up portion 25817 are spaced from each other. The axial center of the rotary shaft 25877 is pivotally supported by the bearing portion 25816 of the front cover 25810 and the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate cover 24820, respectively, in a posture that is parallel to the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 177 (a)). The In this case, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is inclined downward at a first inclination angle toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820.

  When the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state shown in FIGS. 176 (a), 177 (a), and 177 (b) toward the second state, the discharge surface 846 forming portion of the seesaw member 840 is lowered. The lower surface of the portion where the discharge surface 846 is formed is brought into contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817 (not shown).

  From this state, when the seesaw member 840 is further rotated toward the second state, the bottom surface of the discharge surface 846 formation portion is in contact with the top surface of the push-up portion 25817, so that the seesaw member 840 has the rotation shaft 25877. Is rotated while lifting one end side in the axial direction (left front side in FIG. 174, left side in FIG. 177 (a)), and the portion where the discharge surface 846 is formed is not in contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817 (right rear side in FIG. 174) 177 (b) right side) is lowered.

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 (b), 27 (c), and 177 (d), when the seesaw member 840 reaches the second state, one axial end side of the rotating shaft 25877 is the inner circumference of the bearing portion 25816. The shaft is lifted from the bottom surface, and the axis of the rotation shaft 25877 is inclined downward from the front base 25810 toward the intermediate base 24820. As a result, the inclination angle of the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 that is lowered toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 is increased to the second inclination angle that is larger than the first inclination angle described above.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the initial stage (until the lower surface of the discharge surface 846 formation portion comes into contact with the push-up portion 25817. ), The final stage (the portion where the discharge surface 846 is formed) while maintaining the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 at the first inclination angle (that is, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is not changed). In the section after the lower surface of the discharge portion 8817 is in contact with the push-up portion 25817, the downward inclination angle of the discharge surface 846 can be rapidly increased to the second inclination angle.

  Thereby, at the initial stage, it is possible to easily suppress the discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 (that is, it is easy to make the game ball stay on the discharge surface 846), and thus the second state can be more reliably formed. . On the other hand, at the final stage, it is possible to facilitate the quick discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d, so the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 (ie, the second state is formed). Time) can be shortened, and alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed more smoothly.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the concave groove 971 is provided in the front surface of the frame plate substrate 910 in the third path M3 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion from the front surface of the frame plate substrate 910 is possible. A protruding line that is provided and extends in a substantially saw-tooth shape when viewed from the front may be provided. In this case, similarly to the case of the concave groove 971, the game ball flowing down the third path M3 can be guided along the outer surface of the ridge to meander left and right. Therefore, the flow speed of the game ball can be slowed and the movement of the game ball can be changed. Further, a convex line can be used as a lens for diffusing or condensing light.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is positioned above the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 in the second state has been described. In the second state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 coincides with the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 in the height direction or is positioned below the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a. You may form so that it may do.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the third displacement member 3660 is slid relative to the first displacement member 3630 using the expansion / contraction operation of the slide rail 3661 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a pin is provided on one of the first displacement member 3630 or the third displacement member 3660 and a pin that slides along the groove is provided on the other of the first displacement member 3630 or the third displacement member 3660. The third displacement member 3660 may be slid relative to the first displacement member 3630 using the above sliding.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the relative rotation of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is performed by the weight of the second displacement member 740 (the action of gravity) is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the second displacement member 740 is moved in one direction or the other direction with respect to the first displacement member 730 using the elastic force of an elastic spring such as a coil spring or a torsion spring or an elastic body such as rubber or urethane. May be energized. Thereby, the relative rotation of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be stabilized.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where the liquid LQ is used as the predetermined heavy object has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Other heavy objects may be used as long as they can displace (for example, roll or slide) the inner space of the cage 10746 along the longitudinal direction in accordance with the posture change of the cage 10746, for example, iron or lead. Examples thereof include a manufactured sphere and a cylindrical body. In that case, the inner space of the cage 10746 does not need to be sealed.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where a predetermined heavy object is held in the internal space of the holder 10746 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined heavy object is placed on the center of gravity via a string or a link. The second displacement member 740 may be suspended from any position on the vertical line Z passing through G. Also by this, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated to one side or the other side with the rotation shaft 741 as the rotation center, the predetermined heavy object can be displaced to the same side as the moving direction of the center of gravity G.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case has been described in which the cage 10746 is disposed at a position where the center in the longitudinal direction thereof coincides with the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. However, it is preferable to position the center in the longitudinal direction of the cage 10746 on the vertical line Z passing through the center of gravity G.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the return operation of the second displacement member 740 to the intersection angle γ1 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is performed using the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP is described. However, the biasing spring SP may be omitted and the second displacement member 740 may be operated by its own weight (the action of gravity).

  In the twenty-fourth and twenty-fifth embodiments, the case has been described where, in the first state, the rotation shaft 24877 is pivotally supported in a posture in which the axis is parallel to the horizontal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 173 (a)). However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and in the first state, the height position of the axial end of the rotating shaft 24877 (the side where the cam portion 24877b is formed) is higher (or lower) than the other end of the axial direction. The position may be set. That is, the above-described first inclination angle (inclination angle at which the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 in the first state is inclined downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820) is the above-described second inclination angle (the first inclination angle). It is sufficient if the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 in the two states is formed so as to be able to be increased to an inclination angle larger than an inclination angle (an inclination angle inclined downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820).

  In the twenty-first and twenty-second embodiments, the case where a sufficient gap is not formed between the rotating members 21870 and 22870 and the front base 810 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. A predetermined gap may be provided between the receiving plate 21872 and the extrusion plate 21873 and the front base 810. In this case, it is preferable to provide a predetermined gap only on the receiving plate 21872 side. Thereby, the same effect as that of the twenty-third embodiment can be obtained.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Concept of Invention with Right Rotation Unit 600 as an Example>
A base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member formed to be displaceable with respect to the base member, a transmission member for transmitting a driving force to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the transmission member The transmission member includes a driving pin, the first displacement member and the second displacement member include a first groove and a second groove, respectively, The first groove includes an action section that receives an action from the drive pin and a non-interference section that does not interfere with the drive pin, and the second groove includes at least an action section that receives an action from the drive pin. The first displacement member and the second displacement member are disposed on the base member in a posture in which the groove and the second groove are overlapped and the drive pin is inserted into the first groove and the second groove. Game to play A1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member that are displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driving force applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. An effect member having a transmission member for transmission and a driving means for applying a driving force to the transmission member is provided, and the first displacement member and the second displacement are provided via the first groove and the second groove provided in the transmission member. There is a gaming machine in which a member is connected to a transmission member (for example, JP 2009-100994 A).

  According to this gaming machine, when the driving force of the driving means is applied to the transmission member, the effect member drives the driving force from the transmission member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member via the first groove and the second groove. Is transmitted, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced with respect to the base member.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the first groove and the second groove are arranged side by side, the space required for the arrangement of the first groove and the second groove is increased, and accordingly, the production member is viewed from the front. There has been a problem that the outer shape of the device becomes larger. In particular, in recent years, an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device has been demanded, and an increase in the outer shape of the effect member in a front view is not preferable because an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are disposed on the base member in a posture in which the first groove and the second groove are overlapped (overlapped). Compared to the case of the conventional product in which the groove and the second groove are provided side by side, the space required for disposing the first groove and the second groove can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the outer shape of the front view. In this case, even if the liquid crystal display device is required to be enlarged, the space in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) has a relatively large space. As in the gaming machine A1, the first groove and the second groove If the configuration is such that the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device can be made smaller by using a space in the thickness direction with a relatively large margin, the outer shape in front view can be reduced.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine A1, since the driving pin is inserted into the first groove and the second groove that are overlapped, the driving force from the transmission member is transmitted to the first displacement member and the second displacement member by one driving pin. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a drive pin for each of the first groove and the second groove. That is, parts can be shared, and the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the driving force of the driving means is applied to the transmission member, the driving force is transmitted from the transmission member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are transmitted. The member is displaced with respect to the base member. In this case, in a state where the action sections of the first groove and the second groove are acted by the transmission member, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced, whereas only the action section of the second groove is removed from the transmission member. In a state where the action is received (the transmission member does not interfere with the first groove due to the non-interference section), the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced.

  In the gaming machine A1, the second displacement member is displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member and is connected to a driven member in which the second groove is formed, and the driven portion. A gaming machine A2 comprising: a connecting displacement member disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member so as to be displaceable and having a decorative portion.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the second displacement member is disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member so as to be displaceable, and a driven member in which a second groove is formed, and Since the connecting displacement member that is connected to the driven portion and is displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member is provided, a link structure can be formed by the driven member and the connecting displacement member. Thereby, when the driven member is driven by the transmission member, the decorative portion of the coupling displacement member can be largely displaced relative to the first displacement member.

  In the gaming machine A2, the second displacement member is capable of forming a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are overlapped with each other.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, the second displacement member can be formed in a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are overlapped. The size of the outer shape of the displacement member in front view can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A3, the first displacement member is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, and the second displacement member is a posture in which the driven member and the connection displacement member are overlapped with each other. Thus, the gaming machine A4 is formed so as to be disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member at the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, the second displacement member can be disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member in the retracted position in a posture in which the driven member and the coupling displacement member are overlapped. Since it is formed, it is possible to reduce the outer shape of the first displacement member and the second displacement member arranged at the retracted position in front view by the amount of the overlap.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the connection displacement member includes an overhanging portion that is formed to protrude to the opposite side of the decoration portion across a portion that is displaceably disposed on the first displacement member. A gaming machine A5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the connection displacement member projects to the opposite side of the decoration portion across the portion that is displaceably displaceable by the first displacement member. Since the overhang portion to be formed is provided, the overhang portion can serve as a weight.

  For example, when the driven part is driven and the decoration part of the connecting displacement member is lifted upward, the overhang part is formed on the side opposite to the decoration part, and the weight of the overhang part is used. The decorative part can be easily lifted upward. Therefore, the overhanging portion can be quickly lifted and the driving force required for lifting can be suppressed. In addition, after the decorative part is lifted, the weight of the decorative part and the weight of the overhanging part can be suspended, so that the decorative part is compared with the cantilever state in which only the decorative part is formed. The lifted posture can be stabilized and the driving force necessary to maintain the posture can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A5, the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed so as to be able to contact the back surface of the first displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed so as to be able to contact the back surface of the first displacement member. When displacing the displacement member, the overhanging portion is brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member, so that rattling of the connecting displacement member (decoration portion) can be suppressed. In addition, the overhanging portion serving as a weight can also serve as a role for suppressing rattling by abutting against the first displacement member, thereby simplifying the structure and reducing the part cost accordingly. Can be achieved.

  In the gaming machine A6, the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed in a substantially box shape.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A6, the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed in a substantially box shape, so that the weight and rigidity can be ensured while reducing the outer shape. it can. Therefore, the function as a weight and the back surface of the first displacement member can be performed while the connecting displacement member can be displaced while the overhanging portion is hidden behind the first displacement member (that is, in a state where the overhanging portion cannot be seen from the front). It is possible to surely exhibit the function of suppressing the rattling by contacting with the.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and a protruding portion that protrudes from an outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion, 1 displacement member is provided with the contact part formed so that contact | abutting to the said protrusion part was possible, and while the said bearing part pivotally supported the said 1st displacement member in the state raised from the said base member, the said protrusion part has the said The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the contact portion is abutted so that the relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member is restricted within a predetermined range.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the bearing portion serves as the first displacement member. Since the shaft is supported while being raised from the base member, a space in which the second displacement member is disposed can be formed between the base member and the first displacement member by such raising. Therefore, the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be arranged in a superposed posture.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine A8, the base member further includes a protrusion formed to protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion, and the first displacement member is an abutting portion formed so as to be able to abut on the protruding portion. The relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member can be restricted within a predetermined range by contacting the protrusion with the protrusion. That is, in order to dispose the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a superposed posture, the bearing portion that raises the first displacement member from the base member has a relatively high rigidity, and has an outer peripheral side. When the dead space is formed, a protrusion is provided to project from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion, and the contact portion is brought into contact with the protrusion, thereby allowing the first displacement member to rotate relative to the base member. The rigidity of the portion to be regulated can be secured to improve the durability, and the dead space can be used effectively, and the size can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine A8, the protruding portion of the base member is formed so as to be able to contact the back surface of the first displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A8, the protruding portion of the base member is formed so as to be able to contact the back surface of the first displacement member. Therefore, when the first displacement member is displaced, Since the protruding portion of the base member is in contact with the back surface of the first displacement member, rattling of the first displacement member can be suppressed. In addition, since the projecting portion that regulates the relative displacement of the first displacement member with respect to the base member can also serve as a role for suppressing rattling by contacting the first displacement member, the structure is simplified. Therefore, the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In particular, in the gaming machine A9 subordinate to the gaming machine A2, since the second displacement member (the driven member and the connected displacement member) is disposed on the first displacement member, the first displacement member is the weight of the second displacement member. It is necessary to rotate with respect to the base member in a state where it is supported, and rattling is likely to occur. Therefore, the structure which makes the protrusion part of a base member contact | abut to the back surface of a 1st displacement member, and suppresses the shakiness of a 1st displacement member becomes effective.

  In the gaming machine A9, the first displacement member is pivotally supported at one end in the longitudinal direction by the bearing portion of the base member, and the protruding portion of the base member is at the edge on the one end in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member. A gaming machine A10 formed so as to be able to contact the back surface.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, one end in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member is pivotally supported by the bearing portion of the base member, and the protruding portion of the base member is one end in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member. Since it forms so that it can contact | abut on the back surface in the edge part of a side, when a 1st displacement member inclines with its own weight, a protrusion part can be arrange | positioned in the position which can suppress the inclination. As a result, rattling of the first displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A10, the protruding portion protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion and is connected to the front surface of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A10, the protruding portion protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion and is connected to the front surface of the base member, so that the rigidity of the protruding portion is increased. Can do. In particular, when the first displacement member is tilted by its own weight, the rigidity in the direction that supports the tilt (that is, the direction in which the protrusion is pressed against the front surface of the base member) can be increased. Suppression can be effectively suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A11, the base member includes an inclined surface formed by inclining by chamfering a ridge line portion of the side surface and the front surface thereof.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A11, the base member includes the inclined surface formed by chamfering the side surface and the ridge line portion of the front surface. It can suppress that 2 displacement member is latched by the side surface of a base member, and cannot be displaced. In this case, in the present invention, since the connecting displacement member of the second displacement member is disposed in a cantilevered manner on the back surface of the first displacement member, the first displacement member or (and) the second displacement member is provided. When displacing, the connecting displacement member of the second displacement member is likely to swing in the direction of approaching and separating from the base member, and the connecting displacement member is easily locked to the side surface of the base member. Therefore, the configuration in which the base member is provided with the inclined surface is particularly effective.

  In the gaming machine A12, the second displacement member is such that the connection displacement member is formed of a light transmissive material, and the base member protrudes from the front surface and extends along the displacement direction of the second displacement member. A gaming machine A13 comprising a ridge.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A12, the base member includes a protruding line that protrudes from the front surface and extends along the displacement direction of the second displacement member, so the tip of the protruding line Can be brought into contact with the second displacement member. Therefore, compared with the case where the whole front surface of a base member contacts a 2nd displacement member, a contact area can be made small and sliding resistance can be suppressed.

  Here, since the connection displacement member is formed of a light transmissive material, the second displacement member transmits the irradiated light when the connection displacement member is displaced and visually recognized by the player. Can be increased. In this case, when the second displacement member is displaced, if the entire front surface of the base member comes into contact with the connection displacement member, fogging is formed on the connection displacement member due to friction with the front surface of the base member. The effect of transmitting the light of the connecting displacement member is impaired. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A12, a protrusion is formed on the front surface of the base member, and only the tip of the protrusion can be brought into contact with the connection displacement member. The cloudiness due to can be partly. As a result, it is possible to exhibit the effect of transmitting light through the connected displacement portion.

  In the gaming machine A13, the second displacement member includes a connection pin that connects the driven member and the connection displacement member and is formed of a metal material, and the protrusion of the base member includes the second displacement member. A gaming machine A14 that extends along the locus of the connecting pin when displaced.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A13, the second displacement member includes a connection pin that connects the driven member and the connection displacement member and is formed of a metal material. Since it extends along the locus of the connecting pin when the second displacement member is displaced, the connecting pin can be brought into contact with the protruding tip of the ridge. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of fogging due to rubbing between the protrusions on the portion made of the light transmitting material of the connecting displacement member, and to exhibit the effect of transmitting the light to the connecting displacement member. Can do.

  The gaming machine A13 or A14 includes a gear interposed between the driving means and the transmission member, and the base member includes a gear receiving portion for pivotally supporting the gear in its internal space, A gaming machine A15, wherein a gear receiving portion projects from the front surface of the base member, and the ridge extends to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion.

  According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A13 or A14, the ridge extends to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion protruding from the front surface of the base member. It can be restrained that the displacement is impossible due to the engagement with the gear receiving portion protruding from the side surface of the member, or the displacement is inhibited. In other words, it is possible to make the gear receiving part protrude from the front surface of the base member by adopting a configuration in which a protruding line is provided on the front surface of the base member and the protruding line is extended to a position corresponding to the gear receiving part. And can. Thereby, it is possible to store the gear in a rotatable state in the internal space while reducing the thickness of the base member. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to fix the drive shaft of the drive means to the gear (that is, since the gear is held by the gear receiving portion of the base member, it is only necessary to insert the drive shaft of the drive means into the gear. Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A15, the first displacement member and the transmission member are rotatably supported by the base member, and the first displacement member has a retracted position located on a front surface of the base member. It is formed so as to be displaceable between an extension position that protrudes in a direction away from the base member, and the rotation shaft of the first displacement member is disposed closer to the extension position than the rotation axis of the transmission member. A gaming machine A16 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A15, the first displacement member and the transmission member are rotatably supported by the base member, and the rotation shaft of the first displacement member is the transmission member. Since the area of the first displacement member projecting to the projecting position can be increased, the first displacement member can be positioned between the retracted position and the projecting position. Even in this case, it is possible to easily make the player invisible by disposing a transmission member on the back surface of the first displacement member.

  In the gaming machine A16, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the transmission member is configured to move the second displacement member when the second displacement member is extended to the extended position. A gaming machine A17, which is formed so as to be able to contact the bearing portion.

  According to the gaming machine A17, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A16, the base member includes a bearing portion that pivotally supports the first displacement member, and the transmission member has the second displacement member protruding to the extended position. In this case, the base member is formed so as to be able to contact the bearing portion of the base member, so that the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be restricted within a predetermined range. That is, the transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving means can also serve as a stopper that restricts relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member within a predetermined range. It is possible to simplify and to reduce the part cost accordingly.

  The bearing portion is a part for raising the first displacement member from the base member and disposing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a superposed posture, and has relatively high rigidity. When the dead space is formed on the outer peripheral side, the transmission member is brought into contact with the bearing portion, thereby ensuring the rigidity of the portion that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member. Thus, the durability can be improved and the dead space can be used effectively, and the size can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine A17, the transmission member is provided with a recess corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion, and when the second displacement member is extended to the extension position, the bearing portion is received in the recess. A gaming machine A18 characterized by being formed.

  According to the gaming machine A18, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A17, the transmission member has a concave portion corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion, and the second displacement member projects to the projecting position. Since the portion is formed to be receivable in the recess, the movable range of the transmission member can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the displacement amount of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be ensured. In other words, since the position of the rotation shaft of the transmission member can be brought close to the bearing portion while ensuring the movable range of the transmission member, the first displacement member is retracted while suppressing the outer shape of the first displacement member. While displacing between the position and the overhang position, it is possible to easily form a state in which the transmission member is hidden behind the first displacement member (that is, a state in which the transmission member is not visible from the front).

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A18, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the operation section of the first groove and the second groove receives an action from the transmission member, and the first displacement member and the second groove After each displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the action section of the second groove receives an action from the transmission member, and the transmission member is made non-interfering with the first groove by the non-interference section, A gaming machine A19, wherein the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction, and the first direction and the second direction are opposite to each other. .

  According to the gaming machine A19, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A18, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced in the first direction, The one displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction. In this case, since the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A18, inertia due to the stop of the first displacement member that has been displaced in the first direction The force can be canceled out by the inertial force when the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the parts due to the action of inertial force and improve durability.

  The gaming machine A19 includes one or a plurality of gears that are interposed between the driving unit and the transmission member and transmit a driving force, and the weight of the first displacement member is heavier than the weight of the second displacement member. A gaming machine A20 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine A20, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A19, the weight of the first displacement member is made heavier than the weight of the second displacement member. Therefore, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the weight is increased. The heavy first displacement member can be stopped first, and the lighter second displacement member can be stopped last. Thereby, the burden of a gear can be reduced.

  That is, from the state where the transmission member is driven in the forward direction and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced in the first direction, the first displacement member is stopped, and the second displacement member is the second displacement member. Since the transition to the state displaced in the direction is performed by the transmission member moving from the transmission section of the first groove to the non-interference section, the rotation of the driving means and the gear is continued. Therefore, even if the first displacement member is stopped, a load on the gear is not generated. On the other hand, the transition from the state where the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction to the state where the second displacement member is also stopped is the rotation of the driving means and the gear. However, in this case, the member to be stopped is only the second displacement member that is light in weight, and accordingly, the burden on the gear can be reduced accordingly.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A20 includes a third displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the first displacement member, and the third displacement member is displaced by receiving an action from the second displacement member. A gaming machine A21.

  According to the gaming machine A21, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A20, the gaming machine A21 includes a third displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the first displacement member, and the third displacement member is a second displacement member. Since it is displaced by receiving the action from the member, the third displacement member can also be displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the second displacement member relative to the first displacement member.

  In the gaming machine A21, one of the second displacement member or the third displacement member includes a drive pin, the other of the second displacement member or the third displacement member includes a third groove, and the third groove A gaming machine A22, comprising an action section that receives an action from the drive pin and a non-interference section in which the drive pin does not interfere.

  According to the gaming machine A22, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A21, one of the second displacement member or the third displacement member includes the drive pin, and the other of the second displacement member or the third displacement member has the third groove. And the third groove includes an action section that receives an action from the drive pin and a non-interference section in which the drive pin does not interfere, so that both the second displacement member and the third displacement member are displaced with respect to the first displacement member. And a mode in which only one of the second displacement member and the third displacement member is displaced with respect to the first displacement member.

  In the gaming machine A21, the second displacement member is displaceably disposed on the third displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A23, the second displacement member is disposed so as to be displaceable on the third displacement member. Therefore, when the third displacement member is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member, Thus, the relative displacement of the second displacement member allows the relative displacement of the third displacement member relative to the first displacement member to be superimposed on the relative displacement of the second displacement member relative to the third displacement member. The amount of relative displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the displacement member can be increased.

<Concept of Invention with Left Rotation Unit 700 as an Example>
A base member, a first displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, a second displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the first displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member Driving means for generating a driving force for displacing the base member and a connecting member for connecting the base member and the second displacement member, and the second displacement member is moved along with the displacement of the first displacement member. In the gaming machine that is displaced relative to the first displacement member, the connection member is connected to the base member at one end, and the other end of the connection first member is connected to the other end. And a connection second member having one end connected to the second displacement member, and a connection portion between the other ends of the connection first member and the connection second member is connected to the first displacement member so as to be displaceable. A gaming machine B1 characterized by that.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a first displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, a second displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the first displacement member, There is a gaming machine including a driving unit that generates a driving force for displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and a connecting member that connects between the base member and the second displacement member (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013). No. 17886).

  According to this gaming machine, when the first displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the connecting member acts between the base member and the second displacement member, so that the displacement of the first displacement member is accompanied. The second displacement member can be displaced relative to the first displacement member. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the first displacement member is displaced in a direction away from the base member, the connecting member that connects between the base member and the second displacement member is exposed. There is a problem that it can be visually recognized by a person and the appearance is impaired.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the connecting member is connected to the base member at one end of the connecting member, the other end of the connecting first member is connected to the other end and the second displacement member. A connecting second member having one end connected thereto, and a connecting portion between the other ends of the connecting first member and the connecting second member is movably connected to the first displacing member. Even when displaced in the direction away from the member, the connecting members (the first connecting member and the second connecting member) can be arranged on the back surface of the first displacing member, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize. As a result, it can suppress that a connection member is exposed and an external appearance is impaired.

  In the gaming machine B1, the first displacement member is rotatably disposed on the base member, and the connection second member of the connection member is slidably disposed on the first displacement member. A gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the first displacement member is rotatably disposed on the base member, and the coupling second member of the coupling member is slidably displaced by the first displacement member. When the first displacement member is rotated with respect to the base member, the rotation amount is large (that is, the displacement amount of the connection first member and the connection second member needs to be increased). Even so, it is possible to maintain the state where the connection second member of the connection member is disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member and avoid being visually recognized by the player. As a result, it can suppress that the connection 2nd member of a connection member is exposed and an external appearance is impaired.

  Further, even when an electrical connection line is wired to the first displacement member, the connection second member is connected to the connection line by connecting the connection second member of the connection member so as to be slidable on the first displacement member. It is easy to suppress interference. Therefore, since it is not necessary to secure a large space for wiring the connection lines in order to avoid interference, the size of the first displacement member in the front view can be reduced accordingly.

  The gaming machine B1 or B2 includes a driving body that is driven by the driving means, and the driving body is connected to the connecting first member of the connecting member, and the driving force of the driving means is connected to the connecting first member from the driving body. The gaming machine B3, wherein the first displacement member and the second displacement member are driven by being transmitted to the member.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, a driving body driven by the driving means is provided, and the driving body is connected to the connecting first member of the connecting member, and the driving force of the driving means is Since the first displacement member and the second displacement member are driven by being transmitted from the driving body to the connected first member, it is possible to reduce the size of the first displacement member in a front view.

  That is, the connection member is located between the first displacement member and the base member because the connection portion between the other ends of the connection first member and the connection second member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member. When the drive body is connected to the first displacement member, the drive body and the connection member may interfere with each other. Therefore, it is necessary to connect the drive body to the first displacement member at a position that does not overlap the displacement locus of the connection member. There is. Therefore, it is necessary to make the front view shape of the first displacement member large enough to include the displacement trajectory of the connecting member and the connecting portion to which the driving body is connected, and the front view shape of the first displacement member is increased accordingly. To do. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B3, it is not necessary to avoid the interference between the driving body and the connecting member, and the front view shape of the first displacement member may be a size corresponding only to the displacement locus of the connecting member, Since it is not necessary to include a connecting portion to which the driving body is connected, the front view shape of the first displacement member can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B3, the first displacement member is rotatably disposed on the base member and formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, and the base member is a base-side engagement member And a displacement-side engagement member formed so as to be engageable with the base-side engagement member in a state where the first displacement member is displaced to the retracted position of the first displacement member or the second displacement member. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that one is provided.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the connecting member is connected in a erected state between the base member and the second displacement member, and at the retracted position, at a position relatively away from the rotation axis of the first displacement member, The base member and the second displacement member are connected by a connecting member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member attempts to tilt the portion opposite to the rotation axis (that is, the second displacement member side) in the direction away from the base member, the first displacement member is not between the base member and the second displacement member. The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the intervening connecting member.

  However, in the gaming machine B4, since the connecting portion between the other ends of the connecting first member and the connecting second member is displaceably connected to the first displacing member, the connecting member is connected to the first displacing member at the retracted position. With the rotation shaft as the base end, the portion opposite to the rotation shaft (that is, the second displacement member side) is the free end. Therefore, due to its own weight and the weight of the second displacement member, the portion of the first displacement member on the side opposite to the rotation axis (second displacement member side) tends to tilt in a direction away from the base member.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B3, the base member includes the base-side engagement member, and one of the first displacement member or the second displacement member engages with the displacement-side engagement. In the state where the first displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member are formed to be engageable with each other. It can suppress that a part (2nd displacement member side) inclines in the direction away from a base member.

  In the gaming machine B4, the second displacement member includes the displacement side engaging member.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, the second displacement member includes the displacement-side engagement member. Therefore, the engagement position between the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member is set to the first position. It can be set as the position relatively distant from the rotating shaft of the displacement member. Therefore, utilizing the engagement of the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member, the portion of the first displacement member opposite to the rotation axis (second displacement member side) tilts away from the base member. Can be effectively suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B5, the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member are formed by bending a base portion standing from the front surface of the base member or the back surface of the second displacement member, and the tip of the base portion. A bending portion having an inner surface as an engagement surface, and the first displacement member is displaced from the extended position to the retracted position, whereby the engagement surfaces of the bent portion are engaged with each other. The engaging surface of the bent portion of the base side engaging member is inclined in the direction away from the front surface of the base member toward the engaging tip side, or (and) the bent portion of the displacement side engaging member is engaged. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the surface is inclined in a direction away from the back surface of the second displacement member toward the engagement tip side.

  Here, when the second displacement member includes a displacement-side engagement member as in the gaming machine B5, the engagement position between the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member is from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. Since the positions are relatively distant from each other, the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are difficult to engage due to the shaking of the first displacement member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B6, the engagement surface of the bent portion of the base side engagement member is inclined in the direction away from the front surface of the base member toward the engagement tip side or (and) the displacement side engagement. The engaging surface of the bent portion of the member is inclined in a direction away from the back surface of the second displacement member toward the engagement tip side, that is, the engaging surface of the bent portion and the front surface of the base member or the back surface of the second displacement member. Since the gap between the first engagement member and the engagement engagement member is wider, the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member can be used in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5. Can be easily engaged.

  Furthermore, according to the gaming machine B6, the first displacement member is directed to the retracted position by being inclined as described above at the engagement surface of the bent portion in at least one of the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member. The second displacement member can be brought closer to the base member as the engagement surface of the bent portion is inclined. Thereby, in the retracted position, the projecting dimension of the second displacement member from the base member can be suppressed, and rattling of the second displacement member can be absorbed and the posture thereof can be maintained.

  In the gaming machine B5 or B6, the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member are formed by bending a base portion erected from the front surface of the base member or the back surface of the second displacement member, and the tip of the base portion. Each of which has a bent portion whose inner surface serves as an engagement surface, and the first displacement member is displaced from the extended position to the retracted position, whereby the engagement surfaces of the bent portion are engaged with each other. A gaming machine B7, wherein a receiving portion for receiving a bending portion of the opponent is formed on the front surface of the base member and the back surface of the second displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5 or B6, a receiving portion for receiving the opponent's bent portion is formed on the front surface of the base member and the back surface of the second displacement member. In a state where the displacement member is disposed at the retracted position (a state where the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member are engaged), the bent portion is received by the receiving portion and is close to the base member of the second displacement member. Displacement in the direction can be allowed. Therefore, while the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are erected at the base dimensions to facilitate the engagement between the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member, Displacement of the displacement member in a direction close to the base member is allowed, and damage due to collision can be prevented.

  In any one of the gaming machine B3 to the gaming machine B7, the displacement-side engaging member is engaged with the first displacement member in a state where the first displacement member is disposed at the extended position. A gaming machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the displacement-side engagement member becomes the first displacement member when the first displacement member is disposed at the extended position. In other words, the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be coupled via the displacement-side engagement member. Thereby, it can suppress that the 2nd displacement member rattles with respect to the 1st displacement member in an overhang position. Further, the second displacement member is engaged with the base side engagement member at the retracted position to couple the second displacement member to the base member, and the second displacement member is engaged with the first displacement member at the extended position. Since the role of coupling the member to the first displacement member can also be used, the structure can be simplified, and the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the game machine includes an interposition means interposed between the second displacement member and one end of the connection second member, and the interposition means is provided with respect to the base member. The mode of action that occurs between the second displacement member and one end of the connected second member differs depending on whether the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction or the second direction. A gaming machine B9 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the gaming machine B9 includes an interposed means interposed between the second displacement member and one end of the connected second member, and the interposed means. Is a case where the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction relative to the base member, and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction. Since the modes are different, the mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member is different depending on whether the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction or the second direction relative to the base member. Can be different.

  In the gaming machine B9, the interposition means includes a guided portion disposed at one end of the first displacement member or the connection second member, and one end of the first displacement member or the connection second member. A guide portion that is disposed on the other side and guides the guided portion, and when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction and in the second direction with respect to the base member, The gaming machine B10 is characterized in that the mode of action generated between the second displacement member and one end of the connection second member is made different by guiding the guide portion along a different route of the guide portion.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B9, the interposition means is provided when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction and when the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member. By guiding the guide part along different paths of the guided part, the mode of action that occurs between the second displacement member and one end of the connected second member is made different, so that depending on the shape of the guided part, The mode of displacement of the second displacement member relative to the one displacement member can be easily changed. That is, the degree of freedom of design can be increased.

  In the gaming machine B9, the interposition means acts between the second displacement member and one end of the connection second member when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction with respect to the base member. On the other hand, when the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member, the action between the second displacement member and one end of the connection second member is released. A gaming machine B11.

  According to the gaming machine B11, when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction with respect to the base member, the interposition means causes an action between the second displacement member and one end of the connected second member. On the other hand, when the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member, the action between the second displacement member and one end of the connected second member is released, so the first displacement with respect to the base member. The mode of displacement of the second displacement member relative to the first displacement member can be easily made greatly different between when the member is displaced in the first direction and when the member is displaced in the second direction.

<About the concept of the invention taking the center frame 86 as an example>
Formed to be displaceable between a game board having a game area on the front and an opening formed in the center, and a retracted position on the back side of the game board and an overhanging position visible through the opening. And a center frame that is formed from a light-transmitting material and is installed in an opening of the game board, and the center frame forms a part of the game area. A gaming machine C1 including an area forming unit.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having a game area on the front surface and an opening formed in the center, and a retraction position and an opening on the back side of the game board are visible through the game board. There is a gaming machine provided with a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between outgoing positions (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-176580).

  According to this gaming machine, the opening of the gaming board is made larger than the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device, and accordingly, an area where the displacement member can be visually recognized is ensured. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since it is necessary to secure an area for the ball to flow down in the gaming area, there is a limit to increasing the opening of the gaming board, and an area where the displacement member can be visually recognized is limited. There was a problem that it could not be secured sufficiently.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine C1 includes a center frame that is formed from a light-transmitting material and is provided in an opening of the gaming board, and the center frame includes a region forming portion that forms a part of the gaming region. Therefore, the displacement member can be visually recognized through the region forming portion. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently secure an area where the displacement member can be visually recognized while securing an area for the ball to flow down in the game area.

  In the gaming machine C1, the area forming portion of the center frame forms a continuous area from the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board to the outer edge of the gaming area as a part of the gaming area. C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the center frame region forming portion forms a continuous region from the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board to the outer edge of the gaming region as part of the gaming region. Therefore, it is possible to secure the maximum area where the displacement member can be visually confirmed.

  In the gaming machine C2, the area forming portion of the center frame is set to a width that allows passage of only one gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the area forming portion of the center frame is set to a width that allows passage of only one gaming ball, so that the opening through the gaming board ( That is, it is possible to secure the maximum area where the displacement member can be visually recognized (without using the center frame).

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the area forming portion of the center frame includes a downstream wall portion standing on the downstream side of the area and integrally formed with the center frame.

  Here, when the center frame is formed of a resin material and a nail cannot be planted, the flow speed of the game ball increases, and it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C4, the region forming portion of the center frame includes the downstream wall portion standing on the downstream side of the region, so that the game ball flowing down the region forming portion is applied to the downstream wall portion. Can be touched. Therefore, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the flow-down speed of the game ball can be reduced so that the player can easily see it. In addition, since the downstream wall portion is formed integrally with the center frame, it can be easily formed by molding, and it is possible to eliminate the need for fastening and fixing other parts, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost accordingly. .

  In the gaming machine C4, the area forming portion of the center frame includes a side wall portion standing in the area and defining a passage through which the game ball flows down, and formed integrally with the center frame, the side wall portion being downstream. A gaming machine C5 connected to a wall.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C4, the center frame region forming portion includes a side wall portion standing in the region and defining a passage through which the game ball flows down, and the side wall portion is downstream. Since it is connected to the wall portion, it is possible to increase the rigidity of the downstream wall portion that receives the game ball flowing down. Thereby, damage of a downstream wall part can be prevented. Further, since the connecting wall portion is formed integrally with the center frame, it can be easily formed by molding, and it is possible to eliminate the need for fastening and fixing separate parts, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost accordingly. . Furthermore, since the side wall portion that plays the role of partitioning the passage through which the game ball flows can also be used to increase the rigidity of the downstream wall portion, the structure is simplified and the cost of parts is reduced accordingly. be able to.

  The gaming machine C5 includes an inner rail that guides a launched game ball from the front of the gaming board to the gaming area, and the side wall portion is juxtaposed with the inner rail. Machine C6.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the aspect in which the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the inner rail is that after colliding with the nail and jumping, the speed is relatively slow, and this causes damage to the inner rail. Was not a problem. On the other hand, in the present invention, in order to secure the maximum area where the displacement member can be visually recognized, the width of the area forming portion that forms a part of the game area is narrow (for example, allowing only one game ball to pass through). Width). That is, the width of the game area is narrowed by the area forming unit. Therefore, on the upstream side of the area forming unit, it is necessary to guide the game ball flowing down the game area toward the area forming unit, and as a result of the guidance, a part of the game ball is relatively fast at the inner rail. May cause the inner rail to bend.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C6, since the side wall portion is juxtaposed to the inner rail, the game ball that has flowed down the game area is guided toward the area forming portion, so that the game ball is directed toward the inner rail. Even if it flows down, the game ball can be received by the side wall portion and can be prevented from colliding with the inner rail. As a result, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C5, it is possible to suppress bending of the inner rail.

  In the gaming machine C5 or C6, the game machine C5 or C6 includes light emitting means disposed on the back side of the area forming portion of the center frame and capable of emitting light, and the side wall portion receives light emitted from the light emitting means. A gaming machine C7, which is formed so as to function as a light guide that leads to the front side of the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5 or C6, the side wall portion is formed so as to function as a light guide that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means to the front side of the gaming area. The production effect by can be demonstrated. In particular, in the gaming machine C7 subordinate to the gaming machine C6, since the side wall portion is arranged in parallel with the inner rail, light leakage can be reduced by the inner rail, and the amount of light that can be guided can be increased accordingly. . As a result, it is possible to enhance the production effect by light.

  In the gaming machine C7, the light emitting means is disposed on the displacement member, and a retracted position of the displacement member is a back surface of an area forming portion of the center frame.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C7, the light emitting means is disposed on the displacement member, and the retracted position of the displacement member is the back surface of the region forming portion of the center frame. In the state where is disposed at the retracted position, the displacement member can be visually recognized through the region forming portion of the center frame, and the light emitted from the light emitting means of the displacement member is guided through the side wall portion. It can be visually recognized. Thereby, the effect of light production can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the area forming portion of the center frame defines a pair of side walls formed integrally with the center frame while partitioning a passage in which the game ball flows down and standing in the area. And a game machine C9, wherein one or a plurality of protrusions project from the opposing surfaces of the pair of side wall portions.

  Here, when the center frame is formed of a resin material and a nail cannot be planted in the region forming portion, the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the passage partitioned by the pair of side wall portions increases, and the game ball flowing down is played. It becomes difficult for the person to see.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C9, since one or a plurality of protrusions project from the opposing surfaces of the pair of side wall portions, the game ball flows down through a passage defined by the pair of side wall portions. In addition, the game ball can be made to collide with the protrusions to inhibit the flow down. Thereby, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C1 to C8, it is possible to slow down the flow speed of the game ball and make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down.

  In the gaming machine C9, the gaming machine C10 is characterized in that the projections on one opposing surface and the projections on the other opposing surface of the pair of side wall portions are arranged in a staggered manner.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C9, the protrusions on one opposing surface and the protrusions on the other opposing surface of the pair of side wall portions are arranged in a staggered manner, so When a game ball flows down through the passage, the game ball can collide with left and right protrusions alternately, and the game ball flowing down can meander. As a result, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C9, the flow velocity of the game ball can be made slower so that the game ball flowing down can be easily seen by the player, and the game ball flowing down is also perpendicular to the flow direction. It can be displaced to change the movement of the game ball.

  In the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame includes a recessed groove that is recessed in the front surface and extends in a substantially saw-tooth shape.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame includes a recessed groove that is recessed on the front surface and extends substantially in the shape of a saw blade. When the ball flows down, the game ball can be guided and meandered by the inner surface of the concave groove. Thereby, the flow-down speed of the game ball can be slowed so that the player can easily see the game ball flowing down. In addition, according to the gaming machine C11 subordinate to the gaming machine C7, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be guided to the front of the gaming area by using the concave groove as a lens, and the effect of light is exhibited. can do.

  In the gaming machine C11, the bent groove is arranged such that a bent portion thereof is shifted with respect to the protrusion in a flow-down direction of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C11, the concave groove is arranged with its bent portion shifted in the flow direction of the game ball with respect to the protrusion, so that the game ball flows down the area forming portion. In this case, the game balls meandering while being guided by the inner surface of the concave groove can easily collide with the protrusions. Therefore, a synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action by the concave groove and the action by the protrusion. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball can be made slower to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down. In addition, the change in the movement of the game ball can be further increased.

  In the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame includes a ridge projecting from the front surface thereof and extending substantially in a saw blade shape.

  According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame includes a protruding line that protrudes from the front surface and extends in a substantially saw-tooth shape. When the ball flows down, the game ball can be guided by the outer surface of the ridge to meander. Thereby, the flow-down speed of the game ball can be slowed so that the player can easily see the game ball flowing down. Further, according to the gaming machine C13 subordinate to the gaming machine C7, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be guided to the front of the gaming area by using the ridge as a lens, and the effect of light is exerted. can do.

  In the gaming machine C13, the ridge is arranged such that a bent portion thereof coincides with a flow direction of the gaming ball with respect to the projection.

  According to the gaming machine C14, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C13, the bent portions of the ridges are arranged so as to coincide with the flow direction of the gaming ball with respect to the projection, so that the gaming ball flows down the region forming portion. In this case, the game balls meandering while being guided by the outer surface of the ridges can be easily collided with the protrusions alternately. Therefore, a synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action of the ridges and the action of the protrusions. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball can be made slower to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down. In addition, the change in the movement of the game ball can be further increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines C11 to C14, the end side of the concave groove or ridge is directed to the exit of the passage defined by the pair of side wall portions while the extension direction thereof overlaps the downstream wall portion. Characteristic gaming machine C15.

  According to the gaming machine C15, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C11 to C14, the end side of the groove or ridge is divided by the pair of side walls while the extension direction overlaps the downstream wall. Since it is directed to the exit of the passage, the game ball guided to the end side of the concave groove or ridge can collide with the downstream wall portion from an oblique direction, thereby suppressing the bounce of the game ball and its Such a game ball can flow down toward the exit of the passage while reducing the flow down speed. As a result, the game ball can flow out smoothly from the exit of the passage.

<Concept of Invention with Winning Device 65 as an Example>
A seesaw member rotatably supported by a rotating shaft between one end side and the other end side is provided, and when the seesaw member is in an unloaded state, the one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. In the gaming machine that forms a state and forms a second state in which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation shaft so that one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered. The seesaw member has a receiving surface for receiving the game ball guided from the guiding means, and the receiving surface is located on the one end side with respect to the rotation shaft. A gaming machine D1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a seesaw member that is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft between one end side and the other end side is provided, and when the seesaw member is in a no-load state, one end side is lowered. And the second state where the other end side is raised and the game ball is placed on the other end side with respect to the rotating shaft, so that the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered. (For example, JP 2007-283136 A).

  According to this gaming machine, when the game ball is dropped with respect to the seesaw member in the first state and the game ball is placed between the rotating shaft and the other end, the weight of the game ball The other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised to form the second state. On the other hand, when the game ball placed between the rotating shaft and the other end side is discharged, the other end side is raised and the one end side is lowered to return to the first state. That is, by using the weight of the dropped game ball, the first state and the second state can be made to appear alternately, and an effect is produced by an operation in which one end side and the other end side of the seesaw member are displaced up and down. It can be carried out.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, the other end side is lowered and the one end side is maintained in the second state, and the first state and the second state. There was a problem that it was not possible to switch alternately.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the seesaw member has a receiving surface for receiving the game ball guided from the guide means located on one end side with respect to the rotation shaft, so that the other end side is lowered and one end side is raised. Even in the second state, the one end side can be lowered by the weight of the game ball received by the receiving surface. That is, it is possible to form a first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, the first state and the second state can be easily switched alternately.

  In the gaming machine D1, the receiving surface is configured to be able to send out the gaming ball to the other end when receiving the gaming ball guided from the guiding means in the first state. Game machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the receiving surface is formed so that when the gaming ball guided from the guiding means in the first state is received, the gaming ball can be sent to the other end side. Therefore, switching from the first state to the second state can be performed reliably.

  In addition, as a form formed so that the game ball can be sent to the other end side, for example, even in the first state, the receiving surface is inclined downward from one end side to the other end side, a protrusion is formed on the receiving surface, Examples are a form in which the protrusion is formed in a shape that rebounds the game ball guided from the guide means to the other end side.

  The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes a decorative member that is rotatably supported, and one end side of the seesaw member is connected to the decorative member, and the decorative member is rotated with the rotation of the seesaw member around the rotation axis. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that is displaced.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the gaming machine D3 includes a decorative member that is rotatably supported. One end of the seesaw member is connected to the decorative member, and the rotational axis of the seesaw member is the center. Since the link mechanism in which the decorative member is displaced with the rotation is formed, the movable range of the decorative member can be expanded by the link ratio, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Here, in order to surely perform the alternate switching between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member, the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised in the no-load state. It is preferable that the seesaw member can be returned early. In this case, according to the gaming machine D3, since the decoration member is connected to one end side of the seesaw member, the weight of the decoration member is applied to one end side of the seesaw member, and the one end side is lowered. be able to. Therefore, when it becomes a no-load state, it is easy to return the seesaw member to the first state in which the one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised, and as a result, the first state and the second state of the seesaw member are facilitated. This makes it easier to switch between states.

  Note that the weight of the decoration member inhibits the one end side of the seesaw member from being lifted (forms the second state), but the weight of the game ball is sufficiently heavy so that the game ball is more than the rotation axis of the seesaw member. Is also placed on the other end side, thereby forming a second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the guide means includes a passage through which the game ball passes, and a rolling motion in which the game ball rolls is extended in a substantially horizontal direction at the terminal end side of the passage. A gaming machine D4 in which a horizontal passage having a guide surface is formed, and a game ball rolling on the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage is guided from a substantially horizontal direction to the receiving surface of the seesaw member.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 to D3, the guide means includes a passage through which the gaming ball passes, and therefore, a plurality of gaming balls can be stored using this passage. The plurality of game balls can be sequentially guided from the passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member.

  However, even in this case, in the form in which the game balls are guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member by dropping from above, when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, the plurality of game balls are placed on the receiving surface. The seesaw member cannot be switched alternately between the first state and the second state.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D4, on the terminal end side of the passage, a horizontal passage having a rolling guide surface that extends in a substantially horizontal direction and on which a game ball rolls is formed. Since the game balls rolling on the motion guide surface are guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member from a substantially horizontal direction, they can be sequentially guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member one by one (that is, the receiving surface is horizontal). It is possible to receive one ball at a time from the passage), and it is possible to avoid a plurality of game balls from being stacked on the receiving surface. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform alternate switching between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member.

  In the gaming machine D4, the guide means includes an upstream passage connected to the upstream side of the horizontal passage and extending in a direction different from the extending direction of the horizontal passage, and the extending length of the horizontal passage Is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the guide means includes an upstream passage connected to the upstream side of the horizontal passage and extending in a direction different from the extending direction of the horizontal passage, Since the extension length of the horizontal passage is set to be smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, even when a plurality of game balls are stored in the passage, one game ball is placed on the receiving surface of the seesaw member. Guidance can be provided with a gap.

  That is, since the extension length of the horizontal passage is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, only one game ball can exist in the horizontal passage, and the extension of the horizontal passage is possible. Since the installation direction and the extension direction of the upstream passage are different directions, when the sphere flows from the upstream passage to the horizontal passage, it is necessary to change the inflow direction. The time required for inflow into the horizontal passage can be increased. Therefore, when the previous game ball existing in the horizontal passage is guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member, the game ball after the upstream passage flows into the horizontal passage while taking time to change the direction. The game balls are guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. That is, the subsequent game ball is spaced from the previous game ball. As a result, it is possible to guide the game balls one by one on the receiving surface of the seesaw member with an interval.

  In the gaming machine D4 or D5, at least in the second state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned above the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4 or D5, the receiving surface of the seesaw member rolls in the horizontal passage at least in the second state (the state where the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered). Positioned above the guide surface, that is, a step is formed between the receiving surface and the rolling guide surface, so that the game ball rolling on the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage is guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. When this is done, the game ball can be ridden on the receiving surface (collision with the step), and this receiving operation (collision) can be used to easily lower the receiving surface of the seesaw member. As a result, it is possible to easily form the first state in which the one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised.

  In the gaming machine D6, at least in the first state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage or below the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage. Characteristic gaming machine D7.

  Here, when the seesaw member is in the first state, the seesaw member is in an unloaded state, and the game ball received from the receiving surface guided from the horizontal passage is promptly sent to the other end side. This means that it is required to apply the weight of the game ball to the other end side of the rotation axis and to lower the other end side (form the second state).

  In this case, according to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, at least in the first state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage or the horizontal passage is turned. Since it is located below the moving guide surface, it is possible to smoothly guide the game ball from the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. That is, unlike the case of the second state, it is not necessary for the game ball to ride on the receiving surface (collision with the step), and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a time lag due to such an operation. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly sent out to the other end side, and as a result, it is possible to easily form the second state in which the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered.

  In the first state, it is preferable that the receiving surface of the seesaw member is flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage. When the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned below the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage, the game ball guided from the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage is dropped onto the receiving surface of the seesaw member, so that the game ball This is because the time lag occurs and a time lag occurs, and the load on the rotating shaft of the seesaw member increases due to the impact of dropping.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the seesaw member is formed by bending the other end side upward in a substantially square shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft. Machine D8.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the seesaw member is bent upward in a substantially square shape at the other end when viewed in the axial direction of the rotation shaft. Since it is formed, it is possible to easily perform alternate switching between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member while suppressing the space required for arranging the seesaw member.

  In other words, if the seesaw member has an insufficient descent on the other end side relative to the rotation axis, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side (that is, the other end side is lowered and the second state is The time during which the first state and the second state are formed is hindered. However, if the entire area on the other end side of the rotation shaft is inclined downward, the other end side protrudes from the space allowed for the seesaw member arrangement (that is, the space required for the seesaw member arrangement increases). ). On the other hand, when the length from the rotation shaft to the other end side is shortened so as to fit in the space allowed for the placement of the seesaw member, the time when the game ball is placed on the other end side (that is, The time during which the other end is lowered and the second state is formed is shortened, and the formation of the second state becomes uncertain, so that the alternate switching between the first state and the second state is hindered. Further, in order to fit in the space allowed for the placement of the seesaw member while securing the length from the rotation shaft to the other end side, the downward inclination on the other end side is insufficient with respect to the rotation shaft. .

  On the other hand, by forming the other end side of the seesaw member in a shape that bends upward in a substantially square shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft, each of the above-mentioned problems can be solved, and as a result, It is possible to easily perform the alternate switching between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member while suppressing the space required for arranging the seesaw member.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the game machine includes an inflow port into which a game ball rolled from the rotation shaft toward the other end side of the seesaw member is provided. A gaming machine D9, characterized in that a pawl portion is formed so as to be able to switch the rolling direction of the game ball rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side to the direction toward the inflow port.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, on the other end side of the seesaw member, the rolling direction of the gaming ball rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side is directed to the inflow port. Since the claw portion formed so as to be switchable in the direction is projected, the game ball can be promptly introduced into the inflow port. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end of the seesaw member (that is, the time during which the other end is lowered and the second state is formed) becomes too long, and the first state and the second state It is possible to suppress that the alternate switching with is inhibited.

  In the gaming machine D9, the claw portion is disposed so as to be biased to the opposite side of the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D9, the claw portion is disposed on the opposite side of the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member, so that the position where the game ball rolls is the position of the seesaw member. Even when the width varies, the time when the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis of the seesaw member (that is, the time when the other state is lowered and the second state is formed) It can be made constant and easy.

  That is, the pawl portion is arranged in the width direction of the seesaw member so as to be biased to the side opposite to the inflow port, so that the game ball rolling on the back side in the width direction of the seesaw member (the side opposite to the inflow port) Because the distance to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member is long, the game collides with the claw portion at an early stage and rolls to the inflow port, while rolling in front of the seesaw member in the width direction (side closer to the inflow port). Since the sphere has a short distance to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member, the collision with the claw portion can be delayed. Thereby, in each of the former and the latter, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side with respect to the rotation shaft of the seesaw member can be made substantially equal.

  As a result, even when the rolling position of the game ball varies in the width direction of the seesaw member, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the seesaw member rotation axis (that is, the other end side is The time during which the second state is lowered and the second state is formed can be easily made constant.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D10, the seesaw member is provided with an inflow port into which a game ball rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side thereof, and the lateral width of the inflow port is equal to the diameter of the game ball. A gaming machine D11 characterized in that it is set to a size larger than twice.

  According to the gaming machine D11, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D10, the seesaw member is provided with an inflow port into which a game ball rolled from its rotating shaft toward the other end side is provided, and the lateral width of the inflow port Is set to a size larger than twice the diameter of the game ball, so that the next game ball is rolled toward the other end side in a state where the previous game ball exists on the other end side of the seesaw member. In this case, each of these game balls can smoothly flow into the inflow port. For example, even when a later game ball collides with a previous game ball and these game balls are simultaneously rolled to the inflow port, each can be smoothly introduced.

  In the gaming machine D11, the inflow port is set such that the height dimension on the rotating shaft side is larger than the height dimension on the other end side of the seesaw member.

  According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D11, the inlet has a height dimension on the rotating shaft side larger than the height dimension on the other end side of the seesaw member. Even if the next game ball rolls toward the other end side and collides with the other game ball on the other end side of the seesaw member, each of these game balls can be smoothly transferred to the inflow port. Can flow in. That is, even when the game ball after colliding with the previous game ball is bounced up, the height of the inflow port on the rotating shaft side is increased. It can be discharged smoothly. On the other hand, even if the previous game ball collides with the subsequent game ball, it is difficult to jump up, so the height at the other end is lowered, so that the previous game ball flows smoothly into the inlet However, the space required for the inflow port can be suppressed, and a space for disposing other members can be secured accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D12, there is provided suppression means for suppressing guidance of the game ball from the guide means to the seesaw member in a state where the seesaw member is disposed at least in the second state. Game machine D13.

  According to the gaming machine D13, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D12, in the state where the seesaw member is disposed at least in the second state, the gaming machine D13 includes a suppression unit that suppresses the guidance of the game ball from the guiding unit to the seesaw member. It is possible to secure time for the game ball on the other end side of the seesaw member to be thrown away. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, the first state and the second state can be easily switched alternately.

  In the gaming machine D13, the guide unit includes a delivery port that sends out a game ball to the seesaw member, and the suppression unit includes a regulating portion that is disposed on one end side of the seesaw member with respect to the rotation shaft. When the seesaw member is rotated to at least the second state, at least a part of the restricting portion protrudes to the delivery port, thereby suppressing the delivery of game balls from the delivery port to the seesaw member. A gaming machine D14.

  According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D13, the suppression means includes a regulating portion disposed on one end side of the seesaw member with respect to the rotation shaft, and the seesaw member is rotated at least to the second state. Then, by projecting at least a part of the restricting portion to the delivery port, the game ball is prevented from being sent from the delivery port to the seesaw member, so that the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. That is, a mechanism for projecting the restricting portion at the delivery port can also be used as the seesaw member, and a driving mechanism for displacing the restricting portion and a control means for controlling the displacement timing can be eliminated.

  The state in which the restricting portion protrudes to the delivery port and the delivery of the game ball is suppressed is when the gaming machine cannot pass through the delivery port and when the game ball can pass through the delivery port. Includes both. Even in the latter case (passable), the restricting portion protrudes to the delivery port, and the passage width of the delivery port is narrowed, so that the game ball is collided with the inner wall of the delivery port and the outer wall of the restriction portion. Since it is sent out from the outlet, the game ball is prevented from being sent. That is, it is possible to separate the connected game balls.

<Concept of Invention with Winning Device 65 as an Example>
A seesaw member rotatably supported by a rotating shaft between one end side and the other end side is provided, and when the seesaw member is in an unloaded state, the one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. In the gaming machine forming the state and forming the second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered by placing the game ball on the other end side with respect to the rotation shaft, the rotation shaft A gaming machine E1, further comprising a discharging means for easily discharging the game ball placed on the other end side.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a seesaw member that is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft between one end side and the other end side is provided, and when the seesaw member is in a no-load state, one end side is lowered. And the second state where the other end side is raised and the game ball is placed on the other end side with respect to the rotating shaft, so that the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered. (For example, JP 2007-283136 A).

  According to this gaming machine, when the game ball is dropped with respect to the seesaw member in the first state and the game ball is placed between the rotating shaft and the other end, the weight of the game ball The other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised to form the second state. On the other hand, when the game ball placed between the rotating shaft and the other end side is discharged, the other end side is raised and the one end side is lowered to return to the first state. That is, by using the weight of the dropped game ball, the first state and the second state can be made to appear alternately, and an effect is produced by an operation in which one end side and the other end side of the seesaw member are displaced up and down. It can be carried out.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, the other end side is lowered and the one end side is maintained in the second state, and the first state and the second state. There was a problem that it was not possible to switch alternately.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the seesaw member is provided with a discharging means for easily discharging the game ball placed on the other end side, so that the second end is lowered and the one end side is raised. Even in the state, it is possible to discharge the game ball from the other end side by the discharging means, remove the weight of the game ball on the other end side, and easily lower the one end side. That is, the state in which the game ball is placed on the other end side than the rotation shaft (that is, the state in which the second state is formed) is terminated early, and one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. The first state can be formed. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, the first state and the second state can be easily switched alternately.

  In the gaming machine E1, the discharge means includes a shaft support portion that is rotatably supported, a receiving portion that is disposed on one side of the shaft support portion and that receives the game ball guided from the guide means, and a receiving portion thereof. And an extruding part disposed with the shaft supporting part interposed therebetween, and when the receiving part receives a game ball guided from the guiding means, the pushing part is rotated by rotation about the shaft supporting part. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that a portion protrudes toward the other end of the seesaw member.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, when the receiving unit receives the game ball guided from the guiding unit, the ejecting unit is rotated by the shaft support unit so that the pushing unit is the seesaw member. Since it protrudes to the other end side, the game ball placed on the other end side of the seesaw member can be pushed out by the pushing portion and discharged from the seesaw member. Accordingly, the other end side of the seesaw member can be raised by discharging the game ball by the pushing portion, and the one end side of the seesaw member can be lowered by the weight of the game ball received by the receiving portion. It is possible to make it easy to switch between the first state and the second state alternately by ending early. Further, since the receiving portion rotates using the operation of receiving the game ball (the protruding portion is protruded), a driving mechanism for such rotation and a control means for controlling the rotation timing can be eliminated.

  In the gaming machine E2, the gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the ejecting means is pivotally supported by the seesaw member so that the shaft support portion is rotatable.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E2, the discharging means is supported by the seesaw member so that the shaft support portion is rotatably supported. Therefore, the relative position of the discharging means with respect to the seesaw member can be made constant. . Therefore, the game ball guided from the guide means can be easily received by the receiving portion, and the rotation around the shaft support portion can be reliably formed, and the push-out portion protruding to the other end side of the seesaw member by the rotation can be played. The game ball can be reliably pushed out (discharged) from the seesaw member by making it easy to contact the ball. As a result, the first state and the second state can be easily switched alternately.

  In the gaming machine E2 or E3, with respect to the virtual planes orthogonal to the rotation shaft of the seesaw member and the shaft support portion of the discharge means, the discharge means is configured such that the receiving portion is retractable more than the push-out portion. A gaming machine E4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2 or E3, the discharging means has a receiving part whose retractable amount is larger than the pushing part, so that the discharging means when the game ball is received by the receiving part. By securing the rotation angle, the energy received from the received game ball can be increased accordingly. As a result, it is possible to secure the pushing force of the game ball by the pushing portion accompanying the retreat of the receiving portion. In other words, the game balls can be easily discharged quickly.

  On the other hand, the amount of retraction of the pushing portion is smaller than that of the receiving portion, so that when the game ball that rolls the seesaw member toward the other end moves the pushing portion backward, the rolling trajectory of the game ball increases. Can be suppressed, and such game balls can be easily discharged quickly.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the discharging means is mounted on the other end side of the rotating shaft by raising one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member relative to the other axial direction. A gaming machine E5 that makes it easier to discharge a placed game ball.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the discharge means raises one axial direction of the rotation axis of the seesaw member relative to the other axial direction, By increasing the angle of inclination of the seesaw member descending from one axial direction to the other axial direction of the rotating shaft, the game balls placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft can be discharged from the seesaw member. As a result, the first state and the second state can be easily switched alternately.

  It should be noted that the fact that one axial direction of the rotating shaft is raised relatively higher than the other axial direction of the rotating shaft is that it is sufficient that the amount of increase in one axial direction is larger than the amount of increase in the other axial direction. Therefore, the state after raising may be arrange | positioned in the position where one axial direction is lower than the other axial direction.

  In the gaming machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state in the gaming machine E5, in the first section, one of the axial directions of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member is axially In the second section that is not raised relative to the other and is closer to the second state than the first section, one axial direction of the rotation axis of the seesaw member is relative to the other axial direction. A game machine E6 characterized by being raised.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E5, the discharging means is configured such that when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, the rotation axis of the seesaw member is in the first section. In the second section that is not relatively raised with respect to the other axial direction and is closer to the second state than the first section, the one axial direction of the rotation shaft of the seesaw member is the other in the axial direction. Therefore, the alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly while the second state can be reliably formed.

  That is, if the operation of raising one axial direction of the rotation axis of the seesaw member relative to the other axial direction is performed from the first section, the discharge of the game ball is accelerated and the second state is reliably formed. Can not. On the other hand, if the operation to raise one axial direction of the rotation axis of the seesaw member relative to the other axial direction is not performed, the discharge of the game ball becomes slow (the residence time becomes long), so that the second state To be easily maintained.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, in the first section, one axial direction of the rotation shaft of the seesaw member is changed to the other axial direction. On the other hand, since it is not raised relatively, it is possible to suppress the expulsion of the game ball (that is, to keep the game ball) and to easily form the second state reliably. On the other hand, in the second section, one axial direction of the rotation axis of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction, so that the game ball can be quickly discharged and the game ball is placed. The time (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened. As a result, the alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly while the second state can be reliably formed.

  In the gaming machine E5 or the gaming machine E6, the seesaw member has a cam formed at least in one axial direction of the rotary shaft, and from the axis of the rotary shaft to the outer peripheral surface of the cam as the rotary shaft rotates. The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the axial direction one of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction by increasing the distance.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E5 or E6, a cam is formed at least in one axial direction of the rotating shaft, and from the axis of the rotating shaft to the outer peripheral surface of the cam as the rotating shaft rotates. As the distance of is increased, one axial direction of the rotary shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction, so that the drive mechanism for operating the rotary shaft and the control for controlling the drive timing thereof Means can be eliminated. Moreover, while being able to form a 1st area and a 2nd area reliably, the freedom degree of the design of the ratio of a 1st and 2nd area can be raised.

  In any one of the gaming machines E5 to E7, the seesaw member includes a push-up portion disposed on a movement locus when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, and the push-up portion contacts the seesaw member. The game machine E8 is characterized in that, by being in contact, one axial direction of the rotation shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E5 to E7, the push-up unit disposed on the movement locus when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, When the push-up portion is brought into contact with the seesaw member, one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member is raised relatively with respect to the other of the axial directions, so that a drive mechanism for driving the rotation shaft and its drive Control means for controlling the timing can be dispensed with. Moreover, while being able to form a 1st area and a 2nd area reliably, the freedom degree of the design of the ratio of these each area can be raised.

<About the concept of the invention as an example of the base side engaging member 12726>
In a gaming machine comprising a base member and a displacement member that is rotatably disposed at the base end side of the base member and rotated between a retracted position and an extended position, the base member includes a base-side engaging member. In addition, when the displacement member includes a displacement-side engagement member formed to be engageable with the base-side engagement member at the retracted position, and the first displacement member is disposed at the extended position, the base The gaming machine F1, wherein the base-side engagement member is formed so as to be difficult for a player to see when viewed from the front of the member.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member that are displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driving force applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. An effect member having a transmission member for transmission and a driving means for applying a driving force to the transmission member is provided, and the first displacement member and the second displacement are provided via the first groove and the second groove provided in the transmission member. There is a gaming machine in which a member is connected to a transmission member (for example, JP 2009-100994 A).

  In this conventional gaming machine, the connecting member is connected between the base member and the second displacement member in a erected state, and in the retracted position, the base member and the second displacement member are positioned relatively far from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. The two displacement members are connected by a connecting member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member attempts to tilt the portion opposite to the rotation axis (that is, the second displacement member side) in the direction away from the base member, the first displacement member is not between the base member and the second displacement member. The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the intervening connecting member.

  However, in the gaming machine F1, the base end side of the displacement member is rotatably supported, while the side opposite to the base end side (tip side) is a free end. Therefore, at the retracted position, the side opposite to the base end side (front end side) is likely to tilt (forward tilt) in the direction away from the base member due to its own weight or the weight of the decorative portion arranged on the front side.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine F1, the base member includes the base side engagement member, the displacement member includes the displacement side engagement member, and the base side engagement is performed when the displacement member is displaced to the retracted position. Since the member and the displacement-side engagement member are formed so as to be engageable with each other, it is possible to suppress the side opposite to the base end side (tip end side) of the displacement member from being inclined in a direction away from the base member.

  On the other hand, when the base side engaging member is provided on the base member and the displacement side engaging member is provided on the displacement member as described above, when the displacement member is projected to the projecting position, the front surface of the base member is obtained. Is exposed, the base side engaging member is visually recognized by the player, and the appearance is impaired. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, since the base-side engagement member is formed so as not to be visually recognized by the player in the front view of the base member, it is possible to suppress the appearance from being damaged.

  In the gaming machine F1, the base side engaging member is disposed in front of the base member so that the base side engaging member can be projected and retracted. When the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base side engaging member is moved to the front side of the base member. The game machine F2 is characterized in that when the displacement member is rotated to the extended position, the base side engaging member is immersed toward the back side of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the base-side engaging member is disposed so as to be able to appear and retract on the front surface of the base member, and when the displacement member is rotated to the extended position, Since the combined member is immersed toward the back side of the base member, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the base side engaging member in the front view of the base member, and the appearance can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base side engagement member is protruded from the front surface of the base member, and accordingly, the protrusion height of the displacement side engagement member from the back surface of the displacement member is lowered accordingly. be able to. Thereby, when a displacement member rotates, it can suppress that a displacement side engaging member interferes with another member. In other words, a space for displacing other members can be ensured as much as the protrusion height of the displacement side engaging member can be lowered.

  The gaming machine F2 includes a driving unit that rotationally drives the displacement member with respect to the base member, and the base-side engagement member protrudes from the front surface of the base member by the action of the driving force of the driving unit. A gaming machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F2, the gaming machine F3 includes driving means that rotationally drives the displacement member with respect to the base member, and the base side engaging member is moved by the action of the driving force of the driving means. Since it protrudes from the front, it is possible to reduce the product cost by also using the driving means. That is, the driving force for rotationally driving the displacement member can also be used as the driving force for causing the base side engaging member to protrude, and it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for such protrusion.

  The base side engaging member is projected by the action of the driving force of the driving means. When the displacement member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the base side engagement is directly or indirectly by the displacement member. When the member is displaced in the projecting direction or when the transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member is displaced, the base side engaging member is displaced in the projecting direction directly or indirectly by the displacement member. The form etc. which are made are illustrated.

  The gaming machine F3 includes urging means for urging the base side engaging member in the immersion direction, and when the action of the driving force of the driving means is released, the action of the urging force of the urging means The gaming machine F4, wherein the base side engaging member is returned to the immersive position.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F3, the gaming machine F4 includes a biasing means that biases the base side engaging member toward the immersion direction, and when the action of the driving force of the driving means is released, Since the base side engaging member is returned to the immersive position by the action of the urging force of the urging means, it is not necessary to link both the protruding direction and the immersing direction with the action of the driving force of the driving means, but only the protruding direction is linked. Therefore, the structure can be simplified accordingly.

  In the gaming machine F1, the base side engaging member is disposed so as to be retractable from the front surface of the base member, and when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base side engaging member is moved to the front surface of the base member. When the displacement member is rotated to the extended position, the base-side engagement member is advanced toward the front side of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the base side engaging member is retracted from the front of the base member when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position. By engaging the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member, not only can the tilting of the side opposite to the base end side (the front end side) of the displacement member in the direction away from the base member be suppressed, but also the base side engagement The backlash in the front-rear direction on the distal end side of the displacement member can be suppressed by narrowing the interval between the engagement surfaces (inner surfaces) of the member and the displacement-side engagement member.

  Further, when the displacement member is rotated to the extended position, the base side engaging member is advanced toward the front of the base member, so that the base side engaging member is visually recognized by the player in the front view of the base member. It can be made difficult and it can suppress that an external appearance is impaired.

<About the concept of the invention taking the right rotation unit 18600 as an example>
A base member, a first displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, a second displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the first displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member The first displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable at least in the first direction, and the second displacement member can contact the first displacement member or the base member. The inertia force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member is applied as a force in a direction to displace the first displacement member in the first direction. Characteristic gaming machine G1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member that are displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driving force applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. There is a gaming machine provided with a driving means for giving (for example, JP 2009-100994 A). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to form an aspect in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced and an aspect in which only one of the first displacement member or the second displacement member is displaced.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, for example, in the aspect in which only the second displacement member is displaced, the load on the driving unit is relatively small, while in the aspect in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced, Since the load on the driving means is relatively large, the load on the driving means changes (increases) abruptly when the mode is switched. For this reason, there is a problem that it is difficult to perform stable (constant) displacement, such as a decrease in durability of the driving means and a decrease in the displacement speed when the mode is switched.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the second displacement member is formed so as to be able to contact the first displacement member or the base member, and is generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member. Since the inertial force to be applied acts as a force in a direction in which the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the first aspect in which the second displacement member is displaced is switched to the second aspect in which the first displacement member is displaced. In this case, the action of the inertial force can be used as an auxiliary force, and a sudden change (increase) in the load of the driving means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability of the driving means and to suppress a decrease in the displacement speed at the time of switching from the first mode to the second mode, thereby facilitating stable (constant) displacement. .

  Note that, as the first aspect and the second aspect, for example, the first aspect displaces only the second displacement member, and the second aspect displaces both the first displacement member and the second displacement member. Alternatively, the mode in which the first mode displaces only the second displacement member and the second mode displaces only the first displacement member is exemplified. The latter aspect is particularly effective when the load required for changing the first displacement member is sufficiently larger than the load required for displacement of the second displacement member (for example, the weight of the first displacement member compared to the second displacement member). If you think that is enough, it will be effective.

  In the gaming machine G1, the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the directions of the rotation axes of the second displacement members are parallel to each other.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. Since the directions of the rotation axes of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are parallel to each other, the inertial force generated when the second displacement member abuts against the first displacement member or the base member is generated. As a force for displacing the first displacement member in the first direction, the first displacement member can be efficiently applied to the first displacement member.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the displacement direction of the second displacement member when the second displacement member is brought into contact with the first displacement member or the base member is a direction including a component that moves downward in the gravitational direction. A gaming machine G3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the direction of displacement of the second displacement member when the second displacement member is brought into contact with the first displacement member or the base member is downward in the gravitational direction. Since it is the direction including the component which goes, it can be easy to ensure the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the first direction is a direction including a component directed upward in the direction of gravity.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the first direction is a direction including a component that moves upward in the direction of gravity, so the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base It is particularly effective to use the inertial force generated by the contact with the member as an auxiliary force in the direction in which the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first displacement member is rotatably supported at one end side thereof by the base member, and the second displacement member has one end side thereof at the first displacement member. When the other end side of the second displacement member is brought close to the one end side of the first displacement member from the direction opposite to the first direction, the second displacement member is supported by the other end side of the second displacement member. The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that the other end side of the game machine is in contact with the base member.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is the first displacement. When the other end side of the second displacement member is pivotally supported on the other end side of the member and approached to the one end side of the first displacement member from the direction opposite to the first direction, the other end of the second displacement member Since the side is in contact with the base member, the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the base member is efficiently applied as a force in a direction in which the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction. Can do. That is, when switching from the first mode for displacing the second displacement member to the second mode for displacing the first displacement member, the action of inertial force is used to assist the displacement of the first displacement member in the first direction. It can be used efficiently as power.

  As a result, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive means, to improve the durability of the drive means, and to reduce the displacement speed when switching from the first mode to the second mode. It is possible to suppress and facilitate stable (constant) displacement.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first displacement member is rotatably supported at one end side thereof by the base member, and the second displacement member has one end side thereof at the first displacement member. When the other end side of the second displacement member is close to the one end side of the first displacement member from the same direction as the first direction, the second displacement member The other end side of the game machine G6 is in contact with the first displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is the first displacement. When the other end side of the second displacement member is pivotally supported on the other end side of the member and is close to the one end side of the first displacement member from the same direction as the first direction, the other end of the second displacement member Since the side is in contact with the first displacement member, the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member is efficiently used as the force in the direction to displace the first displacement member in the first direction. Can act on. That is, when switching from the first mode for displacing the second displacement member to the second mode for displacing the first displacement member, the action of inertial force is used to assist the displacement of the first displacement member in the first direction. It can be used efficiently as power.

  As a result, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive means, to improve the durability of the drive means, and to reduce the displacement speed when switching from the first mode to the second mode. It is possible to suppress and facilitate stable (constant) displacement.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G7, the game machine includes a transmission member having a drive pin for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member includes the drive pin And a first groove having a non-interference section that is connected to the action section and that does not interfere with the drive pin, and the second displacement member is an action section that receives the action from the drive pin. And the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced by displacing the drive pin in the overlapped first groove and second groove. Gaming machine G8.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 to G7, the first groove of the first displacement member is connected to the working section that receives the action from the driving pin and the working section, and the driving pin interferes. A non-interference section that does not act, and the second groove of the second displacement member includes at least an action section that receives an action from the drive pin, so that the drive pin has a non-interference section of the first groove and an action section of the second groove. By being displaced, the first mode in which the second displacement member is displaced while the first displacement member is maintained in the stopped state, and the drive pin is displaced in the action section of the first groove and the action section of the second groove. By doing so, it is possible to form a second mode in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced, and to smoothly transition from the first mode to the second mode.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A23, B1 to B11, C1 to C15, D1 to D14, E1 to E8, F1 to F5, and G1 to G8, the gaming machine is a slot machine. . Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A23, B1 to B11, C1 to C15, D1 to D14, E1 to E8, F1 to F5, and G1 to G8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine K2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A23, B1 to B11, C1 to C15, D1 to D14, E1 to E8, F1 to F5, and G1 to G8, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine A gaming machine K3 characterized by being. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board 61 Inner rail 86, 2086 Center frame 600, 3600, 4600, 5600, 6600, 7600, 18600, 19680 Left rotation unit (displacement member)
610 Back base (base body)
620, 18620 Front base (base body)
620a Inclined surface 621 Bearing recess (gear receiving portion)
623 Protruding part (gear receiving part)
626 ridge 627 bearing portion 628 protruding portion 630, 3630, 4630, 5630, 19630 first displacement member 631 rotating shaft 634 contact portion 635 first groove 635a action section 635b non-interference section 640, 3640, 5640, 6640, 7640, 18640, 19640 Second displacement member 641,3641,5641,6641,7641,1961 Driven member 641b Second groove 6641c, 7641c Connecting groove (third groove)
6641c1 action section 6641c2 non-interference section 3641d, 5541d connecting pin (drive pin)
642, 18642, 19642 Connection displacement member 642b Decoration part 642c Overhang part 643 Connection pin 650 Drive motor (drive means)
651 1st pinion (gear)
652 Rack member (gear)
653 Second pinion (gear)
654 Transmission member 654a Rotating shaft 654b Drive pin 654c Recessed portion (recessed portion)
660, 3660, 4660, 5660, 7660 Third displacement member 700, 8700, 9700, 10700, 11700, 12700, 13700, 14700, 15700, 16700, 17700 Right rotation unit (displacement member)
710 Back base (base body)
720, 12720, 13720, 14720, 15720, 16720, 17720 Front base (base body)
726, 12726, 14726, 15726 Base side engaging member 726a Base portion 726b Bending portion 727 Receiving recess (receiving portion)
730 1st displacement member 740, 12740, 16740, 17740 2nd displacement member 742, 13742, 16742, 17742 Displacement side engagement member 742a, 13742a, 16742a, 17742a Base part 742b Bending part 743 Receiving recessed part 8744a Connecting pin (Interposition means, Guided part)
11747 pinion gear (intermediate means)
750 Drive motor (drive means)
754 Transmission member (driving body)
760 First connecting member (connecting member)
770, 8770, 9770 Connection second member (connection member)
8773, 9773 Guide part (intermediate means)
11774 Rack gear (intervening means)
25817 Push-up part (discharge means)
821c Outlet 821d Outlet (Inlet)
821e Support shaft (rotary shaft)
824 Intermediate bottom wall (guide means)
824a Guide bottom surface (guide means, rolling guide surface)
840, 20840 Seesaw member 844 Receiving surface 847 Claw portion 20848 Restricting portion (suppressing means)
850 Follower member (decorative member)
21870, 22870, 23870 Rotating member (discharge means)
21871 Shaft support 21872 Receiving plate (receiving portion)
21873 Extruded plate (extruded part)
24877b Cam part (cam, discharge means)
950 Side wall part 960 Downstream wall part 971 Concave groove 972 Protrusion R Area | region formation part L Extension length SP1-SP4 of a horizontal channel | path Energizing spring (urging means)

Claims (3)

A seesaw member rotatably supported by a rotating shaft between one end side and the other end side is provided, and when the seesaw member is in an unloaded state, the one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. In the gaming machine that forms the second state in which the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered by forming the state and placing the game ball on the other end side from the rotation shaft.
Guiding means for guiding the game ball to the seesaw member is provided, and the seesaw member has a receiving surface for receiving the game ball guided from the guiding means, and the receiving surface is located on the one end side with respect to the rotation shaft. A gaming machine characterized by that.   The said receiving surface is formed so that it can send out the game ball to the said other end side, when the game ball guided from the said guide means in the said 1st state is received. Gaming machine.   A decorative member that is rotatably supported is provided, one end side of the seesaw member is connected to the decorative member, and the decorative member is displaced with rotation about the rotation axis of the seesaw member. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.

Images